Documentos de Académico
Documentos de Profesional
Documentos de Cultura
Autobag 500 and 550 User Manual SPANISH
Autobag 500 and 550 User Manual SPANISH
INSTRUCCIONES ORIGINALES
Pieza n.º AB5-UM-ES
Rev. A
1 de mayo de 2019
Historial de revisiones
Número de Descripción / Páginas
Fecha Rev. Documento
pieza afectadas
1 de mayo de A AB5-UM-ES Manual del Todos
2019 usuario
• Teflon™
• Scotch-Brite™
• Loctite®
PÁGINA EN BLANCO
Información de contacto regional
País/Región Información de la oficina
América del Norte
Estados Unidos, Automated Packaging Systems, Inc.
Oficinas corporativas 10175 Philipp Parkway
Streetsboro, OH 44241
EE. UU.
Web: www.autobag.com
Correo electrónico: info@autobag.com o
customerservice@autobag.com
Canadá Automated Packaging Systems, Inc.
10175 Philipp Parkway
Streetsboro, OH 44241
EE. UU.
Téléphone: +1-330-342-2000
Fax: +1-330-342-2400
Télécopie: +1-330-342-2400
Courriel: info@autobag.com
México Automated Packaging Systems, Inc.
10175 Philipp Parkway
Streetsboro, OH 44241
EE. UU.
Telefoon: 0032/27.25.31.00
Fax: 0032/27.25.33.62
Francés:
Automated Packaging Systems
Leuvensesteenweg 542 C2-4
1930 Zaventem, België
Téléphone: 0032/27.25.31.00
Fax: 0032/27.25.33.62
Courriel: info@autobag.be
Bulgaria No hay traducción al ruso disponible. Usar el alemán.
Automated Packging Systems, Ltd.
Heinrich-Eberhardt-Str. 10
38304 Wolfenbüttel
Teléfono: 05331-90383-0
Fax: 05331-90383-33
Correo electrónico: kontakt@autobag.de
Europa (continuación)
Dinamarca Automated Packaging Systems
Enigma Business Park
Sandys Road
Malvern
WR14 1JJ
Reino Unido
Sähköposti: sales@autobag.co.uk
Francia Automated Packaging Systems
25B Rue du 35ème Régiment d’Aviation
69500 BRON
FRANCIA
Tel: 04 72 15 86 50
Fax: 04 72 15 86 59
Telefon: 05331-90383-0
Fax: 05331-90383-33
Tālrunis: 05331-90383-0
Fakss: 05331-90383-33
E-pasts: kontakt@autobag.de
Lituania Automated Packging Systems, Ltd.
Heinrich-Eberhardt-Str. 10
38304 Wolfenbüttel
Telefonas: 05331-90383-0
Faksas: 05331-90383-33
Telefoon: 0032/27.25.31.00
Fax: 0032/27.25.33.62
Telefon.: 05331-90383-0
Fax: 05331-90383-33
Tel.: 05331-90383-0
Fax: 05331-90383-33
E-post: mktonline@autobag.co.uk
Suiza Lo mismo para ambos idiomas
Automated Packaging Systems Ltd.
Heinrich-Eberhardt-Str. 10
38304 Wolfenbüttel
Tel: 05331-90383-0
Fax: 05331-90383-33
Módulo Funcionamiento
Sección 1: Seguridad y descripción general
Sección 2: Introducción
Sección 3: Funcionamiento
Módulo mantenimiento
Sección 4: Mantenimiento
Glosario
ontenido 1
PÁGINA EN BLANCO
Contenido 2
SEGURIDAD Y
DESCRIPCIÓN GENERAL
Tema Página
Seguridad............................................................................ 1-3
Advertencias, precauciones y notas .................................... 1-4
Etiquetas de seguridad de la máquina................................. 1-5
Riesgo residual ................................................................... 1-7
Condiciones para el uso previsto de la máquina ................. 1-9
Precauciones .................................................................... 1-10
Uso indebido ..................................................................... 1-11
Resultados de pruebas de nivel de sonido ........................ 1-12
Página 1-1
PÁGINA EN BLANCO
Página 1-2
Seguridad
Automated Packaging Systems considera que la seguridad es lo primero y lo más importante.
Comprender las inquietudes de seguridad relacionadas con las máquinas de Automated Packaging
Systems ayudará al operador y al técnico de mantenimiento a comprender los peligros asociados con
el funcionamiento y el mantenimiento de la máquina, y qué pasos específicos se pueden seguir para
reducir el riesgo de lesiones del personal o daños al equipo. La no comprensión o la no observancia de
los procedimientos que se describen en este manual pueden causar la muerte o hacer que se
produzcan lesiones en el personal o daños al equipo.
Cuando se instale esta máquina o se la haga funcionar, el usuario final será responsable de cumplir
con todos los códigos de instalación y seguridad a nivel local, estatal y nacional. Consulte al gerente
de seguridad local o al supervisor acerca de las regulaciones vigentes para la región geográfica en la
que se instalará y funcionará la máquina.
La sección de Seguridad y descripción general cubrirá algunas de las técnicas para la reducción de
riesgos. No obstante, el usuario final deberá consultar a su departamento de seguridad local o a su
supervisor para conocer las políticas y los procedimientos locales.
Página 1-3
Advertencias, precauciones y notas
A lo largo de este manual se utilizarán advertencias, precauciones y notas. Se utilizan para enfatizar
información importante, llamarle la atención sobre elementos específicos que están asociados a un
posible riesgo de seguridad o ayudar al operador/técnico con sus tareas.
Los símbolos de advertencias, precauciones y notas aparecerán únicamente en este manual. No los
encontrará en la máquina. El siguiente es un ejemplo de los símbolos y de la definición asociada con
cada tipo.
Página 1-4
Etiquetas de seguridad de la máquina
Las etiquetas de seguridad de la máquina se encontrarán en la máquina. Las etiquetas indicarán los
riesgos y las áreas peligrosas que pueden causar lesiones al personal o daños al equipo. Consulte la
Tabla 1-1.
ETIQUETA DESCRIPCIÓN
Página 1-5
DESCRIPCIÓN (Continuación) DE LA ETIQUETA (Continuación)
Evite lesiones o descargas eléctricas. Puede haber contactos
eléctricos abiertos o un voltaje peligroso. Alerta al usuario sobre
el voltaje peligroso dentro de la unidad que puede causar una
descarga eléctrica. Únicamente el personal de servicio calificado
deberá retirar la cubierta luego de realizar los procedimientos de
bloqueo y etiquetado.
Evite lesiones. No coloque las manos en las partes móviles, ya
que existe el riesgo de aplastamiento de las manos.
Página 1-6
DESCRIPCIÓN (Continuación) DE LA ETIQUETA (Continuación)
Riesgo residual
Riesgo residual es un término que se usa para hacer referencia al nivel de riesgo de un peligro
determinado luego de aplicar medidas de protección/seguridad (medidas de reducción del riesgo).
Ningún riesgo se puede reducir a cero, aun cuando se implementen los procedimientos de seguridad
adecuados.
En la sección Seguridad y descripción general, analizamos los métodos de reducción de riesgos, tales
como las etiquetas de seguridad. Sin embargo, pueden existir amenazas que persistan a pesar de
todos los esfuerzos que se hayan realizado para identificar y eliminar los riesgos.
Algunos de los riesgos residuales que pueden persistir luego de implementar los métodos de reducción
de riesgos son los siguientes:
• Posible peligro de ruido El uso de protección auditiva puede ser recomendado y/o exigido. Las
etiquetas de seguridad aplicadas en la máquina indican este riesgo.
Página 1-7
• Existe el peligro de una posible descarga eléctrica cuando se resuelven problemas con la
máquina encendida debido al voltaje dentro de la máquina. Únicamente el personal de servicio
autorizado puede retirar las cubiertas protectoras del equipo. Las etiquetas de seguridad
aplicadas en la máquina indican este riesgo.
• Posible peligro de lesiones Los sensores IR del Circuito de seguridad de la máquina pueden
llegar a entrecruzarse si se retiran las protecciones y se colocan las máquinas una frente a otra.
Esto podría impedir el funcionamiento correcto del Circuito de seguridad. Si las máquinas se
colocan una frente a otra, realice una verificación del Circuito de seguridad según se describe
en la Sección Mantenimiento cada vez que las máquinas se trasladen de un lugar a otro.
• Posible riesgo de resbalones, tropiezos y caídas Existe el riesgo de resbalones y caídas debido
al exceso de bolsas y al material de las bolsas que cae al suelo durante el funcionamiento de la
máquina. Con respecto a las máquinas equipadas con sellado de bordes, existe el riesgo de
tropiezos debido a la red de bordes, ya que esta puede trocar el piso dependiendo de la altura
de la máquina.
Página 1-8
Condiciones para el uso previsto de la
máquina
Esta máquina de Automated Packaging Systems ha sido diseñada para funcionar en condiciones de
entorno y funcionamiento específicas y para productos específicos. Estas condiciones se deben
cumplir para que la máquina funcione correctamente y se la pueda operar con seguridad. Si la
máquina no se hace funcionar en las condiciones establecidas para su uso previsto, tal situación se
considerará como uso indebido.
Página 1-9
Precauciones
Se deben tomar determinadas precauciones generales cuando se opere la máquina de empaquetado
automatizado y se deben observar en todo momento. Respetar las siguientes precauciones
garantizará el buen funcionamiento de la máquina y la seguridad del personal.
1. Mantenga despejadas las áreas de trabajo alrededor de la máquina.
2. No coloque ni deje objetos sobre la máquina.
3. Para reubicar la unidad, asegúrese de leer todas las instrucciones primero.
4. No deben usarse grúas y montacargas para levantar máquinas. Las máquinas solo pueden
empujarse en su lugar o levantarse manualmente para colocarlas en su posición en el caso de
máquinas de accesorio, como impresoras.
5. La superficie de apoyo que se use para esta unidad debe estar a nivel, seca, libre de aceite y ser
antideslizante, con capacidad para soportar cuatro veces el peso de la unidad, las piezas de suministro
y cualquier equipo opcional o complementario.
6. No use cables de extensión para conectar la máquina a una fuente de energía. Las máquinas deben
estar conectadas a circuitos de alimentación independientes y dedicados.
7. Asegúrese de que los cables y las líneas de suministro de aire no generen un peligro de tropiezo. En
lo posible, fíjelos con guías por encima de la unidad.
8. No ubique la unidad cerca de una fuente de calor.
Página 1-10
Uso indebido
El uso indebido de la máquina representa un peligro para el personal y para el equipo. Lo siguiente
será considerado como uso indebido de la máquina:
• Usar la máquina en entornos que resulten riesgosos. No use la máquina en entornos que
resulten riesgosos.
Página 1-11
Resultados de pruebas de nivel de sonido
Los resultados de las pruebas de nivel de sonido para Autobag 500™ y Autobag 550™ se toman a una
distancia de 3,28 pies (1,0 metros) y a una altura de 5,25 pies (1,6 metros) usando las lecturas
ponderadas A y C.
La prueba de nivel de sonido se realizó usando los parámetros habituales de la máquina. Ajustar los
parámetros de la máquina puede incrementar o disminuir los niveles de sonido durante su
funcionamiento.
Página 1-12
INTRODUCCIÓN
Tema Página
Página 2-1
PÁGINA EN BLANCO
Página 2-2
Descripción general
Las Autobag® 500™ y 550™ son máquinas para sellado y llenado automáticos de tecnología
avanzada, diseñadas para ofrecer flexibilidad y confiabilidad para optimizar la producción en
operaciones de empaque. Con capacidad de realizar ciclos de hasta 100 bolsas por minuto, estos
sistemas fueron diseñados para maximizar el tiempo de actividad de la máquina, lo que reduce de esta
manera su costo de propiedad total.
La ingeniería de vanguardia ha llevado a un diseño moderno y absolutamente seguro. No se requieren
cortinas de luz ni conmutadores de palma dobles para lograr un funcionamiento seguro en operaciones
de carga manual. Las Autobag 500 y 550 se pueden configurar con acceso a la izquierda o a la
derecha del HMI, el conmutador de ciclos y el área de carga de bolsas, lo que mejora la ergonomía y la
productividad del operador.
El diseño abierto hace que estas embolsadoras sean sumamente compatibles con alimentadoras,
balanzas y contadores de Autobag y de otros fabricantes. Las Autobag 500 y 550 también se pueden
conectar en red para que funcionen de forma completamente integrada con una estación de empaque
y para facilitar su supervisión centralizada. Cuando se las integra con la impresora en línea AutoLabel
500™, se obtiene una estación completa de Print-and-Pack™.
El sistema presenta un diseño simple con muy pocas piezas móviles, lo que reduce los costos a lo
largo de la vida útil y optimiza la confiabilidad, mientras que el diagnóstico integrado y los componentes
modulares simplifican el mantenimiento.
Cuando se usan con las auténticas bolsas en rollo preabiertas Autobag o con las bolsas en caja, según
corresponda, las Autobag 500 y 550 marcan el inicio de una nueva etapa en la evolución del empaque
flexible, confiable y de alta calidad, con el respaldo de la red de ingeniería y servicio de campo más
completo de la industria.
Página 2-3
Entorno operativo
El entorno de funcionamiento de estas unidades debe estar libre de suciedad, polvo y humedad. El
usuario final es responsable de mantener el entorno libre de combustibles y de ocuparse del
mantenimiento del equipo de extinción de incendios.
Página 2-4
Funcionamiento operativo
La Figura 2-1 muestra el funcionamiento operativo de la máquina Autobag 550.
ARTÍCULO DESCRIPCIÓN
1 Se coloca una bolsa o un rollo de bolsas en la parte trasera de la unidad, cerca
del debobinado motorizado.
2 Las bolsas se hacen avanzar a través del debobinado motorizado. El
debobinado se puede montar en distintas configuraciones, incluida la posición
elevada. El enhebrado de la bolsa depende de la posición de montaje del
debobinado motorizado.
3 Las bolsas dejan el debobinado motorizado y se alimentan al pasar por la
máquina. Si la máquina es una unidad Autobag 550, las bolsas se alimentarán
por debajo de la impresora ubicada en la parte superior de la unidad.
4 Las bolsas ingresan a la unidad por el rodillo prensador y salen por la parte
delantera de la máquina para que se las llene con el producto.
5 Los ajustes de la máquina y el ciclo de las bolsas se controlan usando la
interfaz HMI y la pantalla de control AutoTouch™. El ciclo de las bolsas también
puede controlarse con conmutadores de palma o de pedal opcionales.
6 El operador llena la bolsa con el producto. Una vez que se llenan las bolsas,
estas son selladas por la barra de sellado y se las separa.
7 Luego el estante de carga deja caer la bolsa.
Página 2-5
PÁGINA EN BLANCO
Página 2-6
FUNCIONAMIENTO
Tema Página
Funcionamiento ...................................................................3-5
Botones HMI ........................................................................3-6
Parada de emergencia (E-STOP) .....................................3-7
Suministro de aire ................................................................3-9
Ajuste de la presión principal de aire ..............................3-10
Ajuste de los controles de flujo de aire ...........................3-11
Alimentación principal ........................................................3-13
Secuencia de encendido ................................................3-15
Secuencia de autoguiado ...............................................3-15
Controles de la máquina ....................................................3-17
Paso ajustable ................................................................3-20
Estante de carga ............................................................3-21
Ajuste de la posición del HMI .........................................3-21
Rodillo de presión principal.............................................3-22
Posicionamiento de la bolsa/Enhebrado de película .......... 3-23
Juegos de peso ..............................................................3-30
Enhebrado de bolsas en caja .........................................3-31
Posicionamiento de la impresora/Enhebrado
de la cinta ..........................................................................3-32
Funciones operativas .........................................................3-33
Interfaz HMI .......................................................................3-33
Botón E-STOP (Parada de emergencia).........................3-33
Botón de reinicio de E-STOP
(Parada de emergencia) .................................................3-33
Botón de Start/Stop (Inicio/Parada) de ciclo ................... 3-34
Pantalla de control AutoTouch ...........................................3-36
Íconos Acciones de los accesos directos........................3-40
Mensaje de notificación ..................................................3-41
Página 3-1
Idiomas .......................................................................... 3-44
Información de la máquina ............................................. 3-45
Desplazamiento de pantalla ........................................... 3-46
Alternar entre ON/OFF
(ENCENDIDO y APAGADO) .......................................... 3-46
Guardar una pantalla ..................................................... 3-47
Niveles de usuarios ........................................................... 3-48
Contraseñas de nivel de usuario .................................... 3-50
Nivel Operator 1 (Operador 1)........................................ 3-50
Nivel Operator 2 (Operador 2)........................................ 3-51
Nivel Setup (Configuración) ........................................... 3-51
Nivel de usuario predeterminado ................................... 3-52
Menú Inicio ........................................................................ 3-53
Acciones de los accesos directos................................... 3-53
Parámetros del trabajo ................................................... 3-54
Ventilador....................................................................... 3-57
Modo .............................................................................. 3-58
Modo Single (simple) .................................................. 3-58
Modo Auto (automático) ............................................. 3-58
Operación del botón de inicio/parada de ciclo ................ 3-58
Funcionamiento con interruptor
de palma óptico.............................................................. 3-59
Funcionamiento con interruptor de pedal ....................... 3-60
Menú Trabajos .................................................................. 3-60
Trabajos sin guardar ...................................................... 3-61
Save Job (Guardar trabajo) ............................................ 3-62
Save Job As (Guardar trabajo como) ............................. 3-62
Load Job (Cargar trabajo) .............................................. 3-62
Settings (Parámetros) .................................................... 3-63
Options (Opciones) ........................................................ 3-67
Parámetros avanzados .................................................. 3-75
Menú Configuración .......................................................... 3-76
Firmware ........................................................................ 3-76
Productivity Metrics (Métricas de productividad) ............ 3-76
Cómo restablecer las métricas ................................... 3-77
Cycle Times (Tiempos de ciclo) ..................................... 3-78
Página 3-2
Shortcut Actions (Acciones de los
accesos directos) ...........................................................3-79
Screensaver (Protector de pantalla) ...............................3-81
Users (Usuarios) ............................................................3-82
Nivel de usuario predeterminado ................................3-83
Demora en el cierre de sesión automático .................. 3-84
Idioma .........................................................................3-85
Sistema de unidades de la máquina ...........................3-85
Tiempo real ....................................................................3-85
Network Config (Configuración de red) ...........................3-86
Menú Diagnósticos ............................................................3-88
Inputs (Entradas) ............................................................3-88
Monitor Outputs (Monitorear salidas) ..............................3-89
Monitor Axis (Monitorear eje)..........................................3-90
Parámetros de configuración ..........................................3-91
Unwinder Motor (Motor debobinador) .............................3-92
E-STOP (PARADA DE EMERGENCIA) .........................3-92
Status (Estado)...............................................................3-93
Logs (Registros) .............................................................3-95
Main Nip Motor (Motor del rodillo
prensador principal) ........................................................3-96
Sealbar (Barra de sellado) ..............................................3-96
Dancer (Rodillo oscilante)...............................................3-97
Autobag 550 Printer (Impresora Autobag 550) ...................3-98
Print roll errors (Errores del rodillo de impresión) ............ 3-99
Menú Prueba de la impresora ........................................3-99
Print Quality Label (Etiqueta de
calidad de impresión) .....................................................3-99
Ribbon Test Label (Etiqueta de
prueba de cinta) ...........................................................3-100
Test Label (Etiqueta de prueba) ................................... 3-100
Label Validation (Etiqueta de validación) ...................... 3-100
Print Configuration (Configuración de impresión) ......... 3-100
Print Last Label (Etiqueta de última impresión)............. 3-100
User-Defined Label
(Etiqueta definida por el usuario) .................................. 3-101
Load Labels for Printing (
Cómo cargar etiquetas para imprimir)........................... 3-101
Página 3-3
Comunicaciones de la impresora ................................. 3-105
Mensajes de notificación .............................................. 3-112
Reiniciar mensajes de notificación ............................ 3-112
Mensajes emergentes .................................................. 3-113
Página 3-4
Funcionamiento
Una vez que un técnico de servicio de Automated Packaging Systems haya puesto en servicio su
máquina podrá comenzar a operarla. Esta sección cubre las nociones fundamentales de la máquina.
Página 3-5
Botones HMI
EL HMI cuenta con 3 botones que aparecen en la parte inferior de la pantalla.
1. Botón E-STOP (Parada de emergencia) El botón rojo E-STOP (Parada de emergencia) es un botón
de parada de emergencia de la máquina que se acciona de forma manual. Al presionar el botón E-
STOP (Parada de emergencia) se colocará la máquina en estado de parada de emergencia. El
suministro de aire será eliminado (desechado) de la máquina por una válvula electrónica. Se retirará la
energía de los motores de transmisión, del colector de la válvula y del sistema de cables de calor. Al
tirar del botón rojo E-STOP (Parada de emergencia) hacia fuera sacará a la máquina del modo Parada
de emergencia, pero requerirá el reinicio de la parada de emergencia para que la máquina retorne a su
funcionamiento normal.
2. Botón de reinicio de E-STOP (Parada de emergencia) El botón azul de reinicio de E-STOP (Parada
de emergencia) es el botón de reinicio de la máquina luego de que se inicia una parada de
emergencia. El botón azul de reinicio de E-STOP (Parada de emergencia) se mantendrá encendido
cuando la máquina deba reiniciarse luego de una parada de emergencia. El presionar el botón se
reiniciará la máquina y esto permitirá que vuelva a funcionar normalmente.
Página 3-6
3. Botón START/STOP (Inicio/Parada) El botón blanco de START/STOP (Inicio/Parada) es el botón
que se usa en el funcionamiento normal de la máquina. El botón blanco permanecerá encendido
cuando se requiera alguna acción del operador. El presionar el botón se iniciará una secuencia de ciclo
ÚNICO o de MODO AUTOMÁTICO (según la opción realizada por el operador). Este botón se usará
también para iniciar una secuencia de AUTOGUIADO cuando sea necesario.
Para colocar la máquina en estado de E-STOP (Parada de emergencia), siga los pasos que se
describen a continuación:
1. Presione el botón rojo E-STOP (Parada de emergencia). Aparecerá la pantalla emergente que se
activa con el botón E-STOP (Parada de emergencia).
Página 3-7
Para reiniciar el estado de E-STOP (Parada de emergencia), siga los pasos que se describen a
continuación:
1. Tire del botón rojo E-STOP (Parada de emergencia).
2. Presione un momento el botón azul E-STOP (Parada de emergencia) para reiniciar el estado de E-
STOP.
3. La máquina se encuentra ahora nuevamente en estado operativo.
Página 3-8
Suministro de aire
El suministro de aire puede ser eliminado (descargado) y bloqueado para realizar los procedimientos
de bloqueo y etiquetado. Para descargar el aire de la máquina, siga los pasos que se describen a
continuación:
1. Gire hacia la derecha el pomo rojo de suministro de aire hasta que se pueda escuchar la descarga
de aire y hasta que se pueda leer EXH (Descarga) en el pomo (Figura 3-4, Punto 1).
2. Si la máquina debe bloquearse para realizar tareas de mantenimiento, coloque un dispositivo de
bloqueo y etiquetado en la ubicación provista en la posición de eliminación (Figura 3-4, Punto 2).
Elemento Descripción
1 Válvula de aire en posición de
descarga
2 Bloqueo para el teclado
La carga del estante y los embudos de acumulación están diseñdos para retener el aire e impedir que
el producto se libere durante situaciones de parada de emergencia. El estante de carga y la puerta del
embudo de acumulación se bloquearán en su última posición cuando se produzca una parada de
emergencia. Consulte el Módulo de Mantenimiento para conocer los procedimientos para eliminar el
aire.
Página 3-9
Ajuste de la presión principal de aire
Los requerimientos de aire para las máquinas Autobag serie 600 y serie 550 son de 80 psi nominales
+/- 5 psi (5,5 bar nominales +/- 0,35 bar). La máquina entrará en el estado de error si la presión del aire
excede los límites establecidos. Para ajustar la presión del aire de la máquina, siga los pasos que se
describen a continuación:
1. Tire del pomo gris de para ajustar el aire que se encuentra ubicado sobre el indicador de presión de
aire hasta que se pueda ver la línea naranja en la base del pomo.
Página 3-10
2. Gire el pomo hacia la derecha para aumentar la presión de aire. Gire el pomo hacia la izquierda para
disminuir la presión de aire.
3. Cuando se haya ajustado la presión de aire deseada, presione el pomo hacia abajo hasta que la
línea naranja ya no sea visible.
• Ventilador Ajusta la cantidad de aire que se sopla sobre la bolsa para mantenerla abierta
durante el embolsado.
• Impulso de aire Ajusta la cantidad de aire que se sopla sobre la bolsa para mantenerla abierta.
• Guía de aire Ajusta la cantidad de aire que se usa para guiar el material cuando se alimenta la
máquina.
Para ajustar los controles de flujo, siga los pasos que se describen a continuación:
1. Para aumentar el ajuste, gire el pomo hacia la derecha.
2. Para disminuir el ajuste, gire el pomo hacia la izquierda.
Página 3-11
1
Elemento Descripción
1 Ventilador
2 Impulso de aire
3 Guía de aire
Página 3-12
Alimentación principal
El interruptor principal y el cable para las máquinas Autobag serie 500 y 550 se encuentra en la parte
trasera de la caja eléctrica principal (E-BOX). Si la máquina es una versión Autobag 550, habrá un
interruptor de energía adicional ubicado en la parte delantera de la caja eléctrica de la impresora.
Página 3-13
FIGURA 3-9. INTERRUPTOR DE ENERGÍA DE LA CAJA ELÉCTRICA DE LA IMPRESORA
Para encender o apagar la máquina, siga los pasos que se describen a continuación:
1. Conecte el cable de alimentación eléctrica de la máquina en una fuente de energía de 110 V a
240 V VAC, 50/60 Hz.
2. Presione el lado (I) del interruptor para encender la máquina.
3. Presione el lado (O) del interruptor para apagar la máquina.
Página 3-14
Secuencia de encendido
Para encender la máquina, siga los pasos que se describen a continuación:
1. Coloque el interruptor de alimentación principal en ON (ENCENDIDO) (E).
2. Espere hasta que se inicie la máquina. Una vez que se haya completado la secuencia de inicio, se
verá la pantalla HOME (Inicio).
3. Si la máquina se encuentra en estado de E-STOP (Parada de emergencia), reinicie el estado de de
E-STOP.
4. La máquina requerirá una secuencia de autoguiado. Si la máquina y los accesorios se encuentran
en la posición de inicio, la secuencia de autoguiado se completará automáticamente sin ninguna
acción del usuario. Si la máquina o los accesorios no se encuentran en la posición de inicio, se le
solicitará al usuario que inicie una secuencia de autoguiado presionando el botón START/STOP
(Inicio/Parada).
5. Una vez que se haya completado la secuencia de autoguiado, la máquina estará lista para
funcionar.
Secuencia de autoguiado
Cuando la máquina se encienda por primera vez, se deberá completar una secuencia de autoguiado
antes de realizar cualquier otra acción.
Para realizar la secuencia de autoguiado, siga los pasos que se describen a continuación:
1. Encienda la máquina y espere a que finalice la secuencia de inicio.
2. Una vez que aparezca la página HOME (Inicio), la máquina le mostrará la página emergente para
reiniciar la máquina del estado de E-STOP (Parada de emergencia).
Página 3-15
FIGURA 3-10. PÁGINA EMERGENTE DE LA SECUENCIA DE AUTOGUIADO
3. Reinicie el estado de E-STOP (Parada de emergencia) tirando hacia fuera del botón rojo de E-STOP
y presionando el botón azul de reinicio de E-STOP.
4. Una vez reiniciados los estados de E-STOP (Parada de emergencia), el botón Start/Stop Cycle
(Inicio/Parada de ciclo) se iluminará en color blanco de forma intermitente para indicar que la máquina
requiere una secuencia de autoguiado.
5. Presione el botón de Start/Stop Cycle (Inicio/Parada de ciclo) para realizar la secuencia de
autoguiado.
a. El rodillo oscilante del debobinado motorizado se moverá hacia arriba y hacia abajo hasta llegar
a su posición de inicio.
b. La barra selladora se desplazará hasta su posición de inicio.
c. Si la máquina cuenta con un embudo, el embudo se desplazará hasta su posición de inicio.
6. Una vez que se haya completado la secuencia de autoguiado, la máquina estará lista para
funcionar.
Página 3-16
Controles de la máquina
Las maquinas Autobag serie 500 y 550 tienen distintos controles que permiten el ajuste y el
funcionamiento de la máquina. Consulte la Figura 3-11 para conocer sus ubicaciones.
6 1
3
5
4
Página 3-17
11 14 13
12
8
9
10
Página 3-18
15
16
17
14
18
Página 3-19
Paso ajustable
Las máquinas Autobag serie 500 y 550 tienen un paso ajustable para permitir ciclos de embolsado de
menor duración. El paso se ajusta usando el pomo negro estriado que se encuentra en la parte trasera
de la máquina.
Página 3-20
Estante de carga
El estante de carga tiene un estante de soporte de altura ajustable para sostener las distintas
longitudes de las bolsas. El ajuste correcto del estante de soporte contribuye a sostener correctamente
las bolsas cargadas con producto. Para ajustar el estante de soporte, siga los pasos que se describen
a continuación:
1. Afloje ambas manijas (Figura 3-11, Punto 17) en el estante de carga.
a. Ajuste el estante de soporte en la posición deseada. Verifique que el cableado eléctrico y las
tuberías de aire se encuentren limpios y sin obstrucciones.
b. Cuando coloque el estante de soporte en la posición deseada, ajuste ambas manijas en la parte
posterior del estante de carga.
Página 3-21
FIGURA 3-13. MANIJAS PARA AJUSTE DEL HMI
ELEMENTO DESCRIPCIÓN
1 manija de inclinación de la pantalla
del HMI
2 manija de rotación de la pantalla
del HMI
3 manija de rotación del brazo de
montaje del HMI
Página 3-22
Posicionamiento de la bolsa/Enhebrado de
película
El debobinado motorizado se debe abrir para enhebrar las bolsas para el funcionamiento de la
máquina.
1. Para abrir el debobinado motorizado, eleve el rodillo oscilante hasta que quede bloqueado en su
lugar.
2. Para liberarlo, eleve la manija ubicada en el lado opuesto de la placa del brazo del debobinado
motorizado (Figura 3-14, Punto 1).
Página 3-23
Para enhebrar el material en la máquina, siga los pasos que se describen a continuación:
1. Retire el eje externo (Figura 3-15, Punto 1) aflojando la manija amarilla y deslizándola fuera del eje
del rollo de bolsas (Figura 3-15, Punto 2).
Elemento Descripción
1 Eje externo
2 Eje del rollo de bolsas
3 Eje interno
2. Coloque un rollo de materiales en el eje del rollo de bolsas con el material alimentándose desde la
parte inferior de la bobina.
a. Posicione el rollo en el eje del rollo de bolsas para alinearlo correctamente con los accesorios
que se encuentren instalados. Coloque nuevamente el eje interno (Figura 3-15, Punto 3) si es
necesario. Por lo general, el material debe centrarse cuando pasa por la máquina.
b. Coloque el eje externo nuevamente en el eje del rollo de bolsas y fíjelo con la manija de bloqueo
para mantener el material en su lugar.
Página 3-24
3. Abra el debobinado.
a. Alimente el material a través del debobinado pasando por encima de los rodillos medios y por
debajo del último rodillo.
Página 3-25
4. Alimente el material hacia arriba y por encima del rodillo trasero de la máquina.
5. Para máquinas con impresoras instaladas, eleve la impresora y verifique que el material pase por
debajo del cabezal de impresor/la impresora.
Página 3-26
6. Alimente el material por encima de la bandeja central y coloque el bordel del material en los rodillos
de presión.
a. Usando los interruptores de alimentación del material, en ambos lados de la impresora, alimente
el material hasta que aparezca en el área de carga de la máquina.
Página 3-27
FIGURA 3-20. BOLSAS CORRECTAMENTE POSICIONADAS PARA EL FUNCIONAMIENTO DE LA
MÁQUINA
Página 3-28
7. Si es necesario, mientras sostiene el material abra los rodillos de presión coloque la bolsa
correctamente en los rodillos.
Página 3-29
Juegos de peso
Hay juegos de peso disponibles para el debobinado motorizado para contribuir a la tensión de los
materiales de bolsas más resistentes.
Elemento Descripción
1 Juego, de peso estándar 3-003717
2 Juego, de peso con barra
transversal adicional 3-003734-002
Página 3-30
Enhebrado de bolsas en caja
Para máquinas con la opción de Bolsas en caja, siga las siguientes intrucciones adicionales para el
enhebrado:
1. Coloque la caja de materiales debajo de la bolsa en la opción de la caja.
Página 3-31
3. Ajuste la tensión ejercida sobre la bolsa en la opción de la caja moviendo la barra para reposicionar
el peso según sea necesario.
Posicionamiento de la impresora/Enhebrado
de la cinta
El posicionamiento de la impresora/enhebrado se puede configurar para máquinas que funcionen tanto
hacia la izquierda como hacia la derecha.
Página 3-32
Funciones operativas
Las máquinas Autobag 500 y 550 tienen un sistema operativo HMI que se divide en niveles de
usuarios. En esta sección se describen las funciones de Operador 1, Operador 2 y Configuración.
Consulte el Manual de mantenimiento para conocer las pantallas HMI adicionales que son solo para
uso del personal de mantenimiento.
Interfaz HMI
La interfaz HMI está compuesta por una pantalla de control AutoTouch, un botón de parada de
emergencia, un botón de reinicio de la parada de emergencia y un botón de inicio/parada de ciclo.
Página 3-33
Botón de Start/Stop (Inicio/Parada) de ciclo
El botón de Inicio/Parada de ciclo se usa para iniciar y detener los ciclos de la máquina y también para
el autoguiado de la máquina cuando esta se enciende. El botón se pondrá de color blanco cuando se
requiera la acción del operador.
Página 3-34
4
1 2 3
Página 3-35
Pantalla de control AutoTouch
La pantalla de control AutoTouch es una tableta de pantalla táctil basada en Android integrada en la
interfaz HMI. Al encender la máquina, la pantalla de control AutoTouch realizará una secuencia de
inicio.
Una vez completada la secuencia de inicio, se presentará la pantalla Inicio al operador. La pantalla de
inicio contiene íconos para diversos menús y funciones.
Los íconos y los menús que aparecen en la pantalla de inicio dependen del nivel de usuario
seleccionado. Solo los íconos que están disponibles para ese nivel de usuario aparecerán en la
pantalla de inicio. Si un ícono no está presente en la pantalla de inicio, esas funciones no están
disponibles para el usuario.
Página 3-36
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
15
16
17
18
19
11 12
13 14 20
10 21
Página 3-37
1. Ícono INICIO. Tocar este ícono lleva al usuario a la pantalla Inicio.
2. Ícono TRABAJOS. Tocar este ícono lleva al usuario al menú Trabajos.
3. Ícono CONFIGURACIÓN. Tocar este ícono lleva al usuario al menú Configuración.
4. Ícono DIAGNÓSTICOS. Tocar este ícono lleva al usuario al menú Diagnósticos.
5. Ícono NOTIFICACIÓN. Al tocar este ícono se le muestra al usuario toda notificación o mensaje de
error actual que tenga la máquina.
6. Ícono NIVEL DE USUARIO. Tocar este ícono le permite al usuario seleccionar diferentes niveles de
usuarios.
7. Ícono IDIOMA. Tocar este ícono le permite al usuario seleccionar un idioma disponible.
8. INFORMACIÓN DE LA MÁQUINA. Tocar este ícono permite al usuario ver la información de la
máquina.
9. Área de ACCIONES DE LOS ACCESOS DIRECTOS. El usuario puede seleccionar cualquiera de
las acciones dentro de esta área.
10. Ícono MODO. El usuario puede seleccionar entre los modos de ciclo simple y automático.
11. Ícono VENTILADOR. Esto le permite al usuario ENCENDER o APAGAR el ventilador entre los
ciclos de la máquina.
12. Ícono de ESPERA DE ALIMENTACIÓN. Indica que la empacadora está esperando un dispositivo
de alimentación para realizar su ciclo.
13. Ícono de CICLO AUTOMÁTICO. Indica que la empacadora está realizando su ciclo en Modo
Automático.
14. Ícono de ESPERA DE LA EMPACADORA. Indica que la empacadora está esperando ser
alimentada desde una entrada externa.
15. Ícono GUARDAR TRABAJO. Tocar este ícono lleva al usuario al menú Trabajos.
16. BAGS/MIN (BOLSAS/MIN). Bags/Min (Bolsas/Min.) es la cantidad de bolsas que pasan por un ciclo
por minuto.
17. TOTAL COUNT (CONTEO TOTAL). Muestra el conteo total actual.
18. LOT SIZE (TAMAÑO DEL LOTE). Muestra el tamaño del lote actual establecido.
19. LOT COUNT (CONTEO DEL LOTE). Muestra el conteo del lote actual.
20. LOT REMAINING (LOTE RESTANTE). Muestra el conteo restante en el lote.
21. Mensajes de notificación desplegables. Las notificaciones o los mensajes de error que actualmente
afectan la máquina se desplazarán continuamente en esta área hasta que se hayan eliminado.
Página 3-38
La pantalla de inicio cambiará con la incorporación de una opción Simple Count (Conteo simple).
Hay un menú más disponible en la pantalla de inicio cuando se habilita la opción Sensor de conteo.
Página 3-39
Íconos Acciones de los accesos directos
Los íconos Acciones de los accesos directos muestran qué opciones están disponibles y se pueden
encender o apagar, o bien iniciarse de manera momentánea. Hay tres estados definidos por el color
del ícono.
1. MOMENTÁNEO. Toque el ícono una vez para iniciar la acción una vez para este acceso directo.
2. APAGADO. Este acceso directo se encuentra APAGADO pero está disponible. Toque el ícono para
acceder al menú Acceso directo para encenderlo.
3. ENCENDIDO. Este acceso directo está ENCENDIDO. Toque el ícono para acceder al menú Acceso
directo para realizar cambios o para apagarlo.
Página 3-40
Mensaje de notificación
Si la máquina tiene alguna notificación o mensaje de error, este aparecerá en la parte superior de la
pantalla debajo del ícono Notificación. La cantidad de notificaciones se indicará al lado del ícono. En la
parte inferior derecha de la pantalla, también aparecerá una explicación corta desplegable de la(s)
notificación(es) o el/los mensaje(s) de error.
Elemento Descripción
1 Ícono Notificación y cantidad de
mensajes
2 Área de notificaciones desplegables
Página 3-41
Para ver la(s) notificación(es) o el/los error(es) que actualmente afecta(n) la máquina, siga los
siguientes pasos:
1. Toque el ícono Notificación y aparecerá una lista desplegable de las notificaciones y los errores.
Página 3-42
2. Si toca una de las notificaciones del menú desplegable, se desplegará la pantalla de notificaciones o
el mensaje de error asociado con la notificación.
3. Consulte la Página 3-102 para obtener una explicación de cada pantalla emergente y del mensaje
de error.
Página 3-43
Idiomas
Para cambiar el idioma de la máquina de manera temporaria, seleccione el ícono Idioma y luego
seleccione el idioma que desea el usuario.
Página 3-44
Información de la máquina
Para ver la información de la máquina en cualquier nivel de usuario, toque el ícono de Información de
la máquina en la esquina superior derecha de la pantalla. Esto mostrará la información actual de la
máquina, que incluye los siguientes datos:
1. Número de serie de la máquina
2. Nombre del host
3. Versión del cargador de arranque
4. Versión de la aplicación
5. Versión de movimiento
6. Versión de calor
7. Versión de FPGA
8. Versión de la impresora
9. Versión de Atlas 1, 2, 3 y 4
10. Versión de HMI
Página 3-45
Desplazamiento de pantalla
Algunas pantallas se pueden desplazar hacia arriba y hacia abajo para acceder a menús o información
adicional. Aparecerá una barra azul del lado derecho de la pantalla para indicar que se puede
desplazar hacia arriba o hacia abajo. Use su dedo para desplazar el menú hacia arriba o hacia abajo.
Página 3-46
Guardar una pantalla
Algunas pantallas que requieren el ingreso de datos harán aparecer un teclado numérico. Es posible
que estos datos ingresados se deban guardar antes de salir del menú.
Para guardar una configuración en una pantalla o menú, seleccione el ícono Guardar, que está
ubicado en la esquina inferior derecha del menú. Para salir de una pantalla o menú sin guardar,
seleccione el ícono Salir, que está ubicado en la esquina inferior izquierda del menú. Para retroceder
un valor ingresado, use el ícono Retroceso.
Elemento Descripción
1 Ícono Salir
2 Ícono Guardar
3 Íconos Retroceso
Página 3-47
Niveles de usuarios
Las máquinas Autobag serie 500 y 550 tienen 7 niveles de usuarios. Los niveles de usuarios son los
siguientes:
1. OPERATOR 1 (OPERADOR 1)
2. OPERATOR 2 (OPERADOR 2)
3. SETUP (CONFIGURACIÓN)
4. MAINTENANCE (MANTENIMIENTO)
5. SERVICE (SERVICIO)
6. ENGINEERING 1 (INGENIERÍA 1)
7. ENGINEERING 2 (INGENIERÍA 2)
Para acceder a cada nivel, se solicitará una contraseña para cada nivel superior al actualmente
seleccionado. El nivel de usuario en el que se inició sesión aparecerá en la selección de nivel de
usuario en la parte superior derecha de la pantalla. Para seleccionar un nivel diferente, siga los
siguientes pasos:
1. Toque la selección de nivel de usuario. Aparecerá un menú desplegable.
Página 3-48
2. Seleccione el nuevo nivel tocando el nivel deseado. Aparecerá un teclado.
4. Toque LOGIN (INICIAR SESIÓN) para cambiar el nivel de usuario o toque CLOSE (CERRAR) para
volver al nivel de usuario anterior.
Página 3-49
Contraseñas de nivel de usuario
NOMBRE DE CONTRASEÑA
USUARIO PREDETERMINADA
Operator 1 1111
(Operador 1)
Operator 2 2222
(Operador 2)
Setup 3333
(Configuración)
Maintenance Consulte el Manual de
(Mantenimiento) mantenimiento.
Service (Servicio) Acceso no autorizado
Engineering 1 Acceso no autorizado
(Ingeniería 1)
Engineering 2 Acceso no autorizado
(Ingeniería 1)
Página 3-50
Nivel Operator 2 (Operador 2)
El nivel Operator 2 (Operador 2) es el siguiente modo de funcionamiento superior. El usuario tendrá
acceso al funcionamiento menú INICIO y al menú TRABAJOS. En la pantalla del menú INICIO el
usuario podrá cambiar el modo de funcionamiento de SINGLE (SIMPLE) a AUTO (AUTOMÁTICO).
También se puede modificar el TOTAL COUNT (CONTEO TOTAL), el LOT SIZE (TAMAÑO DEL
LOTE) y el LOT COUNT (CONTEO DEL LOTE) en este nivel de usuario. Si aparecen accesos directos
en la pantalla Inicio, el Operador solo podrá utilizar los accesos directos momentáneos.
En el menú TRABAJO, el usuario podrá cargar otros trabajos que se hayan guardado anteriormente.
Página 3-51
(TIEMPOS DE LOS CICLOS), SHORTCUT ACTIONS (ACCIONES DE LOS ACCESOS DIRECTOS),
USERS (USUARIOS), REAL TIME CLOCK (TIEMPO REAL) y NETWORK CONFIG
(CONFIGURACIÓN DE RED).
4. Menú DIAGNÓSTICOS. El usuario podrá acceder a los menús INPUTS (ENTRADAS), MONITOR
OUTPUTS (MONITOREAR SALIDAS), MONITOR AXIS (MONITOREAR EJE), CONFIGURATION
SETTINGS (PARÁMETROS DE CONFIGURACIÓN), UNWINDER MOTOR (MOTOR
DEBOBINADOR), E-STOP (PARADA DE EMERGENCIA), STATUS (ESTADO), LOGS (REGISTROS)
y MAIN NIP MOTOR (MOTOR DEL RODILLO PRENSADOR PRINCIPAL), SEALBAR (BARRA
SELLADORA) y DANCER (RODILLO OSCILANTE).
Página 3-52
4. La máquina ahora se encenderá en ese nivel.
Menú Inicio
El menú Inicio es donde se monitorea el funcionamiento de la máquina y el trabajo. Los submenús
ubicados dentro de la pantalla Inicio están disponibles para los usuarios en función del nivel de
seguridad en que se hayan registrado.
Página 3-53
Parámetros del trabajo
Los parámetros del trabajo se pueden ajustar dependiendo del nivel de usuario ingresado e incluyen lo
siguiente:
Elemento Descripción
1 Bolsas/Min.
2 Ícono Editar conteo total
3 Ícono Cambiar el tamaño del lote
4 Ícono Editar conteo del lote
5 Ícono restablecer lote restante
1. Bags/Min (Bolsas/Min.) es la cantidad de bolsas que pasan por un ciclo por minuto.
2. Total Count (Conteo total) muestra la cantidad total de bolsas que han pasado por un ciclo en el lote
actual. Esto se puede ajustar o restablecer.
Página 3-54
FIGURA 3-46. RESTABLECER EL CONTEO TOTAL
Página 3-55
a. Seleccione el ícono Change Lot Size (Cambiar el tamaño del lote).
b. Ingrese la cantidad del tamaño de conteo del lote deseado.
c. Seleccione GUARDAR para guardar el cambio o SALIR para salir sin guardar.
4. Lot Count (Conteo del lote) muestra la cantidad actual de bolsas en el lote. Esto se puede ajustar o
restablecer.
Página 3-56
5. Lote restante muestra la cantidad de bolsas restantes en el lote. Esto se puede restablecer.
Ventilador
El ventilador se puede ENCENDER o APAGAR entre las funciones del ciclo. Toque el ícono
VENTILADOR para alternar entre VENTILADOR APAGADO y VENTILADOR ENCENDIDO. El
ventilador se APAGARÁ cuando la máquina entre en inactividad.
Página 3-57
Modo
La máquina se puede operar en modo SINGLE (SIMPLE) o AUTO (AUTOMÁTICO) y se puede
modificar dependiendo del nivel de usuario ingresado. Para cambiar los modos de funcionamiento,
siga los siguientes pasos:
1. Toque el ícono MODO en la parte inferior izquierda de la pantalla para alternar entre el modo
SINGLE (SIMPLE) y AUTO (AUTOMÁTICO).
Página 3-58
Funcionamiento con interruptor de palma óptico
La máquina se puede configurar con interruptores de palma ópticos simples o duales. Los interruptores
de palma se accionan colocando la(s) mano(s) del operador en el área del sensor negro del/de los
interruptor(es) Para la configuración de un interruptor de palma simple, se necesita una mano para
accionar un ciclo de embolsado. Para la configuración de un interruptor de palma dual, se necesitan
ambas manos para accionar un ciclo de embolsado.
Los interruptores de palma tienen dos luces de estado LED en ellos. La luz izquierda será verde
cuando el interruptor de palma está activo y listo para ser usado. La luz LED derecha será roja y se
volverá verde cuando el interruptor de palma se haya accionado al colocar una mano sobre este.
Página 3-59
Funcionamiento con interruptor de pedal
Cuando se presiona el interruptor de pedal generará un ciclo de una bolsa de la máquina. El botón de
INICIO/PARADA se iluminará durante el ciclo de embolsado.
Menú Trabajos
El menú Trabajos es donde se gestionan los trabajos. El menú Trabajos contiene submenús que están
disponibles para los usuarios en función del nivel de seguridad en que se hayan registrado.
Página 3-60
Trabajos sin guardar
Cuando el título del trabajo se vuelve naranja, los parámetros del trabajo han sido modificados y será
necesario guardar el trabajo. Los trabajos que tengan parámetros cambiados y que no se hayan
guardado volverán a los parámetros predeterminados cuando se active la máquina o cuando se cargue
nuevamente el trabajo.
Los nombres de los trabajos deben cumplir con los siguientes requisitos:
1. No deben estar vacíos.
2. Deben contener únicamente números y caracteres válidos en inglés.
3. No deben contener ninguno de los siguientes caracteres: # % & { } / \ < > * . ? $ : @ ’ , ; |
4. No deben contener más de 16 caracteres.
Página 3-61
Save Job (Guardar trabajo)
Para guardar los cambios en el trabajo actual cargado, siga los siguientes pasos:
1. Seleccione el menú Trabajos.
2. Toque el ícono Save Job (Guardar trabajo).
Página 3-62
Settings (Parámetros)
Los parámetros de los trabajos se guardan para cada trabajo. Los parámetros óptimos (en función de
los materiales y productos cargados) garantizarán un funcionamiento/ciclo de la máquina adecuado y
consistente. A continuación se enumeran los parámetros de los trabajos que se deben ajustar. Para
ajustar una configuración, siga los siguientes pasos:
1. Toque el campo para la configuración que se editará.
2. Ingrese el valor deseado en el menú emergente.
Página 3-63
4. SEAL TIME (TIEMPO DE SELLADO). De 0 a 3 segundos. Esto controla por cuánto tiempo la barra
de sellado permanece cerrada durante el sellado.
6. SEAL POINT (PUNTO DE SELLADO). De 0,25 a 5 pulgadas (0,635 a 12,7cm). Esto controla el
punto en el cual la bolsa se sella respecto a la apertura de la bolsa +/- 0,0625 pulgadas (+/-1,59 mm).
El punto de sellado recomendado es de 1 pulgada (2,54 cm).
Página 3-64
7. LOAD TIME (TIEMPO DE CARGA). De 0 a 3600 segundos. Esto controla el tiempo que la barra de
sellado permanece en la posición de inicio entre los ciclos de embolsado para permitir la carga del
producto.
8. AIR PULSE (PULSO DE AIRE). De 0 a 3 segundos. Esto controla el tiempo que el pulso de aire
permanece encendido después de indexar una nueva bolsa.
9. REPEAT DISTANCE (DISTANCIA DE REPETICIÓN). De 2 a 108 pulgadas (5,08 a 274,32 cm). Esto
controla la distancia que la máquina hace avanzar una bolsa si se omite una perforación. La distancia
de repetición se puede medir en la película de material de perforación a perforación. La distancia de
repetición se debe establecer igual o mayor que la longitud de la bolsa actual.
10. ADVANCE DELAY (DEMORA DE AVANZADO). De 0 a 3 segundos. Esto controla la demora del
avance de la siguiente bolsa después de que la máquina corta una bolsa.
Página 3-65
11. PRINT LOCATION (UBICACIÓN DE LA IMPRESIÓN). De 1,5 a 108 pulgadas (3,81 cm a
274,32 cm). Esto controla la ubicación de la etiqueta impresa en la bolsa respecto a la marca de
impresión o perforación. La PRINT LOCATION (UBICACIÓN DE LA IMPRESIÓN) variará dependiendo
del tamaño de la etiqueta y de la bolsa que se utiliza.
Página 3-66
Options (Opciones)
Cada trabajo tiene opciones que se pueden ENCENDER o APAGAR si la máquina ha sido configurada
para esas opciones. Las opciones guardadas son particulares para cada trabajo.
Las opciones que no estén disponible aparecerán en color gris. Las opciones que estén disponibles
para ser seleccionadas aparecerán en color azul y pueden incluir lo siguiente:
1. PRINT CYCLE (CICLO DE IMPRESIÓN). ENCIENDE O APAGA el ciclo de impresión. APÁGUELA
si no se requiere la impresión.
2. SEAL BAR (BARRA DE SELLADO). ENCIENDE O APAGA la barra de sellado. APÁGUELA si no se
requiere el sellado de las bolsas.
3. STRIP-N-RIP (CORTE DE TIRA). ENCIENDE o APAGA el STRIP-N-RIP (CORTE DE TIRA) con
opciones de menú adicionales. APAGUE el STRI-N-RIP (CORTE DE TIRA) si no es necesario. Si se
requiere el STRIP-N-RIP (CORTE DE TIRA), las siguientes opciones están disponibles:
a. STRIP-N-RIP COUNT (CONTEO DE CORTE DE TIRA). Establece la cantidad de bolsas que se
van a cortar por ciclo.
Página 3-67
b. RESET CURRENT COUNT (RESTABLECER EL CONTEO ACTUAL). Restablece el conteo de
corte de tira.
4. AIR GUIDE (GUÍA DE AIRE). ENCIENDE O APAGA la guía de aire. APÁGUELA si no es necesario
guiar las bolsas durante la indexación.
5. AIR PULSE (PULSO DE AIRE). ENCIENDE O APAGA el pulso de aire. APAGUE el pulso de aire si
no es necesario abrir las bolsas durante el ciclo.
6. COUNT EYE (SENSOR DE CONTEO). ENCIENDE O APAGA el sensor de conteo con opciones de
menú adicionales. APAGUE esta opción si no es necesario el COUNT EYE (SENSOR DE CONTEO).
Si se requiere el COUNT EYE (SENSOR DE CONTEO), las siguientes opciones están disponibles:
a. SMARTCOUNT™. Seleccione esta opción si el SMART COUNT (CONTEO INTELIGENTE) está
instalado.
b. SIMPLECOUNT™. Seleccione esta opción si el SIMPLECOUNT (CONTEO SIMPLE) está
instalado.
c. COUNT EYE TARGET (OBJETIVO DEL SENSOR DE CONTEO). Establece la cantidad objetivo
de elementos para el sensor de conteo durante el embolsado.
d. COUNT EYE DELAY BEFORE CYCLE (DEMORA DEL SENSOR DE CONTEO ANTES DEL
CICLO). Establece la demora del sensor de conteo antes del ciclo en segundos. Esto es el tiempo
entre el último elemento contado y el ciclo de la máquina.
Página 3-68
FIGURA 3-55. MENÚ SENSOR DE CONTEO
Página 3-69
FIGURA 3-56. MENÚ SELLADO DE BORDES
Página 3-70
FIGURA 3-57. MULTILOTE
Página 3-71
11. BAG GRIPPER (SUJETADOR DE LA BOLSA). No habilitado en las máquinas Autobag series 500
y 550.
12. ACCUMULATING FUNNEL (EMBUDO DE ACUMULACIÓN). ENCIENDE O APAGA el embudo de
acumulación. APÁGUELA si no se requiere el embudo de acumulación. Si se requiere el embudo de
acumulación, las siguientes opciones están disponibles:
a. CLOSED MODE (MODO CERRADO) u OPEN MODE (MODO ABIERTO). Establece la posición
predeterminada para la puerta del embudo durante el funcionamiento del embudo.
b. TIME DELAY BEFORE OPEN (TIEMPO DE DEMORA ANTES DE ABRIR). Establece el tiempo
de demora en segundo de la puerta del embudo antes de abrirla durante el funcionamiento del
embudo.
c. BATCH TIME (TIEMPO DEL LOTE). Establece el tiempo en segundo para completar un lote
durante el funcionamiento del embudo.
d. (DEMORA DEL VENTILADOR). Establece el tiempo de demora en segundo para apagar el
ventilador durante el funcionamiento del embudo una vez que la puerta ha ingresado la bolsa.
Página 3-72
15. SIGNALING (INDICACIÓN). ENCIENDE O APAGA la indicación. APÁGUELA si no se requiere la
indicación. Si se requiere la indicación, las siguientes opciones están disponibles:
a. MODO INDICACIÓN. Indica en qué modo se encuentra establecida la indicación.
b. INPUT DELAY (DEMORA EN LA ENTRADA). Establece la demora en la entrada en segundos.
Página 3-73
(3). EXTERNAL INPUT (ENTRADA EXTERNA).
d. SHAKE TIME DOWN (DISMINUCIÓN DE SACUDIDA). Establece la disminución de sacudida en
segundos.
e. SHAKE TIME UP (INCREMENTO DE SACUDIDA). Establece el incremento de sacudida en
segundos.
f. START SHAKE COUNT (INICIO DE CONTEO DE SACUDIDA). Se usa únicamente para el
accionador de sacudida de Smart Count de Simple Count. Establece el inicio de conteo de
sacudida en segundos.
g. CONTEO DE SACUDIDA. Cantidad de veces en que el estante se sacudirá en cada ciclo.
17. SURE FILL (LLENADO SEGURO) ENCIENDE O APAGA el SureFill™. APAGUE esta opción si no
se requiere SureFill™. Si se requiere SureFill™, las siguientes opciones están disponibles:
a. AIR PULSE DELAY (DEMORAL DEL PULSO DE AIRE). Establece la demora del pulso de aire
en segundos.
Página 3-74
b. AIR PULSE RETRIES (REINTENTOS DEL PULSO DE AIRE). Establece la cantidad de
reintentos para el pulso de aire.
c. BAG OPEN DELAY (DEMORA DE APERTURA DE LA BOLSA). Establece la demora de
apertura de la bolsa en segundos.
18. Apertura de bolsa ENCIENDE o APAGA la función de apertura de bolsa. APAGUE esta opción si
no se requiere la Apertura de bolsas. Si se requiere la apertura de bolsa, las siguientes opciones están
disponibles:
a. BAG OPENER (APERTURA DE BOLSA) Alternar entre ON/OFF (ENCENDIDO y APAGADO)
b. BAG OPENER VERIFY (VERIFICAR APERTURA DE BOLSA) Alternar entre ON/OFF
(ENCENDIDO y APAGADO)
c. DEMORA DE APERTURA DE BOLSA ANTES DE RETIRAR LA BOLSA De 0 a 3 segundos
d. DURACIÓN DEL VENTILADOR PARA LA APERTURA DE BOLSA De 0 a 3 segundos
e. CONTEO DE REINTENTO DE APERTURA DE BOLSA 0-65535
f. CONTEO DE REINTENTO DE APERTURA DE BOLSA LOGRADA Error o Rechazo
g. CONTEO DE RECHAZO DE BOLSA POR ERROR 0-65535
Parámetros avanzados
Hay parámetros avanzados disponibles para usuarios que tengan el nivel Mantenimiento o niveles
superiores. Consulte el Módulo de mantenimiento.
Página 3-75
Menú Configuración
El menú Configuración es donde se pueden realizar los cambios de configuración, así como donde se
puede visualizar la información sobre la máquina. El menú Configuración contiene 8 submenús que
están disponibles para los usuarios en función del nivel de seguridad en que se hayan registrado.
Firmware
Muestra las versiones de firmware actuales instaladas en la máquina y también dónde se pueden
cargar e instalar las versiones nuevas de firmware.
Página 3-76
Cómo restablecer las métricas
Para restablecer las métricas de USER (USUARIO) o SERVICE (SERVICIO), seleccione RESET
(RESTABLECER) USER (USUARIO) o SERVICE (SERVICIO) que se encuentran en la parte inferior
de cada menú.
Página 3-77
7. SLEEP TIME (TIEMPO DE APAGADO AUTOMÁTICO). Esta métrica está reservada para una
función a futuro para energía verde.
8. MISCELLANEOUS TIME (TIEMPO DE VARIOS). Muestra el tiempo de varios en minutos. El tiempo
de varios es cualquier tiempo que no esté contemplado en ninguna otra definición de tiempo de ciclo.
9. ERROR TIME (TIEMPO DE ERROR). Muestra la cantidad de minutos que la máquina ha estado en
estado de error.
10. TOTAL TIME (TIEMPO TOTAL). Muestra el tiempo total de la máquina en minutos.
1. PRINTING TIME (TIEMPO DE IMPRESIÓN). Muestra el tiempo para las etiquetas de impresión en
segundos.
2. ADVANCING TIME (TIEMPO DE AVANCE). Muestra el tiempo para hacer avanzar una bolsa en
segundos.
3. OPENING TIME (TIEMPO DE APERTURA). Muestra el tiempo que emplea el pulso de aire para
abrir una bolsa en segundos.
4. FILLING TIME (TIEMPO DE LLENADO). Muestra el tiempo para cargar las bolsas en segundos.
5. SEALING TIME (TIEMPO DE SELLADO). Muestra el tiempo para sellar las bolsas en segundos.
6. BAGS/MIN (BOLSAS/MIN). Muestra la cantidad de bolsas por minuto.
Página 3-78
Shortcut Actions (Acciones de los accesos directos)
Las acciones de los accesos directos se pueden agregar a la pantalla de inicio para que el operador
acceda a ellas fácilmente. Al seleccionar los accesos directos en este menú agregará el ícono
asociado a la pantalla inicio lo que le permite al operador acceder a esa función.
1. FEED BAG (ALIMENTAR BOLSA). ENCIENDE o APAGA la función alimentar bolsa. Le permite al
usuario alimentar la siguiente bolsa.
2. SEAL FLATTENER (APLANADOR DE SELLADO). ENCIENDE o APAGA la opción de los
aplanadores de sellado.
3. MULTI-BATCH (MULTILOTE). ENCIENDE o APAGA la función multilote. Se utiliza con una balanza
o contador. Le permite al operador ejecutar un accesorio (como un embudo) varias veces por ciclo de
embolsado para poder llenar una bolsa (por ejemplo: para llenar una bolsa de 5 libras, de una libra a la
vez).
4. STRIP-N-RIP (CORTE DE TIRA). ENCIENDE o APAGA la función STRIP-N-RIP (CORTE DE
TIRA). Configura la máquina para que no desgarre la perforación de cada bolsa por una X cantidad de
bolsas, siendo X igual al conteo de corte de tira Strip-n-Rip. Las opciones TRIM SEAL (SELLADO DE
BORDES) y STRIP RIP (CORTE DE TIRA) no se deben ENCENDER al mismo tiempo.
5. TRIM SEAL (SELLADO DE BORDES). ENCIENDE o APAGA la opción de sellado de bordes. Le
permite a la máquina recortar el material en exceso de las bolsas del sellado.
6. THREAD (AVANZAR). No habilitado en las máquinas Autobag series 500 y 550.
7. UNGRIP BAG (SOLTAR BOLSA) ENCIENDE o APAGA la función Soltar bolsa. Le permite al
usuario deshabilitar los sujetadores de la bolsa.
Página 3-79
8. FUNNEL (EMBUDO). ENCIENDE o APAGA la opción del embudo.
9. SIGNALING (INDICACIÓN). ENCIENDE o APAGA la función de indicación.
10. COUNT EYE (SENSOR DE CONTEO). ENCIENDE o APAGA el sensor de conteo. Permite que el
operador utilice la opción SmartCount™ o SimpleCount™. Cuando se ENCIENDEN estas opciones
aparece un menú adicional en la pantalla de inicio.
11. SUPPORT SHELF (ESTANTE DE SOPORTE). ENCIENDE o APAGA la función del estante de
soporte. Le permite al operador habilitar o deshabilitar el estante de soporte, según sea necesario. El
estante de soporte estándar permite además usar una sacudida simple.
12. CONVEYOR (CINTA TRANSPORTADORA). No habilitado en las máquinas Autobag series 500 y
550.
13. OPEN BAG (ABRIR BOLSA). ENCIENDE o APAGA la función abrir bolsa. Le permite al usuario
abrir una bolsa y realizar un ciclo con una puerta del embudo de acumulación para colocar la carga y
terminar en una bolsa cerrada.
Página 3-80
Screensaver (Protector de pantalla)
Screensaver permite ENCENDER o APAGAR la función del protector de pantalla. Cuando esta función
se encuentre ENCENDIDA, la pantalla se quedará en blanco transcurrido un lapso determinado sin
actividad. Toque la pantalla para volver al menú HMI.
1. SCREENSAVER ENABLED (PROTECTOR DE PANTALLA HABILITADO) ENCIENDE O APAGA el
protector de pantalla.
2. SCREENSAVER TIME (TEMPORIZADOR DEL PROTECTOR DE PANTALLA) Establece el lapso al
cabo del que se apagará la pantalla si no hay actividad.
Página 3-81
Users (Usuarios)
En este menú se pueden cambiar parámetros como Passwords (Contraseñas), Default Language
(Idioma predeterminado), Machine Units System (Sistema de unidades de la máquina) y AUTO
LOGOUT DELAY (DEMORA EN EL CIERRE DE SESIÓN AUTOMÁTICO). El Usuario predeterminado
(nivel de encendido) también se puede establecer en este menú.
Para cambiar la contraseña para un nivel de usuario, siga los siguientes pasos:
1. Toque el menú SELECT USERS (SELECCIONAR USUARIOS) y seleccione el nivel de usuario para
el que desee modificar la contraseña.
2. Ingrese la contraseña deseada en el campo NEW PASSWORD (CONTRASEÑA NUEVA). Repítala
para el campo CONFIRM PASSWORD (CONFIRMAR CONTRASEÑA).
3. Seleccione SAVE (GUARDAR). La contraseña ya ha sido cambiada para ese nivel de usuario.
Página 3-82
Nivel de usuario predeterminado
Para cambiar el nivel de usuario predeterminado en el que se enciende la máquina, siga los siguientes
pasos:
1. Seleccione el nivel de usuario deseado desde el menú SELECT USERS (SELECCIONAR
USUARIOS).
2. Toque SET AS DEFAULT (ESTABLECER COMO PREDETERMINADO). El nivel de usuario
seleccionado ahora se ha establecido como el Usuario predeterminado durante el encendido.
Página 3-83
Demora en el cierre de sesión automático
Es posible que los niveles de usuario tengan establecida una demora de la finalización de sesión
automática, que automáticamente finaliza la sesión del nivel actual si el usuario no realiza ninguna
acción. AUTO LOGOUT DELAY (DEMORA DE LA FINALIZACIÓN DE SESIÓN AUTOMÁTICA) es el
campo que muestra cuánto tiempo (en minutos) pasará antes de que se finalice sesión de ese nivel al
nivel de usuario predeterminado. Una ventana emergente en la esquina superior derecha de la pantalla
le hará saber al usuario que se finalizará sesión en 60 segundos, si no realizan una acción (tocando la
pantalla).
Página 3-84
Idioma
El idioma de la interfaz HMI puede estar predeterminado para cada nivel de usuario. Si se cambia el
idioma elegido aquí la selección será permanente y la máquina se encenderá en este idioma. Esto se
realiza por nivel de usuario, por eso, el Operador 1 se puede establecer con una opción de idioma y el
Operador 2 se puede establecer con otra opción de idioma. Para cambiar el idioma para un nivel de
usuario, siga los siguientes pasos:
1. Seleccione el menú desplegable para el idioma.
2. Toque el idioma deseado.
3. Seleccione el nivel de usuario deseado para cambiar el idioma.
4. Toque GUARDAR. Aparecerá un mensaje de confirmación en verde en la esquina superior derecha.
Tiempo real
El Tiempo real de estas máquinas se establece dentro de esta pantalla. Para establecer la hora o el
día, siga los pasos que se describen a continuación:
1. Toque cada campo dentro del menú que se deba cambiar. Aparecerá un teclado numérico.
2. Edite el número según sea necesario para cada campo. Seleccione la marca de verificación de color
verde para guardar.
Página 3-85
El Tiempo real no se ajusta automáticamente en función de los Horarios
de verano.
1. GENERAL.
a. Nombre del host
b. Dominio
c. Servidor DNS
Página 3-86
2. WIRED INTERFACE (INTERFAZ CABLEADA) Este menu permite que los parámetros de
configuración de red conecten la máquina a una red usando LAN.
a. Modo de direccionamiento Se pueden seleccionar los siguientes modos:
(1). DHCP
(2). Manual
(3). Disable (Deshabilitado)
b. IP Address (Dirección IP)
c. Netmask (Máscara de red)
d. Gateway (Puerta de enlace)
e. MAC Address (Dirección MAC)
Página 3-87
Menú Diagnósticos
El menú Diagnósticos es donde se pueden monitorear, probar o modificar los diagnósticos y las
resoluciones de problemas. El menú Diagnósticos contiene 16 submenús que están disponibles para
los usuarios en función del nivel del usuario con que se hayan registrado.
Inputs (Entradas)
Las entradas de la máquina se pueden monitorear en vivo en este menú para un correcto
funcionamiento. Las entradas cambiarán de la X ROJA en el círculo a una MARCA DE VERIFICACIÓN
VERDE en un círculo, cuando se haya activado la entrada.
Página 3-88
Monitor Outputs (Monitorear salidas)
Las salidas de la máquina se pueden monitorear en vivo en este menú para un correcto
funcionamiento.
Página 3-89
Monitor Axis (Monitorear eje)
Los ejes de la máquina se pueden monitorear en este menú.
Los ejes que se pueden monitorear son los siguientes:
1. Rodillo de presión principal. Se pueden monitorear la Salida (%), la Posición, la Temperatura (Temp)
y el Voltaje del Bus (en voltios).
2. Debobinado. No habilitado en las máquinas Autobag series 500 y 550.
3. Barra de sellado. No habilitado en las máquinas Autobag series 500 y 550.
4. Rodillo oscilante. No habilitado en las máquinas Autobag series 500 y 550.
Página 3-90
Parámetros de configuración
Este menú permite importar o exportar los parámetros de configuración de la máquina y los registros
desde una unidad USB. Para exportar los parámetros de configuración, siga los siguientes pasos:
1. Ubique una unidad USB en el puerto USB en la parte trasera de la interfaz HMI. La unidad USB
debe tener el formato FAT 32 para ser reconocida.
2. En el menú DIAGNÓSTICO, seleccione PARÁMETRO DE CONFIGURACIÓN.
3. Presione el ícono EXPORT una vez.
4. Cuando el archivo haya sido exportado, aparecerá un mensaje toast verde en la esquina superior
derecha de la pantalla que confirmará que el archivo se ha exportado.
Página 3-91
Unwinder Motor (Motor debobinador)
Este menú muestra el estado del propulsor y del servo debobinador, así como información para
resolver los problemas del motor debobinador.
Página 3-92
Status (Estado)
En este menú, se pueden monitorear los estados de la máquina.
Página 3-93
3. PERFORATION (PERFORACIÓN). Muestra los estados y las perforaciones no detectadas. Los
siguientes submenús se encuentran disponibles al tocar en PERFORATION (PERFORACIÓN).
a. CONSECUTIVE MISSED (PERFORACIONES CONSECUTIVAS NO DETECTADAS). Muestra
la cantidad de perforaciones consecutivas que no se han detectado.
b. TOTAL MISSED (PERFORACIONES TOTALES NO DETECTADAS). Muestra la cantidad total
de perforaciones que no se han detectado.
c. TOTAL DETECTED (PERFORACIONES TOTALES DETECTADAS). Muestra la cantidad total
de perforaciones que se han detectado.
Página 3-94
Logs (Registros)
Este menú muestra los registros de fallas para la máquina. Se dividen en categorías que consisten en:
1. CLEAR LOGS (BORRAR REGISTROS). La función CLEAR XXXX LOGS (BORRAR XXXX
REGISTROS) borrará los registros que están seleccionados.
2. ALL (TODOS). Muestra todos los registros en orden cronológico.
3. ERROR (ERROR). Muestra los registros de error para la máquina.
4. POWER (ENERGÍA). Muestra los registros de energía para la máquina.
5. FAULT (FALLA). Muestra los registros de falla para la máquina.
6. FAILURE (ANOMALÍA). Muestra los registros de anomalía para la máquina.
7. DRIVE (ACCIONAMIENTO). Muestra los registros de accionamiento para la máquina.
8. ENGINEER (INGENIERÍA). Muestra los registros de ingeniería para la máquina.
Página 3-95
Main Nip Motor (Motor del rodillo prensador principal)
Este menú muestra información para la resolución de problemas del motor del rodillo prensador
principal.
Página 3-96
Dancer (Rodillo oscilante)
Este menú muestra información para la resolución de problemas del debobinado motorizado.
Página 3-97
Autobag 550 Printer (Impresora Autobag 550)
Las máquinas Autobag 550 están configuradas con una impresora DATAMAX clase H. El panel de
control de la impresora para la Autobag 550 está ubicado en la parte trasera de la caja eléctrica
principal. El panel de control permite el acceso a los menús de la impresora.
Página 3-98
Print roll errors (Errores del rodillo de impresión)
Cuando la máquina experimenta un error del rodillo de impresión, siga los siguientes pasos:
1. Corrija la condición que ocasiona el error.
2. Elimine el mensaje de error de la pantalla HMI.
3. Antes de reanudar el ciclo, manualmente haga avanzar una bolsa hacia afuera utilizando los
interruptores del balancín de avance o el ícono FEEDBAG (ALIMENTAR BOLSA) en la pantalla
INICIO.
Página 3-99
Ribbon Test Label (Etiqueta de prueba de cinta)
La función Ribbon Test Label (Etiqueta de prueba de cinta) se utiliza como indicador de la función de
transferencia para impresoras equipadas con la opción de transferencia térmica. Formado por un
código de barras vertical, este formato puede utilizarse para asegurar las funciones de los
componentes y la alineación de la trayectoria de la cinta.
Página 3-100
User-Defined Label (Etiqueta definida por el usuario)
La función User-Defined Label (Etiqueta definida por el usuario) permite rellenar una plantilla con datos
variables (mediante el panel de control de la impresora de un teclado QUERTY USB). La plantilla es un
formato de etiquetas guardado, donde los campos delimitados por el símbolo “&” se convierten en
variables. La impresora solicitará al usuario que introduzca estos datos de campo variables.
Por ejemplo, el formato de etiquetas guardado podría contener los datos “19131423443&ENTER
NAME”. Más adelante, cuando se recupere de la memoria, la pantalla de la impresora indicará el
campo variable ENTER NAME (INTRODUCIR NOMBRE).
Los datos variables pueden ser cualquier parte del formato DPL: ID de
fuente, posicionamiento, etc. No se realizará ninguna comprobación de
errores.
Página 3-101
FIGURA 3-85. LÍNEA DE ESTADO DE LA PANTALLA DE LA IMPRESORA
Página 3-102
FIGURA 3-86. CONEXIONES DE LA CAJA ELÉCTRICA DE LA IMPRESORA
Página 3-103
3. Cuando se carga el archivo de etiqueta, la línea de estado de la pantalla del impresor mostrará este
mensaje: WAITING FOR SIGNAL (ESPERANDO SEÑAL). Cuando la unidad del embolsador envíe
una señal al impresor, imprimirá la etiqueta cada vez que la unidad cumpla un ciclo.
Página 3-104
Comunicaciones de la impresora
Opción de menú Detalles
Puerto en serie A Controla los ajustes de comunicaciones RS-232 para el puerto en serie A,
donde:
• BAUD RATE (Tasa de Ajusta la velocidad de comunicación en serie, donde:
baudios)
-1200 BPS -
-2400 BPS -
-4800 BPS -
-9600 BPS -
-19200 BPS es la velocidad en serie en bits por segundo (BPS).
-28800 BPS -
-38400 BPS -
-57600 BPS -
-115000 BPS -
• PROTOCOL (Protocolo) Ajusta el método de control del flujo de datos (intercambio), donde:
- Both (Ambos) Utiliza XON/XOFF y CTS/DTR.
- Software Utiliza XON/XOFF.
- Hardware Utiliza CTS/DTR.
- None (Ninguno) Desactiva el control de flujo.
• PARITY(Paridad) Ajusta la paridad de términos, donde:
- None (Ninguno) Utiliza la paridad.
- Odd (Impar) Utiliza la paridad impar.
-Even (Par) Utiliza la paridad par.
• DATA BITS (Bits de Ajusta la longitud del término, donde:
datos)
-(7-8) Es el número de bits que contiene el término.
• STOP BITS (Bits de Ajusta el recuento de bits de parada, donde:
parada)
-(1-2) Es el número de bits de parada.
Serial Port C (Puerto en Controla los ajustes del puerto opcional COM C (J4) de la interfaz del
serie C) aplicador, donde los ajustes son los mismos que los especificados para el
SERIAL PORT A. El valor máximo de baudios para el puerto serie C es de
38,4 K BPS.
Serial Port D (Puerto en Controla los ajustes del puerto opcional COM D (J3) de la interfaz del
serie D) aplicador, donde los ajustes son los mismos que los especificados para el
SERIAL PORT A (Puerto en serie A). El valor máximo de baudios para el
puerto en serie C es de 38,4 K BPS.
Parallel Port A (Puerto Controla los ajustes de comunicaciones del puerto paralelo A, donde:
paralelo A)
Página 3-105
Opción de menú Detalles
• PORT DIRECTION Permite devolver los datos de la impresora a la computadora central, donde:
(Dirección de puerto)
- Uni-directional No devuelve ningún dato (comunicación unidireccional).
(Unidireccional)
- Bi-directional Devuelve datos (operación conforme al canal de retorno).
(Bidireccional)
NIC Adapter (Adaptador Controla los ajustes de comunicaciones de la interfaz de red, donde:
de la tarjeta de interfaz
de red)
• QUICK SETUP Solo disponible si está equipado con DMXNetII o DMXrfNetII.
(Configuración rápida) Selecciona los ajustes para configurar operaciones básicas cableadas o
inalámbricas, donde:
- Wired DCHP (DCHP Selecciona la operación cableada, donde:
cableado)
*No (No) Sale de la opción de menú sin cambiar los ajustes actuales.
*Yes (Sí) Restablece los valores predeterminados del adaptador de la tarjeta de interfaz
de red, y ajusta Wired Discovery (Detección de cableado) en Enable (Habilitar) y
Wireless (Inalámbrico) en Disable (Deshabilitar).
• WLAN UNSECURED Selecciona la operación inalámbrica, donde:
(WLAN no protegida)
- No (No) Sale de la opción de menú sin cambiar los ajustes actuales.
- Yes (Sí) Restablece los valores predeterminados del adaptador de la tarjeta de interfaz
de red, y ajusta Discovery (Detección) en Enable (Habilitar), SSID en Any
(Cualquiera) y el tipo de red WLAN en Infrastructure (Infraestructura).
• WLAN ADHOC Selecciona los parámetros predeterminados de DMXrfNetII, donde:
- No (No) Sale de la opción de menú sin cambiar los ajustes actuales.
- Yes (Sí) Restablece las fallas del Wi-Fi e inicia el modo infraestructura con un SSID en
Any (Cualquiera).
Se eliminarán todas las asociaciones de puntos de acceso existentes y se
establecerán con la más cercana que esté disponible. (Es práctico cuando se
traslada la impresora a una ubicación geográfica distante).
• SET FACTORY Restablece los valores programados de fábrica, donde:
DEFAULTS (Ajustar
valores predeterminados)
- No (No) Sale de la opción de menú sin cambiar los ajustes actuales.
- Yes (Sí) Restablece los valores predeterminados.
• WLAN Controla los ajustes de comunicaciones de la tarjeta DMXrfNetII, donde:
- Mode (Modo) Selecciona entre funcionamiento inalámbrico o cableado, donde:
*Enabled (Habilitado) Habilita la interfaz inalámbrica.
*Disabled (Deshabilitado) Habilita la interfaz cableada.
- BSS Address (Dirección Especifica la dirección IP estática del módulo de puente inalámbrico. Si DHCP
BSS) está habilitado, se omitirá este parámetro.
*000.000.000.000 Es la dirección en formato de octeto estándar.
Página 3-106
Opción de menú Detalles
NIC Adapter Controla los ajustes de comunicaciones de la interfaz de red, donde:
(Continuación)
- Signal readings Muestra las relaciones de señal y ruido de WLAN.
(Lecturas de señal)
• IP ADDRESS Especifica la dirección IP estática, donde:
(Dirección IP)
-192.168.010.026 Es la dirección en formato de octeto estándar.
• SUBNET MASK Especifica la dirección de la máscara de subred estática, donde:
(Máscara de subred)
-255.255.255.000 Es la dirección en formato de octeto estándar.
• GATEWAY Especifica la dirección de la puerta de enlace de red, donde:
(Puerta de enlace)
-192.168.010.026 Es la dirección en formato de octeto estándar.
• SNMPTRAP Especifica la dirección de trampa SNMP, donde:
DESTINATION (Destino
de trampa SNMP)
-000.000.000.000 Es la dirección en formato de octeto estándar donde se enviarán las trampas
SNMP cuando se instale el servicio SNMP en su receptor. Cuando se ajusta en
cero, no se envía ninguna trampa.
• IP DISCOVERY Controla la detección de direcciones IP, donde:
(Detección de IP)
- Enabled (Habilitado) Transmite a través de la red al inicio para recibir direcciones del servidor
responsable. No se permiten las modificaciones manuales en las opciones de
dirección IP, máscara de subred o puerta de enlace. Si no se encuentra ningún
servidor, se utilizará el valor estático especificado. La dirección IP asignada por
el servidor tiene prioridad sobre cualquier dirección estática guardada en la
interfaz.
- Disabled Utiliza la dirección de IP estática, máscara de subred o puerta de enlace
(Deshabilitado) guardada.
• SNMP Permite los protocolos de gestión, donde:
- Enabled (Habilitado) Envía mensajes a dispositivos compatibles con SNMP.
- Disabled No envía mensajes.
(Deshabilitado)
• ADVANCED Ajusta parámetros y funciones de red avanzadas, donde:
(Avanzado)
- Telnet Configura el protocolo Telnet para transferir datos, donde:
*Enabled (Habilitado) Permite Telnet.
*Disabled (Deshabilitado) Deshabilita Telnet.
-FTP Configura el protocolo de transferencia de archivos para transferir datos, donde:
*Enabled (Habilitado) Permite FTP.
*Disabled (Deshabilitado) Deshabilita FTP.
-MTU Ajusta el tamaño del paquete de Unidad de transmisión máxima (MTU), donde:
*(512 - 65515) Es el tamaño del paquete, en bytes.
Página 3-107
Opción de menú Detalles
- Gratuitous APRP Ajusta la velocidad de notificación del protocolo de resolución de la dirección,
(APRP gratuito) donde:
*(0 - 2048) Es la hora, en minutos.
- Port Number (Número Ajusta el puerto de comunicación de red, donde:
de puerto)
*(1 - 65535) Es el número de puerto.
NIC Adapter Controla los ajustes de comunicaciones de la interfaz de red, donde:
(Continuación)
- TCP KEEPALIVE Permite realizar una supervisión de una conexión abierta para detectar cualquier
desconexión que no se haya cerrado correctamente, incluso puntos de acceso
de reinicio e impresoras desenchufadas, donde:
*Enabled (Habilitado) Mantiene la supervisión activa.
*Disabled (Deshabilitado) Cierra dicha desconexión tras 2,5 minutos.
- Duplex Capability Ajusta la capacidad de comunicación para la red cableada, donde:
(Capacidad dúplex)
*Auto-Negotiate Selecciona automáticamente el mejor tipo.
(Autonegociar)
*100BASET HALF Selecciona operaciones semidúplex de 100 <a>Mbit/s (en ambas direcciones,
una por vez).
*100BASET FULL Selecciona operaciones de dúplex completo de 100 <a>Mbit/s (en ambas
direcciones, simultáneamente).
*10BASET HALF Selecciona operaciones semidúplex de 10 <a>Mbit/s (en ambas direcciones,
una por vez).
*10BASET FULL Selecciona operaciones de dúplex completo de 10 <a>Mbit/s (en ambas
direcciones, simultáneamente).
- Advertise Capability Transmite la capacidad de comunicación de la impresora para la red cableada,
(Anunciar capacidad) donde:
*Automatic (Automático) Anuncia el valor preestablecido para capacidad dúplex.
*All Capabilities (Todas Anuncia todos los posibles valores para capacidad dúplex.
las capacidades)
- Network Report Permite ver o imprimir el informe de estado de red, donde:
(Informe de red)
*View (Vista) Muestra el informe.
*Print (Imprimir) Imprime el informe.
- Set factory defaults Restablece los valores programados de fábrica, donde:
(Ajustar valores
predeterminados)
*Yes (Sí) Restablece los valores predeterminados.
Se reiniciará y se restaurarán todos los ajustes, excepto los ajustes y las
calibraciones personalizados.
*No (No) Sale sin cambiar los ajustes actuales.
Host Settings (Ajustes de Ajusta los parámetros de comunicación de la computadora central, donde:
la computadora central)
Página 3-108
Opción de menú Detalles
• Host Timeout (Error de Establece el período durante el cual un puerto de interfaz puede estar inactivo
tiempo de espera de la antes de que se produzca un error de tiempo de espera, donde:
computadora central)
- (1 - 60 Sec) (1 a 60 Es el tiempo (en segundos) en el que se agota el tiempo de espera para
seg.) descargas, y que debe transcurrir antes de poder procesar un puerto o un
programa de análisis alternativo.
• Control Codes (Códigos Permite cambiar los controles de interpretación de instrucciones del software,
de control) donde:
- Standard Codes Establece estos códigos de interpretación: Hex 01 = Instrucción SOH; Hex 02 =
(Códigos estándar) instrucción STX; Count-By = ^; Hex 1B = ESC; Hex 0x0D = Retorno de carro.
- Alternate Codes Establece estos códigos de interpretación: Hex 5E = Instrucción SOH; Hex 7E =
(Códigos alternativos) instrucción STX; Count-By = @; Hex 1B = ESC; Hex 0x0D = Retorno de carro.
- Alternate Codes 2 Establece estos códigos de interpretación: Hex 5E = Instrucción SOH; Hex 7E =
(Códigos alternativos 2) instrucción STX; Count-By = @; Hex 1B = ESC; Hex 0x7C = Retorno de carro.
Host Settings Ajusta los parámetros de comunicación de la computadora central, donde:
(Parámetros de host)
(continuación)
- Custom Codes Establece los códigos de interacción, donde:
(Códigos personalizados)
*Standard Codes Son los códigos según su definición.
(Códigos estándar) Los códigos estándar funcionan como marcadores predeterminados.
*SOH 01
*STX 02
*CR 0D
*CNTBY 5E
• Feedback Characters Permite la devolución de códigos de la impresora, donde:
(Caracteres de
devolución)
- Enabled (Habilitado) Envía a la computadora central un Hex 1E (RS) después de cada etiqueta y un
Hex 1F (US) después de cada lote que se imprime correctamente.
- Disabled No envía caracteres de devolución.
(Deshabilitado)
• ESC Sequences Ajusta el manejo de los datos que contienen secuencias ESC no válidas, donde:
(Secuencias ESC)
- Enabled (Habilitado) Procesa instrucciones normalmente.
- Disabled Omite los códigos de control ESC durante el procesamiento (como algunos
(Deshabilitado) sistemas envían “banners” a la impresora).
• Heat Command Determina cómo se manejarán las instrucciones de calor de la computadora
(Instrucción de calor) central, donde:
- Enabled (Habilitado) Procesa instrucciones de software normalmente.
- Disabled Controla el calor a través del ajuste de menú.
(Deshabilitado)
• Speed Commands Determina cómo se manejarán las instrucciones Print (Imprimir), Feed
(Instrucciones de (Alimentar), Reverse (Retroceder) y Slew (Rotar) de la computadora central,
velocidad) donde:
Página 3-109
Opción de menú Detalles
- Enabled (Habilitado) Procesa instrucciones de software normalmente.
- Disabled Controla las velocidades a través del ajuste de menú.
(Deshabilitado)
• TOF Sensing Determina cómo se manejarán las instrucciones de Gap (Espacio), Continuous
Commands (Continuo) y Reflective (Reflectante), donde:
(Instrucciones de
detección de TOF)
- Enabled (Habilitado) Procesa instrucciones de software normalmente.
- Disabled Controla el tipo de sensor a través del ajuste de menú.
(Deshabilitado)
• Symbol Set Command Determina cómo se manejarán las instrucciones del conjunto de símbolo único y
(Instrucción de conjunto de símbolo doble de la computadora central, donde:
de símbolos)
- Enabled (Habilitado) Procesa instrucciones de software normalmente.
- Disabled Controla la selección del conjunto de símbolos a través del ajuste de menú.
(Deshabilitado)
• CNTRL: Códigos Determina cómo se manejarán los códigos de control de la computadora central,
(DATOS) donde:
- Enabled (Habilitado) Procesa las instrucciones normalmente.
- Disabled Controla el ajuste a través del menú.
(Deshabilitado)
• STX-V SW Settings Determina cómo se maneja una instrucción de activación de opción de la
(Ajustes STX-V SW) computadora central, donde:
- Enabled (Habilitado) Procesa instrucciones de software normalmente.
- Disabled Controla el ajuste a través del menú.
(Deshabilitado)
Host Settings (Ajustes Ajusta los parámetros de comunicación de la computadora central, donde:
de la computadora
central)
• Max Length Command Determina cómo se maneja una instrucción de longitud máxima de etiqueta
(Instrucción de longitud (<STX>M) de la computadora central, donde:
máx.)
- Enabled (Habilitado) Procesa instrucciones de software normalmente.
- Disabled Controla el ajuste a través del menú.
(Deshabilitado)
Página 3-110
Opción de menú Detalles
• Option Feedback Permite devolver caracteres de devolución desde un dispositivo opcional al
(Opción de devolución) dispositivo de la computadora central, en el formato <A;B;C;D;E;F> [CR], donde:
*A Es el tipo de dispositivo:
*R = RFID
*S = Escáner lineal.
*B Es el estado:
*C = toda la etiqueta completa
*F = la etiqueta defectuosa (con error)
*U = Desconocido.
*C Es el número de lecturas esperadas, dada en dos caracteres.
*D Es el número de lecturas satisfactorias, dada en dos caracteres.
*E Es el identificador interno de trabajos y subtrabajos, dado en cuatro caracteres.
*F Es la lectura de datos, delimitada por puntos y comas ( ; ) si hay varias lecturas.
- Disabled No informa ningún dato.
(Deshabilitado)
- Scanner (Escáner) Informa datos del escáner lineal.
- RFID Hex Informa datos RFID en formato hexadecimal.
- RFID ASCII Informa datos RFID en formato ASCII.
• Proceso SOH (Datos) Determina la respuesta a una instrucción inmediata (por ejemplo, Get Status
(Obtener estado), Module Storage (Almacenamiento de módulo), etc.), donde:
- Disabled Procesa instrucciones de software normalmente.
(Deshabilitado)
- Enabled (Habilitado) Interrumpe las operaciones después de la recepción de SOH para procesar la
instrucción.
Página 3-111
Mensajes de notificación
Aparecerán mensajes emergentes en la pantalla HMI cuando ocurran errores o notificaciones en la
máquina.
Página 3-112
Mensajes emergentes
Los siguientes mensajes emergentes pueden aparecer durante el funcionamiento de la máquina.
Los números del ID DEL MSJ se deben anotar para cuando se contacta a
la Asistencia técnica para ayudar con la resolución del problema.
ID DEL Mensaje
Imagen del mensaje emergente Causa posible
MSJ mostrado
La máquina esta en
Reset E-STOP
condición de PARADA
(Restablecer la
1 DE EMERGENCIA y
PARADA DE
se debe reiniciar
EMERGENCIA)
antes de continuar.
Página 3-113
Mensaje
Imagen del mensaje emergente ID DEL MSJ Causa posible
mostrado
E-STOP button
El botón de PARADA
1 engaged
DE EMERGENCIA ha
(Botón 1 de
2 sido activado y se
PARADA DE
debe restablecer
EMERGENCIA
antes de continuar.
activado)
La máquina se
encuentra en una
11 ID del MJE 11 condición de E-STOP
(PARADA DE
EMERGENCIA).
La máquina requiere
Homing needed
de una secuencia de
13 (Necesidad de
autoguiado antes de
autoguiado)
continuar.
Página 3-114
Mensaje
Imagen del mensaje emergente ID DEL MSJ Causa posible
mostrado
Página 3-115
Mensaje
Imagen del mensaje emergente ID DEL MSJ Causa posible
mostrado
Missed La máquina no ha
perforation detectado la cantidad
100
(Perforación no de perforaciones
detectada) permitidas.
Página 3-116
Mensaje
Imagen del mensaje emergente ID DEL MSJ Causa posible
mostrado
La máquina ha
Out of bags (Sin
101 detectado que está
bolsas)
sin bolsas.
La máquina ha
Bag not opened detectado que la
102 error (Error de bolsa no se ha abierto
bolsa sin abrir) (con la opción SureFill
habilitada).
Página 3-117
Mensaje
Imagen del mensaje emergente ID DEL MSJ Causa posible
mostrado
La máquina ha
detectado un
Print length error problema con la
(Error de etiqueta en la bolsa
104
longitud de (impresa sobre la
impresión) perforación,
demasiado grande,
etc.).
La máquina ha
Seal bar jam
detectado un error en
error (Error de
105 la barra de sellado
atasco en la
durante el ciclo de
barra de sellado)
cierre.
Página 3-118
Mensaje
Imagen del mensaje emergente ID DEL MSJ Causa posible
mostrado
La máquina ha
Seal bar jam
detectado un error en
error (Error de
106 la barra de sellado
atasco en la
durante el ciclo de
barra de sellado)
cierre.
La máquina ha
Seal bar jam
detectado un error en
error (Error de
107 la barra de sellado
atasco en la
durante el ciclo de
barra de sellado)
cierre.
Página 3-119
Mensaje
Imagen del mensaje emergente ID DEL MSJ Causa posible
mostrado
Página 3-120
Mensaje
Imagen del mensaje emergente ID DEL MSJ Causa posible
mostrado
Página 3-121
Mensaje
Imagen del mensaje emergente ID DEL MSJ Causa posible
mostrado
Start switch
disabled El interruptor de
113 (Interruptor de inicio/parada no está
inicio no activado.
activado)
Página 3-122
Mensaje
Imagen del mensaje emergente ID DEL MSJ Causa posible
mostrado
Página 3-123
Mensaje
Imagen del mensaje emergente ID DEL MSJ Causa posible
mostrado
Unwinder up
El debobinador está
error (Error de
123 asegurado en la
debobinado
posición hacia arriba.
hacia arriba)
Página 3-124
Mensaje
Imagen del mensaje emergente ID DEL MSJ Causa posible
mostrado
El debobinador
Unwinder up excede el rodillo
error (Error de prensador principal,
124
debobinado se quedó sin bolsas o
hacia arriba) no puede alimentar
más bolsas.
Página 3-125
Mensaje
Imagen del mensaje emergente ID DEL MSJ Causa posible
mostrado
Unwinder drive
La máquina ha
error (Error del
129 detectado un error en
accionador del
el accionador.
debobinado)
Página 3-126
Mensaje
Imagen del mensaje emergente ID DEL MSJ Causa posible
mostrado
La máquina ha
Unwinder drive
superado el tiempo de
error (Error del
131 espera para alcanzar
accionador del
la posición de
debobinado)
debobinado.
Página 3-127
Mensaje
Imagen del mensaje emergente ID DEL MSJ Causa posible
mostrado
Accumulating
funnel jammed
El embudo de
error (Error de
143 acumulación se ha
atascamiento en
atascado abierto.
el embudo de
acumulación)
Accumulating
funnel jammed
El embudo de
error (Error de
144 acumulación se ha
atascamiento en
atascado cerrado.
el embudo de
acumulación)
Página 3-128
Mensaje
Imagen del mensaje emergente ID DEL MSJ Causa posible
mostrado
Printer not
configured error Solo máquinas 550.
145 (Error de Impresora no
impresora no configurada.
configurada)
Printer not
available error Solo máquinas 550.
146 (Error de La impresora no está
impresora no disponible.
disponible)
Página 3-129
Mensaje
Imagen del mensaje emergente ID DEL MSJ Causa posible
mostrado
Printer update
error (Error de
148 Solo máquinas 550.
actualización de
impresora)
Página 3-130
Mensaje
Imagen del mensaje emergente ID DEL MSJ Causa posible
mostrado
Página 3-131
Mensaje
Imagen del mensaje emergente ID DEL MSJ Causa posible
mostrado
La apertura de bolsa
Error de atasco
ha detectado un
ID DEL MSJ 153 153 en la apertura
atasco durante la
de bolsa
apertura.
La apertura de bolsa
Error de atasco
ha detectado un
ID DEL MSJ 154 154 en la apertura
atasco durante el
de bolsa
cierre.
Página 3-132
Mensaje
Imagen del mensaje emergente ID DEL MSJ Causa posible
mostrado
Error de rechazo
ID DEL MSJ 155 155 de la bolsa
siguiente
Motor 1 voltage
fault (Falla de Fusible quemado en
200
tensión en el el motor 1.
motor 1)
Página 3-133
Mensaje
Imagen del mensaje emergente ID DEL MSJ Causa posible
mostrado
Motor 3 voltage
fault (Falla de Fusible quemado en
202
tensión en el el motor 3.
motor 1)
Página 3-134
Mensaje
Imagen del mensaje emergente ID DEL MSJ Causa posible
mostrado
La máquina ha
detectado un error en
Falla en el
234 el suministro de
sistema de calor
energía del cable de
calentamiento.
La máquina ha
detectado un error en
Falla en el el fusible del
235
sistema de calor suministro de energía
del cable de
calentamiento.
Página 3-135
Mensaje
Imagen del mensaje emergente ID DEL MSJ Causa posible
mostrado
La máquina ha
detectado un error en
el sistema del cable
Falla en el
236 de calentamiento
sistema de calor
causado por el relé de
E-STOP (PARADA
DE EMERGENCIA).
La máquina ha
detectado un error en
la tensión medida del
cable de
Falla en el
237 calentamiento (la
sistema de calor
tensión se encuentra
por debajo del nivel
establecido durante la
calibración).
Página 3-136
Mensaje
Imagen del mensaje emergente ID DEL MSJ Causa posible
mostrado
La máquina ha
detectado un error en
el cable de
Falla en el calentamiento
238
sistema de calor (problema de
importancia crítica
detectado por el
software.
La máquina ha
detectado un error en
la tensión del cable
Falla en el de calentamiento (la
239
sistema de calor tensión del cable de
calentamiento es
inferior a
0,150 voltios).
Página 3-137
Mensaje
Imagen del mensaje emergente ID DEL MSJ Causa posible
mostrado
La máquina ha
detectado un error en
el valor de calibración
del cable de
calentamiento (el
valor obtenido
Falla en el
241 durante la calibración
sistema de calor
se encuentra fuera
del rango de valor
aceptable de +/- 25%
de la resistencia
nominal del cable de
calentamiento).
La máquina ha
detectado un error en
la temperatura de
calibración del cable
de calentamiento (la
Falla en el temperatura ambiente
242
sistema de calor se encuentra fuera
del rango de valores
aceptables, que es de
32 a 130° F o de 0
a 54.4 °C).
Página 3-138
Mensaje
Imagen del mensaje emergente ID DEL MSJ Causa posible
mostrado
La máquina ha
detectado un error en
el cable de
Falla en el
243 calentamiento (la
sistema de calor
máxima tensión
esperada durante 5
segundos).
Página 3-139
PÁGINA EN BLANCO
Página 3-140
MAINTENANCE
Subject Page
Page 4-1
Machine Opt & Acc ........................................................ 4-25
Configuration .............................................................. 4-25
Options ....................................................................... 4-32
Accessories ................................................................ 4-33
Accessory configuration ................................................. 4-35
Maintenance User diagnostic menus ................................. 4-37
Heat Wire ....................................................................... 4-37
Heat Wire Calibration ................................................. 4-39
Printer ............................................................................ 4-42
Signaling ........................................................................ 4-43
Maintenance ...................................................................... 4-44
Preparation for Maintenance .......................................... 4-45
Required tool kit ............................................................. 4-45
Scheduled Maintenance .................................................... 4-46
Daily Maintenance ......................................................... 4-46
Weekly Maintenance ...................................................... 4-46
Monthly Maintenance ..................................................... 4-47
Annual Maintenance ...................................................... 4-47
Teflon Scroll Adjustment .................................................... 4-48
Safety Circuit Testing ........................................................ 4-50
Unscheduled Maintenance ................................................ 4-53
Covers ........................................................................... 4-53
Adjustment ................................................................. 4-54
Removal ..................................................................... 4-54
Cleaning ..................................................................... 4-54
Installation .................................................................. 4-54
Infeed Tray..................................................................... 4-55
Adjustment ................................................................. 4-55
Removal ..................................................................... 4-55
Cleaning ..................................................................... 4-55
Installation .................................................................. 4-56
Front Guard ................................................................... 4-56
Adjustment ................................................................. 4-57
Removal ..................................................................... 4-57
Cleaning ..................................................................... 4-57
Installation .................................................................. 4-57
Page 4-2
Trim Collector Chute, Gripper and Face Plates .............. 4-58
Adjustment ..................................................................4-59
Removal .....................................................................4-59
Cleaning .....................................................................4-59
Installation...................................................................4-60
Internal Guarding ............................................................4-61
Adjustment ..................................................................4-62
Removal .....................................................................4-62
Cleaning .....................................................................4-62
Installation...................................................................4-62
Heat Wire Control Board ................................................4-62
Heat Wire .......................................................................4-63
Adjustment ..................................................................4-64
Removal .....................................................................4-64
Cleaning .....................................................................4-65
Installation...................................................................4-65
Teflon Scroll ...................................................................4-65
Adjustment ..................................................................4-65
Removal .....................................................................4-65
Cleaning .....................................................................4-66
Installation...................................................................4-66
Seal Bar .........................................................................4-67
Adjustment ..................................................................4-68
Removal .....................................................................4-68
Cleaning .....................................................................4-68
Installation...................................................................4-68
Passthrough ...................................................................4-69
Adjustment ..................................................................4-70
Removal .....................................................................4-70
Cleaning .....................................................................4-70
Installation...................................................................4-70
Print Head ......................................................................4-71
Adjustment ..................................................................4-72
Removal .....................................................................4-73
Cleaning .....................................................................4-74
Installation...................................................................4-74
Page 4-3
High Voltage Sensor ...................................................... 4-75
Adjustment ................................................................. 4-75
Removal ..................................................................... 4-76
Cleaning ..................................................................... 4-76
Installation .................................................................. 4-76
Main Motor Drive............................................................ 4-77
Adjustment ................................................................. 4-78
Removal ..................................................................... 4-78
Cleaning ..................................................................... 4-78
Installation .................................................................. 4-78
Nip and Print Roller ........................................................ 4-79
Adjustment ................................................................. 4-80
Removal ..................................................................... 4-80
Cleaning ..................................................................... 4-81
Installation .................................................................. 4-81
Inlet Air and Coalescer Filter .......................................... 4-83
Adjustment ................................................................. 4-83
Removal ..................................................................... 4-84
Cleaning ..................................................................... 4-84
Installation .................................................................. 4-84
E-STOP Relay ................................................................... 4-84
440R-S12R2 – Single Input (SI) Dual Channel
Safety Relay .................................................................. 4-84
Reset in Case of Fault ................................................ 4-85
Safety Inputs .............................................................. 4-85
Reset .......................................................................... 4-85
440R-S12R2 Replacement and Configuration ............... 4-86
Replace the Existing Relay ......................................... 4-86
Configure the Safety Relay: ........................................ 4-87
Safety Relay Testing of 440R-S12R2 ............................. 4-87
Normal Operation Verification ..................................... 4-87
440R-S12R2 – Single Input - Testing Worksheet ....... 4-88
Sensors.......................................................................... 4-89
Seal Bar Sensor ......................................................... 4-89
Slot Sensors ............................................................... 4-89
Page 4-4
Electrostatic discharge
Electrostatic Discharge or ESD is the release of static electricity between two objects, such as a
person’s hand and a circuit card. This release of energy is due to a difference in potential between the
two items with one having a higher potential (positive) and the other having a lower potential (negative
or ground).
Static electrical charges can occur in a variety of environmental conditions and are affected by factors
such as, but not limited to:
• Humidity
• Temperature
• Flooring
• Clothing
• Packaging materials
ESD events are not always felt by the individual and therefore go unnoticed until a problem with the
equipment occurs. ESD can cause permanent damage to equipment, especially circuit card
assemblies. Items that are susceptible to ESD damage are known as Electrostatic Discharge Sensitive
(ESDS). To reduce the number of events that occur, an individual must follow an ESD plan.
Always follow local ESD procedures. Use the procedures contained within
this manual in the absence of established local procedures.
Page 4-5
ESD symbols
ESD symbols point out areas or items that are ESD sensitive. Some of the symbols used can be found
in Figure 4-1.
Preventing ESD
ESD events can be prevented by avoiding the buildup of static electricity. Use the following steps to
prevent the buildup of static electrical charges:
1. Ensure that individuals handling ESDS items are properly grounded. Use ground and wrist straps
when handling ESDS items.
2. Ensure equipment is properly grounded prior to performing any maintenance actions.
3. Handle all electrical equipment as if it’s ESDS. Never handle ESDS items without grounding straps
on the individual and the item.
4. Use ESD protective packaging when transporting or storing ESDS items.
5. Use ESD workstations (permanent or portable) when handling ESDS items.
Following the procedures listed above will not eliminate all ESD events but
will greatly reduce the number that occur.
Page 4-6
Lockout/Tagout (LOTO)
The process of properly securing electrical, pneumatic, hydraulic and other forms of energy sources to
equipment prior to servicing or maintenance is known as Lockout/Tagout (LOTO). LOTO procedures
ensure that the equipment has been properly powered down and secured using a LOTO device so that
it may not be operated while service or maintenance is being performed on the equipment.
LOTO procedures are a safety program governed by Occupational Safety and Health Standards
(OSHA) and National Fire Prevention Association (NFPA) regulations. Information contained within this
section is not meant to replace OSHA or NFPA regulations and is only to serve as a quick reference
guide.
Lockout/Tagout devices
LOTO devices must meet the following criteria:
1. Durable and substantial. Locks should be sufficient enough that they may only be removed with the
use of tools or bolt cutters. Tags must be non-releasable, with a minimum unlocking strength of 50
pounds.
Page 4-7
2. Standardized (Color, shape, size, etc.)
3. LOTO devices must be legible and clearly identify who placed them. They must also state “do not
start, open, or operate”.
Lockout/Tagout procedures
Lockout procedures vary from location to location. The following is a summary of sequences that are
required by OSHA to Lockout/Tagout equipment.
Page 4-8
5. Prove that the equipment isolation is effective.
a. Attempt to operate the machine using normal operating procedures to ensure that it is in a non-
operating status. Return the controls to their neutral or OFF position after verifying the isolation of
the equipment.
Once these 5 steps have been accomplished, the machine is now locked out.
LOTO devices must be removed by the employee that placed them on the equipment before it may be
returned to normal operating condition.
Page 4-9
Power cord LOTO devices
A typical LOTO device for securing a power cord will attach to the end of the cord and will not allow it to
be connected to a power source. Refer to Figure 4-3 for an example of a power cord LOTO device.
These devices will vary from location to location.
Page 4-10
Trapped air after LOTO
The load shelf and accumulating funnels are designed to trap air to prevent product from being
released during E-STOP situations. The load shelf and accumulating funnel door will be locked in their
last position when an E-STOP situation occurs. To remove air from these assemblies, use the following
steps:
1. Ensure the air supply LOTO device is actuated and secured.
2. Locate the blue and black 6mm air lines going into the assemblies.
3. Push in on the air lines (Figure 4-5, Item 1) and hold while pressing in on the fitting connector ring
(Figure 4-5, Item 2).
4. Remove the air line from the fitting. A small amount of air will release when removing the air line.
Remove both the blue and black air lines in order to completely remove all
the trapped air in the assembly.
5. Reconnect both the blue and black air lines prior to resuming normal operation.
Page 4-11
Removing Lockout/ Tagout devices
Only the employee that placed the equipment in a Locked out/Tagged out condition may restore it to full
operating condition. Prior to removing LOTO devices installed on equipment, the following actions must
occur:
1. Verify work is complete and that all nonessential items (tools, rags, etc.) have been removed.
2. Verify employees are clear of the area or safely positioned.
3. Place the operating controls in the neutral or OFF position.
4. Remove the LOTO devices. Reenergize the equipment using normal operating conditions. Verify the
equipment is operating normally.
Notify the appropriate personnel that the equipment has been returned to normal operating condition
and is ready for use.
Page 4-12
Technical specifications
Specification Description
Printer Resolution 203, 300 and 406 DPI for Autobag 550
Power supply (electrical) Universal Input: 110V to 240V VAC, 50/60 Hz Power
Consumption: 1500 Watts (VA) max
Compressed air (dry and filtered) 5 CFM/80 Psi of clean, dry air
NOTE
Cycle rates will vary based on machine settings and
loading variables.
Page 4-13
FIGURE 4-6. AUTOBAG 500 FOOTPRINT
Page 4-14
FIGURE 4-7. AUTOBAG 550 FOOTPRINT
Page 4-15
Electrical supply
The Autobag 500 and 550 machine allows for universal power input of 110VAC to 240VAC, 50/60Hz,
15A with 1500W (VA) max.
Ensure power cords do not create a tripping hazard. Route them from
above the unit whenever possible and secure them from moving.
Page 4-16
Air supply
Ensure supply lines do not create a tripping hazard. Route them from
above the unit whenever possible.
Ensure that the airline is tied into the bagger after the pneumatic
emergency stop dump valve.
Do not use the 1/4” (6mm) fitting on backside of regulator (opposite side of
air gauge) for installing accessories. All air line taps shall be done inside
the belly pan.
Page 4-17
Accessories
Autobag 500 and 550 machines must be configured for any accessory or option that is installed or
removed on them.
Signaling tie in
For accessories that utilize signaling to trigger the Autobag 500 and 550 machines, they will need to be
tied into the machine. The machine is equipped with a signaling tie in 15 pin connector (J21EB) located
on the back of the E-BOX (Figure 4-8).
Connecting the select line to GND will bring the bagger_ok output signal
on pin 8.
Page 4-18
FIGURE 4-8. SIGNALING CONNECTOR J21EB
Page 4-19
Rotating the Machine
The machine may be rotated using the machine stand. The machine is limited to a 45 degrees rotation
by a limiting tab on the stand for normal operating conditions. To rotate the machine for normal
operation, use the following steps:
Do not operate the machine beyond the 45-degree limit for rotation.
Do not remove the bolts in the block clamps or loosen excessively. The
machine may suddenly tilt injuring the technician.
The bolts should only be loosened enough to allow the machine to rotate.
1. Loosen the (2) bolts on each block clamp (Refer to Figure 4-9.
2. Rotate the machine to the desired position.
3. Tighten the bolts on each block clamp. Ensure that the bolts are tight and do not allow the machine
to rotate.
Page 4-20
FIGURE 4-9. ROTATING MACHINE
Page 4-21
Maintenance menus
The maintenance level is the next highest mode of operation and is to be used by authorized
maintenance personnel only. The user will have access to the Home, Jobs, Configuration and
Diagnostics menus.
1. Home menu. The user will be able to select or deselect the ACTIONS that have been loaded as well
as change settings for the loaded ACTIONS. They will be able to change the mode of operation from
SINGLE to AUTO. TOTAL COUNT, LOT SIZE and LOT COUNT may be changed at this user level as
well.
2. JOB menu. The user will be able to SAVE JOB, SAVE JOB AS or LOAD jobs. They will also be able
to adjust SETTINGS, OPTIONS and ADVANCED settings for each job.
3. CONFIGURATION menu. The user will be able to access the FIRMWARE, PRODUCTIVITY
METRICS, CYCLE TIMES, SHORTCUT ACTIONS, SCREENSAVER, USERS, MACHINE OPT & ACC,
REAL TIME CLOCK and NETWORK CONFIG menus.
4. DIAGNOSTICS menu. The user will be able to access all the sub-menus in the diagnostics menu.
Page 4-22
Maintenance Job menus
Advanced
Advanced job setting are only available in Maintenance or above user levels.
1. TEAR OFF DISTANCE. Setting in inches or millimeters that controls how far the bag is pulled
through the main nip during the tear off stage.
2. BAG INDEX SPEED. Setting in inches or millimeters that controls the speed of the bags as they
travel though the machine.
Bag index speed is set at 39.37 in/sec (100 cm/sec) from the factory.
Adjusting the bag index speed to a lower setting may be needed to
optimize performance.
Page 4-23
5. MISSED PERFORATION COUNT. Number of perforations that can be missed by the PERF
DETECT WINDOW before the machine stops for a missed perforation error.
6. HOLD OUTPUT DELAY. 0-3600 seconds. Time which passes before the bagger enters the hold
state and turns on the machine hold output.
The Hold Output Delay setting in the Advance Job Settings menu will
override the Hold Output Delay setting in the Configuration menu if it is set
to any other value than zero.
7. PERF DETECT WINDOW. Turns the perf detect window ON or OFF. This feature is used for
perforation overlap and prevents false detection of bag features such as hanger holes.
Item Description
1 Bag perforation
2 Perforation detection upper window
3 Perforation detection lower window
Page 4-24
Maintenance Configuration menus
Firmware
Configuration
This menu allows for CONFIGURATION changes to be made the machine.
Page 4-25
1. IDLE TIMEOUT. This is the amount of time in seconds before the machine will go into idle mode
from non-use.
If the IDLE TIMEOUT is set to zero, the machine will never enter an idle
state.
Ensure that the idle timeout is not set lower than the job load time. This
will cause the machine to go into idle in between machine cycles that will
affect the heat wire temperature and affect proper sealing.
2. HOLD OUTPUT DELAY. 0-3600 sec. Time which passes before the bagger enters the hold state
and turns on the machine hold output.
3. START SWITCH. Enables the start switch to be turned ON or OFF. A checkmark indicates the start
switch is enabled.
Page 4-26
4. SIGNALING. This accessory has a popup menu with the following choices:
a. SIGNALING MODE. When selecting a SIGNALING MODE, the other signaling choices will
default to the correct choices needed to support the selected mode. Options are:
(1). NONE. No signaling is selected or allows for signaling choices to be changed.
(2). AUTOLINK. Autolink™ will define the needed signaling choices required. They will be set to:
(a). SIGNALING INTERFACE to NPN.
(b). SIGNALING LEVEL to ACTIVE LOW.
(c). FEEDER HANDSHAKING to NONE.
(3). AUX LOOP. Aux Loop will define the needed signaling choices required. They will be set to:
(a). SIGNALING INTERFACE to NPN.
(b). SIGNALING LEVEL to ACTIVE LOW.
(c). FEEDER HANDSHAKING to NONE.
(4). USER DEFINED. The operator will define all the signaling choices needed.
b. SIGNALING INTERFACE. Options are:
(1). PNP.
(2). NPN.
Page 4-27
c. SIGNALING LEVEL. Options are:
(1). ACTIVE HIGH.
(2). ACTIVE LOW.
d. FEEDER HANDSHAKING. Options are:
(1). NONE.
(2). STANDARD.
e. SIGNALING OUTPUTS SELECTION. Options are:
(1). BAGGER OK / READ TO LOAD. Toggled ON or OFF.
(2). BAGGER / ERROR. Toggled ON or OFF.
(3). BAGGER HOLD. Toggled ON or OFF.
(4). PRINTER OUTPUT. Toggled ON or OFF.
(5). PROGRAMMABLE OUTOUT 0. Toggled ON or OFF. Allows for the signaling output to be
programmed for specific functions when connecting to external devices.
(6). PROGRAMMABLE OUTPUT 0 FUNCTION. Options are:
(a). Waiting For Label.
(b). Print Complete.
(c). Bag At Seal Position.
(d). Bag Opened.
(e). Seal Complete.
(f). Automode Active.
(g). Bag Rejected.
(h). Barcode Scanner.
(i). Unassigned.
(7). PROGRAMMABLE OUTPUT 1. Toggled ON or OFF. Allows for the signaling output to be
programmed for specific functions when connecting to external devices.
Page 4-28
(8). PROGRAMMABLE OUTPUT 1 FUNCTION. Options are:
(a). Waiting For Label.
(b). Print Complete.
(c). Bag At Seal Position.
(d). Bag Opened.
(e). Seal Complete.
(f). Automode Active.
(g). Bag Rejected.
(h). Barcode Scanner.
(i). Unassigned.
f. SIGNALING INPUTS SELECTION.
(1). FEEDER OK. Toggled ON or OFF.
(2). INHIBIT CYCLE. Toggled ON or OFF.
(3). PRINTER INPUT. Toggled ON or OFF.
(4). PROGRAMMABLE INPUT 0. Toggled ON or OFF. Allows for the signaling input to be
programmed for specific functions when connecting to external devices.
(5). PROGRAMMABLE INPUT 0 FUNCTION. Options are:
(a). Feed Bag.
(b). Cycle Bagger.
(c). Accept Bag.
(d). Reject Bag.
(e). Strip-n-Rip Tear Off.
(f). Shelf Shake.
(g). Hold Bagger.
(h). Unassigned.
(6). PROGRAMMABLE INPUT 1. Toggled ON or OFF. Allows for the signaling input to be
programmed for specific functions when connecting to external devices.
Page 4-29
(7). PROGRAMMABLE INPUT 1 FUNCTION. Options are:
(a). Feed Bag.
(b). Cycle Bagger.
(c). Accept Bag.
(d). Reject Bag.
(e). Strip-n-Rip Tear Off.
(f). Shelf Shake.
(g). Hold Bagger.
(h). Unassigned.
5. AIR PRESSURE MONITORING.
a. AIR PRESSURE MONITORING. Toggled ON or OFF.
b. PRESSURE HIGH ERROR. Toggled ON or OFF.
c. PRESSURE HIGH. Sets the high pressure limit. Maximum setting is 150 psi.
d. PRESSURE LOW ERROR. Toggled ON or OFF.
e. PRESSURE LOW. Sets the low pressure limit. Minimum setting is 1 psi.
Page 4-30
6. PRINTER VERSION CHECK. Turns the printer version check ON or OFF. This checks the codes
between the printer and machine to make sure that they are compatible.
7. CYCLE VALIDATE. Toggled ON or OFF.
If any settings in the configuration have been changed, the Machines Options and Accessories –
Configuration header will turn orange. Configuration changes must be saved or they will be lost on
power cycle. Save changes by selecting SAVE CONFIGURATION before exiting the configuration
menu.
Page 4-31
Options
This menu allows for OPTIONS to be enabled or disabled on the machine.
1. BAG DETECT SENSOR. Not enabled on the Autobag 500, 550, 600 or 650 machine.
2. CLAMP SENSORS. Not enabled on the Autobag 500, 550, 600 or 650 machine.
3. BAG GRIPPER OPENER. Not enabled on the Autobag 500, 550, 600 or 650 machine.
4. PRINTER. Change the printer setting to one of the following:
a. NONE.
b. ONESTEP.
c. PRINT-N-PACK.
5. ADJUST SEAL SENSORS. Not enabled on the Autobag 500, 550, 600 or 650 machines.
Page 4-32
Accessories
This menu allows for accessories to be enabled or disabled for the machine. For a machine to operate
with accessories, they must first be turned ON or OFF in this menu. Once they have been turned ON or
OFF in this menu, they may then be added as SHORTCUTS on the HOME screen and configured
within the shortcut by tapping the shortcut icon or in the JOBS menu under OPTIONS.
Page 4-33
5. PALM SWITCH. This accessory has a popup menu that allows the user to toggle the Palm Switch
ON or OFF and change SWITCH MODE between SINGLE and DUAL.
Page 4-34
Accessory configuration
After the accessory has been installed or removed, it needs to be configured in the machine. To
configure the accessory, use the following steps:
1. Tap the CONFIGURATION icon at the top of the screen.
a. Select MACHINE OPT & ACC.
b. Select ACCESSORIES.
2. For the accessory installed or removed, it needs to be turned ON or OFF.
a. To turn an accessory ON, tap the accessory in the list and a check mark will appear in the box.
Some accessories will open an additional menu when tapped. For these
accessories, they must be turned ON in the additional menu first and may
have some additional configuration options within the menu.
b. To turn an accessory OFF, tap the accessory in the list to remove the check mark in the box.
3. After the needed change is made, select SAVE ACCESSORIES to save the change.
Once the accessory has been configured, it needs to be turned ON in the JOB menu. To turn the
accessory ON in the JOB menu, use the following steps:
4. Tap the JOB icon at the top of the screen.
a. Select OPTIONS.
5. Turn the accessory ON or OFF:
a. To turn an accessory ON, tap the accessory in the list and a check mark will appear in the box.
b. To turn an accessory OFF, tap the accessory in the list to remove the check mark in the box.
6. After the needed change has been made, the bar at the top of the JOB screen will turn orange.
7. Select SAVE JOB to save the change to the current job or select SAVE JOB AS to save it to a new
job.
Page 4-35
A shortcut icon may be added to the home screen for accessories that have been added. To add a
shortcut, use the following steps:
8. Complete accessory configuration.
9. Select the CONFIGURTION icon at the top of the screen.
10. Select SHORTCUT ACTIONS.
a. To turn a shortcut ON, tap the accessory in the list and a check mark will appear in the box.
b. To turn a shortcut OFF, tap the accessory in the list to remove the check mark in the box.
11. After the shortcut has been turned ON or OFF, it will be added or removed from the HOME screen
ACTIONS icon list.
ACTIONS on the home page allow for accessories to be manipulated by the shortcut icon directly on
the home screen.
Page 4-36
Maintenance User diagnostic menus
Heat Wire
The Heat Wire menu (Fig 4-65) allows for monitoring and calibration of the heat wire. 13 heat wire
values may be monitored.
While the machine is at idle, the heat wire will maintain a temperature of
130°F (54.4°C). During cycling operations, the machine will remain at the
set target temperature.
Page 4-37
1. HEAT WIRE STATE. The heat wire has four states:
a. OFF. The heat wire is OFF and is not being heated.
The OFF state will only be seen at initial power up prior to the first
machine cycle or when the machine is in E-STOP.
b. IDLE. The wire is on but is in an idle state. The heat wire will enter the idle state when the
machine enters the set timeout period and maintain the idle temperature of 130°F (54.4°C).
c. ACTIVE. The heat wire is active and is maintaining the job targeted temperature.
d. FAULT. The heat wire has detected a fault. An error message should indicate the fault.
2. HEAT WIRE MODEL. The heat wire has two models available depending on the machine
configuration.
a. REFLEX 12 INCH for standard machines.
b. TRIM 12 INCH for trim optioned machines.
3. CALIBRATED WIRE RESISTANCE. This is the measurement for the wire from its last calibration in
milliohms.
4. CALIBRATED WIRE TEMPERATURE. This is the measured ambient temperature for the wire in °F
from its last calibration.
5. LAST CALIBRATED. Date and time of last calibration.
6. TARGET TEMPERATURE. Current target temperature for the heat wire in degrees. The target
temperature for the heat wire is set in JOB SETTINGS, SEAL TEMPRATURE.
7. ACTUAL TEMPERATURE. Shows the actual current temperature of the heat wire in degrees.
8. MEASURED WIRE CURRENT. Shows the actual heat wire current in amps. This will vary depending
on the actual state of the heat wire.
9. MEASURED WIRE VOLTAGE. Shows the actual DC voltage of the heat wire. This will vary
depending on the actual state of the heat wire.
10. DUTY CYCLE. Shows the duty cycle of the heat wire in percent. Duty cycle is the percentage of ON
time being used to power the wire. It will vary from 2 to 98 percent depending on the state of the wire.
11. TARGET RESISTANCE. This value represents the targeted resistance of the heat wire needed to
achieve the targeted temperature.
Page 4-38
12. MEASURED RESISTENCE. This value represents the actual measured resistance of the heat wire
to achieve the targeted temperature.
13. OUTPUT. This value represents the output of the PID loop and will vary depending on the
MEASURED and TARGER RESISTENCE values.
14. FAULTS. Used to troubleshoot heat wire issues.
15. START CALIBRATION. This starts a heat wire calibration.
Remove any bags and/or obstructions in the sealing area as this will
cause an erroneous calibration.
The thermocouple used in the heat wire calibration is located in the belly
pan of the machine on the heat wire board (HWB).
In certain machine states, the heat wire calibration will not be available.
This is intended to prevent damage to the machine.
Calibration is required when any of the following have been changed: heat
wire, HWB or main control board (MCB).
1. Allow the machine to cool down to room temperature before calibrating the heat wire. If the machine
is calibrated immediately after machine operations, the calibration may be erroneous due to heat soak
from the machine.
Page 4-39
2. Select START CALIBRATION.
Page 4-40
3. If continue was selected in step 2b, a popup window will appear showing HEAT WIRE
CALIBRATION IN PROGRESS PLEASE WAIT. Calibration elapsed time will count up in seconds.
If for any reason the user wishes to stop the heat wire calibration, select
STOP CALIBRATION.
The calibration may take up to ten minutes to complete. The seal bar will
remain closed during the calibration. If more than ten minutes elapses
during the calibration, the calibration shall be stopped as there is a
condition preventing the calibration from completing. Average time to
complete a calibration is between 90-140 seconds.
Page 4-41
4. When the calibration is complete, the seal bar will open and the popup window will notify the user the
calibration is complete.
a. Select the green check mark to exit calibration window.
Printer
The printer menu allows for Inputs and Outputs to be monitored for the printer on 550 machines. There
are also 2 printer maintenance related functions that may be accomplished within this menu. They are:
1. Print Head Adjust. Places the print head in the down position to allow for print head adjustment. Tap
Print Head Adjustment and a check mark will appear next to it. While this field is check, the print head
will remain in the down position. Unchecking the field will return the print head to its normal operating
position.
2. Print Slew. Slews the printer ribbon while selected. Tap Print Slew and a check mark will appear next
to it. While this field is check, the printer will slew the printer ribbon. Unchecking the field will stop the
printer ribbon.
Page 4-42
FIGURE 4-23. PRINTER MENU
Signaling
The signaling menu allows for testing and troubleshooting of the signaling feature. Used in conjunction
with the signaling test box, signals input and outputs can be verified.
1. PNP/NPN SELECT. Allows the user to toggle the machine between PNP and NPN if the Signaling
Mode has been set to User Defined.
Page 4-43
Maintenance
When performing any maintenance on the machine, disassemble the machine only as far as required to
complete the task.
Ensure that all safety guards and covers are reinstalled prior to placing a
machine back into service.
Do not use steel wool to clean aluminum rollers, sealer bar, high voltage
detector arm or any other parts of the machine.
Use the mildest method possible for scheduled maintenance and cleaning.
Unless otherwise stated all screws, bolts and nuts will be tightened hand
tight. Torque requirements will be called out in the maintenance steps if
required
Maintaining a well operating machine requires periodic maintenance to be performed by the end user.
Cleaning, adjusting, replacing and repairing systems on the machine will ensure minimal down time and
longer intervals between work stoppages due to machine errors.
Page 4-44
These maintenance tasks may only be performed by the end users qualified maintenance technician or
by an Automated Packaging Systems service technician. Failure to have a qualified maintenance
technician perform these tasks will be considered misuse of the machine.
Tool Size
Allen Keys, ball end, long 1.5-10mm
Allen Keys, ball end, short 1.5-10mm
“T” handles, long 2-6mm
1/4” drive socket set 5-13mm
Combination wrenches, standard length 7-13mm
Combination wrenches, short length 4-11mm
Adjustable wrench, 10” long 0-46mm
Metric scale (ruler) 152mm length N/A
Snap ring pliers, inside and outside N/A
Tubing Quick Release Tool (P/N2-002743) 4/6mm
Page 4-45
Scheduled Maintenance
Scheduled maintenance requirements for the Autobag 500 and 550 machines are to be performed
periodically to keep the machine operating at optimal conditions.
Daily Maintenance
The Autobag 500 and 550 machines requires daily maintenance to operate at peak performance. This
includes daily maintenance that should be performed at the beginning of each day/shift.
A day generally consists of one 8-12 hour shift. If the machine is operated
for multiple shifts in a single twenty-four hour period, each shift should
perform the daily tasks prior to and at the end of the each shift.
1. Check Teflon™ scroll for dark or burn spots. Rotate Teflon scroll if necessary.
2. Check air supply filters for fluids and drain if necessary.
3. Clean print roller surface using a clean, lint free cloth dampened with 90% Isopropyl Alcohol.
4. Clean print head using a clean, lint free cloth dampened with 90% Isopropyl Alcohol.
5. Check for proper sealing on bags. Adjust as needed.
Different bag materials may create more buildup on the rollers than other
materials. Observe level of buildup by bag material and adjust cleaning
schedule as required.
Weekly Maintenance
The following tasks must be performed weekly (once every 7 days).
1. Clean unwind and nip rollers.
a. Clean aluminum rollers with lint free cloth and 90% Isopropyl rubbing alcohol. If needed, clean
with Scotch Brite™ #7447 or 7448 pads and 90% Isopropyl rubbing alcohol.
Page 4-46
b. Clean rubber rollers with lint free cloth and 90% Isopropyl rubbing alcohol.
Different bag materials will require more frequent cleaning. Observe level
of buildup based on materials used and change cleaning frequency as
required.
2. Wipe down entire machine with clean, dry, lint free cloth.
3. Wipe down HMI interface screen with a damp, clean, lint free cloth.
Do not oil or lubricate guide rod or guide rod bearings. Oil and lubricants
will cause premature failure of the guide rods and/or bearings.
4. Wipe down seal bar guides with clean, lint free cloth.
5. Inspect seal rubber and Teflon tape on seal rubber. Replace if indented, cracked, peeling, cut or
degraded in any way that will affect proper sealing.
Monthly Maintenance
The following tasks must be performed monthly (once every 30 days).
1. Inspect High Voltage Sensor finger and grounding finger. Clean as required.
2. Check airlines for leaks and cracks. Ensure cables and airlines are not rubbing.
3. Check connector cables and wires for cracks, cuts or loose connections.
4. Inspect inlet air filter and coalesce filter. Replacement is recommended every 6 months or as
needed.
5. Remove top center tray and blow clean with compressed air.
6. Remove E-BOX and Printer E-BOX (if installed) cover. Blow E-BOX and fans clean with
compressed air.
Annual Maintenance
The following tasks must be performed yearly (once every 365 days).
Check seal bar bumpers. If replacement is required, replace all bumpers at the same time.
Page 4-47
Teflon Scroll Adjustment
For the Teflon scroll to be adjusted, the machine must be powered on and
out of E-STOP. Care should be taken when adjusting the machine in this
condition.
Do not adjust the machine during cycling operations. The machine should
be static when adjusting.
The Teflon scroll may only be adjusted in one direction. Adjusting the
Teflon in the wrong direction may damage the heater bar assembly or
interfere with machine operation.
Page 4-48
FIGURE 4-25. DIRECTION OF ROTATION FOR ADJUSTMENT
Page 4-49
3. Push both of the white plastic adjustment gears up towards the top of the machine. They will engage
the metal gear attached to the Teflon scroll bar.
Ensure that the white plastic gears are fully and firmly pushed up prior to
rotating. If the plastic gears do not properly engage the metal gears on the
Teflon scroll rod, they may become stripped and unusable.
a. Rotate both gears at the same time towards the back of the machine. Do not rotate the
adjustments gears towards the front of the machine as this will unwind the Teflon scroll.
The Teflon may be adjusted using just one plastic adjustment gear,
however it is recommended that both gears are used together to adjust
the Teflon scroll.
Ensure care is taken when testing the safety circuit. Only place the test
object in the machine sealing area. Keep hands and other objects such as
jewelry and hair clear.
2. With the machine powered ON and ready for cycling, place and hold the test object flat against the
gripper plate in line with the sealing area ensuring that the tool extends past the heater bar opening slot
as shown.
Page 4-50
FIGURE 4-27. FIRM OBJECT IN PLACE FOR TEST
a. The machine should enter an E-STOP condition and electrically dump air to the machine.
Page 4-51
b. The machine should be able to recover from this error by acknowledging the error message and
removing the rigid object from the seal area.
The 4mm firm object should be detectable in any location in the seal area.
5. If the machine does not enter the condition described in step 4, the safety circuit test has failed.
Place the machine in a non-use status.
a. Contact local maintenance personnel for troubleshooting. If local maintenance personnel are not
available, contact Automated Packaging Systems technical support. Refer to Technical Support
section.
Page 4-52
Unscheduled Maintenance
Unscheduled maintenance tasks are performed due to poor machine performance or machine errors.
They may include adjustment, removal, cleaning and installation.
Covers
The Autobag 500 and 550 machines use molded covers for the machine.
1
2
4
5
Page 4-53
Adjustment
No adjustments are required.
Removal
Removal of the Autobag 500 and 550 machine covers uses the same steps for short, long and printer
equipped machines. To remove the covers, use the following steps:
1. Undo (2) captive screws (Item 5) on side cover.
2. Remove side covers (Item 3).
3. Remove handles from nip roller.
4. Undo (1) captive screw (Item 5) from on front cover.
5. Remove front covers (Item 4).
6. Remove (2) screws (Item 1) from top cover.
7. Remove top cover (Item 2).
Cleaning
Wipe down with a clean, lint free cloth.
Installation
1. Install top cover (Item 2). Beveled edge faces the loading area.
2. Install (2) screws (Item 1) into top cover.
3. Install front covers (Item 4).
4. Fasten (1) captive screw (Item 5) into side of front covers.
5. Install side covers (Item 3).
6. Fasten (2) captive screws (Item 5) install side of side covers.
7. Install handles for nip roller.
Page 4-54
Infeed Tray
Adjustment
No adjustment required.
Removal
1. Remove (6) M5 x 0.8 x 6mm screws (Item 2) securing infeed tray (Item 1) to machine frame.
2. Remove infeed tray by lifting up the front and then the rear.
Cleaning
Wipe down with a clean, lint free cloth.
Page 4-55
Installation
To install the infeed tray, use the following steps:
1. Place the infeed tray (Item 1) on the machine frame by lowering the rear in first, then the front.
2. Install the (6) M5 x 0.8 x 6mm screws (Item 2) securing the infeed tray to the machine frame.
Front Guard
The Autobag 500 and 550 machines are equipped with a front guard that protects the loading area.
Page 4-56
Adjustment
No adjustment is required.
Removal
To remove the front guard, use the following steps:
1. Remove (2) M8x1.25x14mm screws (Item 2) in both sides of front guard (Item 4). M8x1.25 T-nut
(Item 3) will remain inside the rail.
2. Loosen (2) M8x1.25x14mm captive screws (Item 1) in front of guard.
3. Remove front guard.
Cleaning
Wipe down with a clean, lint free cloth.
Installation
1. Install front guard (Item 4) onto rail.
2. Install (2) M8x1.25x14mm captive screws (Item 1) into front of guard.
3. Install (2) M8x1.25x14mm screws (Item 2) in both sides of front guard and into M8x1.25 T-nuts (Item
3).
Page 4-57
Trim Collector Chute, Gripper and Face Plates
Autobag 500 and 550 machines that are configured with the trim option will have a trim shield guard
installed.
Page 4-58
500 machines may have a short or long gripper and face plates. 550
machines will only have a long gripper and face plates. Removal is
identical for both.
Adjustment
No adjustment is required.
Removal
To remove the trim collector chute, use the following steps:
1. Remove (2) M8x1.25x18mm screws (Item 2) from inside the trim chute (Item 1). M8x1.25 T-nut (Item
1) will remain inside the rail.
2. Remove trim collector chute from the rail.
Cleaning
Wipe down with a clean, lint free cloth.
Page 4-59
Installation
To install the trim chute, use the following steps:
1. Install trim collector chute (Item 1) onto rail.
2. Install (2) M8x1.25x18mm screws (Item 1) into M8x1.25 T-nut (Item 1).
Page 4-60
Internal Guarding
The Autobag 500 and 550 machines use internal guarding.
Page 4-61
Adjustment
No adjustment is required.
Removal
To remove the internal guarding, use the following steps:
1. Remove required screws (Item 2, 4 or 6) securing the cover.
2. Remove required cover (Item 1, 3, or 5).
Cleaning
Wipe down with a clean, lint free cloth.
Installation
To install the internal guarding, use the following steps:
1. Mount the cover (Item 1, 3, or 5) to the machine.
2. Secure the cover using required screws (Item 2, 4 or 6).
Whenever the Main Control Board (MCB) or the Heat Wire Control Board
(HWCB) is changed, a heat wire calibration needs to be performed. The
Media Access Control (MAC) address of the MCB is stored in the HWCB
and they must be synchronized in order to work correctly. This syncing is
performed at power up and if the MAC addresses in both boards do not
match, a fault will be indicated.
Page 4-62
Heat Wire
The Autobag 500 and 550 machines can be equipped with a reflex or trim heat wire. The maintenance
procedures for both are similar.
Page 4-63
Adjustment
If calibration is needed, refer to Section 4, Operation in the Maintenance Manual for the calibration
procedures. Some items to note prior to performing a heat wire calibration:
1. Calibrations shall be performed at room temperature.
2. The machine shall be at room temperature for calibration.
3. The belly pan should be removed prior to performing a calibration.
4. For reflex wire machines, a good calibrated wire should measure between .55 to .64 ohms in the
heat wire screen after calibration.
If the heat wire calibration fails or values are out of normal ranges, refer to Section 8, Troubleshooting
for additional information.
Removal
To remove the heat wire cartridge, use the following steps:
1. Unthread and remove all the material from the machine.
2. For trim equipped machines, remove the trim collector chute located on the front guard.
3. Remove front guard.
4. Remove seal bar.
5. Remove gripper plate.
6. Disconnect the (2) wire leads on each side of the heat wire cartridge by removing M4x0.7x6mm
screw and lock washer (Item 4) from each lead.
Replace the screws and washers from leads back into the heater bar
cartridge after disconnecting wire leads. The heat wire is spring loaded
and this will prevent the heat wire cartridge from separating into pieces.
7. Pull the heater bar cartridge out from the housing until it stops.
8. Push up from the bottom (2) 4mm x 14mm dowel pins (Item 1) attaching the heater bar cartridge to
actuators (Item 6).
Page 4-64
Cleaning
No cleaning is required.
Installation
To install the heat wire cartridge, use the following steps:
1. Connect (2) wire leads on each side of the heat wire cartridge to the (2) M4x0.7x6mm screw and lock
washer.
The larger gauge power wire connects the M4x0.7x6mm screw and lock
washer closest to the Teflon scroll. The smaller gauge sense wire
connects to the M4x0.7x6mm screw and lock washer farthest from the
Teflon scroll.
2. Set the heater bar cartridge into the heater mounting bar assembly (Item 7).
3. Drop the (2) 4mm x 14mm dowel pin into the heat wire cartridge (Item 2) holes located in the top.
The pins will drop into the holes on the end of the Heater bar cylinder (Item 6) shafts. Pins shall be flush
with the top of the heat wire cartridge.
4. Install gripper plate.
5. Install seal bar.
6. Install front guard.
7. For trim equipped machines, install the trim collector chute located on the front guard.
Teflon Scroll
Adjustment
Refer to Page 5-9 for adjustment procedures.
Removal
To remove the Teflon scroll, use the following steps:
1. Perform heater wire cartridge removal.
Page 4-65
2. Using a small, flat bladed screwdriver (or similar tool) place the tip of the tool into the recess on the
heater bar (Item 1) and gently pry up until the Teflon scroll releases from the clip (Item 2). Repeat for
other side.
3. Release the Teflon scroll from the underside by gently removing the scroll rod from the clips (Item 3).
Cleaning
Cleaning is not required. If the Teflon scroll becomes dirty or burn spots appear, adjust the scroll to a
new position.
Installation
To install the Teflon scroll, use the following steps:
Ensure that the Teflon scroll is properly wound. The feed side of the scroll
goes into the top of the heater bar.
1. Place the feed side (Item 4) of the roll into the clips (Item 1) in the heater bar. Ensure that Teflon
feeds from the bottom side of the scroll as pictured.
2. Pull out enough Teflon to snap the take up rod (Figure 5-15, Item 5) into the bottom side of the
heater bar clips (Item 3). There should not be any slack in the Teflon. Ensure that the Teflon scroll is
taking up as pictured.
3. Perform heater wire cartridge installation.
Page 4-66
Seal Bar
Page 4-67
Adjustment
No adjustment is required.
Ensure that the shaft collars (Item 4) allow for the shaft to rotate freely.
They should not cause the shaft to bind.
Removal
To remove the seal bar, use the following steps:
1. Remove (2) M10x1.5x25mm screws (Item 1) securing sealbar (Item 2) to guide rods (Item 3).
2. Remove sealbar.
Cleaning
Do not oil or lubricate guide rod or guide rod bearings. Oil and lubricants
will cause premature failure of the guide rods and/or bearings.
Installation
To install the sealbar, use the following steps:
1. Place sealbar (Item 2) onto the guide rods (Item 3).
2. Secure sealbar to guide rods using (2) M10x1.5x25mm screws (Item 1).
Page 4-68
Passthrough
The Autobag 500 and 550 machines are equipped with an adjustable passthrough.
Page 4-69
Adjustment
To adjust the passthrough, use the following steps:
1. Remove air from the machine. The passthrough cannot be adjusted while the machine is cycling or
has air in the cylinder.
2. Turn the adjustment knob (Item 1) CW to make the passthrough smaller or CCW to make the
passthrough larger.
Tighten nut (Item 2) so that there is no play in the shaft, but torque to turn
shaft does not exceed 0.75 IN-LBS.
Removal
To remove the passthrough urethane springs, use the following steps:
1. Remove (2) screws (Item 4).
2. Remove (2) urethane bumpers (Item 5).
Cleaning
Wipe down with a clean, lint free cloth.
Installation
To install the passthrough urethane springs, use the following steps:
1. Install (2) urethane bumpers (Item 5).
2. Install (2) screws (Item 4).
Page 4-70
Print Head
Page 4-71
Allow the print head to cool prior any maintenance or cleaning on the print
head.
Adjustment
Print head alignment should be performed when the print head is removed, replaced or poor print label
performance is noted and changing settings in the machine does not improve the quality of the label.
To perform a print head alignment, use the following steps:
1. In the HMI navigate to the DIAGNOSTIC screen.
a. Select DIAGNOSTICS.
b. Select MACHINE TESTS
c. Select PRINT HEAD ADJUST
2. Unlock and raise the printer using the printer handle.
a. Loosen mounting plate thumbscrews (Item 1).
b. Lower the printer and lock the printer handle.
3. Loosen spring-loaded rear horizontal adjusting screws (Item 1) until print head mounting plate no
longer slides rearward.
4. Raise the printer.
a. Install the print head alignment tool (3-002400).
b. Lower and lock the printer.
5. Tighten the horizontal adjusting screws until the print head firmly contacts the alignment tool. Back
the screws off slightly so that the printer can move.
6. Unlock and raise the printer.
a. Remove the alignment tool.
b. Tighten the mounting plate thumbscrews.
c. Lower and lock the printer.
Page 4-72
7. Enter a test label into the printer.
8. Cycle the machine and incrementally tighten the horizontal adjusting screws (approximately ¼ turn)
between test prints until the label prints clearly.
9. Raise the printer.
a. Fully tighten the mounting plate thumbscrews.
b. Lower and lock the printer.
Removal
To remove the print head, use the following steps:
1. Rotate the locking handle on the printer to the up positon.
a. Rotate the printer to the up position.
2. Remove printer ribbon from take up roll.
Printer take up roll is not removable. Do not apply excessive force when
collapsing roller. Pinch hazard exists when collapsing roller.
a. Grasp the take up roller and gently pull away from the printer. The roller will collapse allowing for
the used ribbon to be removed from the roller. Do not attempt to remove the roller from the printer.
3. Disconnect the cables connected to the imprinter head.
a. Remove the power cable by releasing the locking tab on the connector and gently removing the
connector from the print head.
b. Remove the signal cable by removing the 2.5mm hex head screw securing the metal locking
plate for the connector. Gently remove the connector from the print head after the locking plate has
been removed.
Page 4-73
4. Remove the print head mounting screw located at the top front center of the print head with a 2.5mm
hex wrench.
Cleaning
If print quality starts to fade, check the print head for buildup. If cleaning is required, use the following
steps:
1. Rotate the locking handle on the printer to the up positon.
c. Rotate the printer to the up position.
2. Slide the print ribbon clear of the print head.
3. Clean the printing surface of the print head using a non-abrasive, clean, lint free cloth dampened with
90% isopropyl alcohol or an Automated Packaging Systems Printer Cleaning Pen (P/N 26542A1).
4. Rethread the print ribbon according to the printer threading diagram.
5. Lower the printer to the printing position.
a. Rotate the locking handle down to lock the printer into position.
Installation
To install the print head, use the following steps:
1. Install the print head onto the printer ensuring the 2 locating pins are aligned with the print head
holes.
a. Secure the print head to the printer with the 2.5mm hex head screw located at the top front
center of the print head.
2. Connect the 2 cable to the print head.
a. Connect the power cable by gently pushing it onto the print head connector.
b. Connect the signal cable by gently pushing it onto the print head connector. Secure the
connector using the metal locking plate and the 2.5mm hex head screw.
3. Rethread the print ribbon according to the printer threading diagram.
4. Lower the printer to the printing position.
a. Rotate the locking handle down to lock the printer into position.
5. Perform print head adjustment.
Page 4-74
High Voltage Sensor
The High Voltage Sensor is used for detecting bag perforations.
Adjustment
No adjustment is required.
Page 4-75
Removal
To remove the high voltage sensor, use the following steps:
1. Remove the infeed tray.
2. Disconnect the ground wire and 4 pin connector on the high voltage sensor (Item 7).
3. Remove (2) M5 x 0.8 x 20mm screw and lock washers (Item 1 and 2) from sensor mounting bracket.
4. Remove (2) M3 x 0.5 x 20mm screws (Item 3) from block mount (Item 5).
5. Remove (2) M3 x 0.5 x 14mm screws (Item 4) from block mount (Item 5).
6. Remove insulator (Item 6).
7. Remove block mount.
8. Open the nip roller.
9. Gently remove the high voltage sensor by maneuvering the sensor arm out of the nip. Do not force.
Cleaning
If needed, clean the sensor arm with Scotch Brite™ #7447 or 7448 pads and 90% Isopropyl rubbing
alcohol.
Installation
1. Open the nip roller.
2. Insert the high voltage sensor (Item 7) by gently maneuvering it into the nip roller. Do not force.
The sensor arm should line up in the center groove on the nip roller.
3. Place the insulator (Item 6) under the high voltage sensor and hold in place.
4. Place the block mount (Item 5) on the high voltage sensor and hold in place with the insulator.
5. Install (2) M3 x 0.5 x 14mm screws (Item 4) into the block mount.
6. Install (2) M3 x 0.5 x 20mm screws (Item 3) into the block mount.
7. Install (2) M5 x 0.8 x 20mm screw and lock washers (Item 1 and 2) into the sensor mounting bracket.
Page 4-76
8. Connect the ground wire and 4 pin connector on the high voltage sensor (Item 7).
9. Install the infeed tray.
The main motor drive will have a key located on the shaft that is not called
out in the diagram. This is used for locating the pulley on the motor shaft.
Page 4-77
Adjustment
The main motor drive is adjustable for timing belt tension. To adjust the timing belt tension, use the
following steps:
1. Loosen (4) screws (Item 1) on the adjusting motor plate.
2. Turn the adjustment screw (Item 2) CW to loosen to the timing belt, or CCW to tighten the timing belt.
Removal
To remove the Main Motor Drive, use the following steps:
1. Remove belt guard cover.
2. Loosen (4) screws (Item 1) on the adjusting motor plate.
3. Turn the adjustment screw (Item 2) CW to loosen to the timing belt.
a. Remove timing belt.
4. Remove the set screw (Item 4) securing the pulley (Item 5) onto the motor shaft.
5. Remove (4) screws (Item 4) securing the motor (Item 6) to the motor plate.
6. Disconnect (3) cables and ground lug from the motor.
Cleaning
No cleaning is required.
Installation
To install the Main Motor Drive, use the following steps:
1. Mount motor (Item 6) to motor plate and secure using (4) screws (Item 4).
2. Connect (3) cables and ground lug to the motor.
3. Install pulley (Item 5) onto the motor shaft and secure with set screw (Item 4).
4. Install timing belt.
a. Adjust timing belt tension.
5. Install belt guard cover.
Page 4-78
Nip and Print Roller
Page 4-79
Long framed 500 and 550 machines will contain both a print roller and nip
roller. Short frame 500 machines will only contain a nip roller.
Adjustment
No adjustment is required.
Removal
To remove the Main Nip and Print roller, use the following steps:
1. Remove covers.
2. Remove gripper and face plates.
3. Remove internal belt guard cover.
4. Remove (4) screws (Item 12) securing the main air knife assembly (Item 13) down.
a. Remove air blip tube up and away.
5. Remove (4) outside screws (Item 16) securing inner nip (Item 17) guard to frame.
6. Loosen tension motor drive belt for adjustment.
7. Remove set screw (Item 4) in main nip pulley (Item 3).
a. Remove main nip pulley and key (Item 18).
8. Remove timing belt and round belt (Item 9).
9. Remove set screws (Item 5 and 6) in main nip and print roller pulleys (Item 7 and 8).
a. Remove pulleys.
10. Remove (2) screws (Item 15) in each bearing block (Item 10).
a. Remove bearing blocks.
11. Remove nip roller (Item 11) and print roller (Item 14) by carefully sliding out of machine frame.
Page 4-80
Cleaning
If needed clean the nip roller using a clean, lint free cloth and 90% Isopropyl rubbing alcohol.
Installation
1. Ensure the nip is open
2. Install the print roller (Item 14) and main nip roller (Item 11) into the machine frame.
a. Install the left hand bearing block (Item 10) and secure using (2) screws (Item 15).
b. Install the right hand bearing block (Figure 5-18, Item 10) and secure using (2) screws (Item 15).
3. Place key (Item 18) into the slot on the main nip roller shaft.
4. Install the main nip (Item 8) and print roller (Item 7) pulleys onto the main nip and printer rollers
shafts.
a. Install the round belt (Item 9) on the pulleys and check for proper alignment.
b. Tighten (2) set screws (Item 5 and 6) on both pulleys.
Ensure sets screws are on the flat of the main nip and print roller shaft.
5. Install main nip drive pulley (Item 3) on the main nip roller.
a. Install and tension the belt.
b. Tighten set screw on pullet (Item 4)
Page 4-81
7. Install inner nip guard (Item 17) and secure using (4) screws (Item 16)
Make sure finger rake fingers are lined up with the roller.
Make sure stripper plate fingers are lined up with the roller
Page 4-82
Inlet Air and Coalescer Filter
Adjustment
No adjustment required.
Page 4-83
Removal
1. Press the gray spring lock (Item 5) on the bowl downwards.
2. Turn the bowl clockwise ¼ turn. A slight upward pressure on the bowl may be required.
3. Remove the bowl and remove the filter.
Cleaning
Clean using a lint free cloth and 90% Isopropyl rubbing alcohol.
Installation
1. Position new filter in the bowl and attach bowl by turning counter clockwise until the gray spring lock
connects (Item 5).
E-STOP Relay
The Autobag 500 and 550 machines use a single input (SI) safety relay.
• The PWR/Fault LED is green. Safety outputs are activated by a valid reset operation.
• The Output LED is lit. At demand of the safety function or in case of any fault, the safety
outputs are de-energized within the specified response time.
Page 4-84
Reset in Case of Fault
Recoverable fault: Unit can be enabled by removing the fault and cycling all safety inputs.
Non-recoverable faults: Malfunction of the unit itself. Cycling power can reset the unit.
If not, the unit should be replaced before machine operation is allowed.
If the unit is faulted the PWR/Fault LED will be red.
Safety Inputs
One string of safety devices can be monitored per unit. Cross-fault monitoring is automatically enabled
for 2-channel safety inputs in 4-wire connection. Cross faults of the safety inputs are monitored as
recoverable faults. Fault reset is required.
Reset
Automated Packaging Systems utilize a manual monitored (MM) reset mode. The signal from the reset
push button passes through a normally closed contact of the E-STOP contactor. This way it monitors
the contacts of the E-STOP contactor to ensure they are not welded shut. A valid start/reset can only
occur if the Emergency Stop push button circuit is closed. The Start/Reset circuit closes to connect
terminals (A1-S34).
Manual monitored reset – In manual monitored reset mode a signal change of the reset circuit is
required. Unit will function once the configured logic is TRUE and the reset circuit is closed and opened
again between 250 ms and 3 seconds. A reset fault occurs if the safety inputs remain opened while the
reset circuit is closed.
Page 4-85
440R-S12R2 Replacement and Configuration
The following procedure sets the function of the device. The device must be installed in the machine to
complete the procedures.
4. Label the 4 black connectors on the existing relay, eg: 1, 2, 3, 4. (Use these labels for a reference
when inserting connectors to the new safety relay).
5. Remove the top two connectors from the existing relay and attach them to the corresponding position
on the new relay.
6. Remove the bottom two connectors from the existing relay and attach them to the corresponding
position on the new relay.
Page 4-86
7. Attach the new safety relay to the DIN rail.
8. Use a screwdriver to rotate the RESET dial to 0 (zero).
9. Reconnect the power cord.
Page 4-87
440R-S12R2 – Single Input - Testing Worksheet
Page 4-88
Sensors
The machine has several sensors used in the operation of the machine.
The seal bar sensors are a matched set and must be replaced together.
Slot Sensors
The machine uses (5) slot sensors to detect the position of the seal bar during normal operation. These
sensors are interchangeable and do not need to be matched.
Page 4-89
BLANK PAGE
Page 4-90
TECH SUPPORT
Subject Page
Page 5-1
Autobag 500 and 550 Tubing............................................. 5-14
Bag and pouch materials ................................................... 5-15
Page 5-2
Technical Support
This section includes the procedures for requesting technical support and the part lists used to identify
and order replacement parts for the Autobag 500 series machine.
A stock inventory of spares will minimize lost production time due to worn or broken parts.
Need Help? Contact a technical support representative at the local office listed below, your local area
Automate Packaging Systems representative, or an authorized distributor.
For International Support send e-mail to the Technical Assistance Team at
TechAssistance@autobag.com.
Refer to the contact information in the front of the manual for additional
regional office contacts.
Page 5-3
FIGURE 5-1. SERIAL NUMBER TAG
Page 5-4
Spare Parts List
There are three types of spare parts kits for Automated Packaging Machines:
Basic
The minimum amount of spare parts to be kept on hand.
Intermediate
Includes the Basic spare parts kit and the amount of spare parts to be kept on hand for smaller
packaging companies.
Major
Includes Basic and Intermediate spare parts kits and the amount of spare parts to be kept on hand for
machinery requiring maximum production readiness and immediate repairs to reduce downtime.
Page 5-5
Autobag 500 Spare Part Lists
Page 5-6
Autobag 500 Intermediate Parts Kit P/N 3-004253-002
Item Part No. Qty. Description
1 3-004253-003 1 KIT,SPARE PARTS AB500 - BASIC
Page 5-7
Autobag 500 Major Parts Kit P/N 3-004253-001
Item Part No. Qty. Description
1 3-004253-002 1 KIT,SPARE PARTS AB500 -
INTERMEDIATE
Page 5-8
Autobag 550 Spare Part Lists
Page 5-9
Autobag 550 Intermediate Parts Kit P/N 3-004254-002
Item Part No. Qty. Description
1 3-004254-003 1 KIT,SPARE PARTS AB550 - BASIC
Page 5-10
Autobag 550 Major Parts Kit P/N 3-004254-001
Item Part No. Qty. Description
1 3-004254-002 1 KIT,SPARE PARTS AB550 -
INTERMEDIATE
Page 5-11
H-Class Printer Spare Part Lists
Page 5-12
H Class OneStep 406 DPI parts list – P/N 3-004120-406
The 406 DPI spare parts listed has not been released as of the printing of this manual.
Page 5-13
Autobag 500 and 550 Tubing
Part Number OD Color Length
3-004859_1 10mm Black 15.75
3-004859_2 10mm Black 8.00
3-004859_3 10mm Black 2.75
3-004859_4 10mm Black 2.75
3-004859_5 10mm Black 18.00
3-004859_6 10mm Black 10.25
3-004859_7 6mm Black 24.50
3-004859_8 6mm Black 3.50
3-004859_9 6mm Blue 14.00
3-004859_10 6mm Blue 12.00
3-004859_11 6mm Blue 13.25
3-004859_12 6mm Black 24.50
3-004859_13 6mm Black 2.25
3-004859_14 4mm Black 9.75
3-004859_15 4mm Black 16.25
3-004859_16 6mm Blue 23.00
3-004859_17 4mm Blue 12.00
3-004859_18 4mm Blue 15.50
3-004859_19 6mm Black 35.25
3-004859_20 6mm Black 14.00
3-004859_21 6mm Blue 35.25
3-004859_22 6mm Blue 11.00
3-004859_23 6mm Black 35.25
3-004859_24 6mm Black 15.50
3-004859_25 6mm Blue 4.50
3-004859_26 6mm Black 2.25
3-004859_27 6mm Black 2.25
3-004859_28 4mm Black 4.50
3-004859_29 4mm Black 4.50
Page 5-14
Bag and pouch materials
Automated Packaging Systems is the original manufacturer of genuine Autobag pre-opened bags-on-a-
roll. These bags are system matched for optimum performance and offer a variety of value-added
features.
To order Autobag packaging supplies, contact Automated Packaging Systems:
For information on bag and pouch materials, please visit our website at: http://www.autobag.com/bag-
and-pouch-materials/films-by-type
Page 5-15
BLANK PAGE
Page 5-16
THEORY OF OPERATION
Subject Page
Page 6-1
BLANK PAGE
Page 6-2
Major Hardware Sections
The major hardware sections of the Autobag 600 and 650 consist of the following:
• Electrical Boards
• Servo Motors
• Cables
• E-STOP Circuits
Powered Unwind
The powered unwind consists of the following hardware:
• Nip
Printer (optional)
The Printer consists of the following hardware:
• Printer Pivot
Main Nip
The Main Nip consists of the following hardware:
• Feed buttons
Page 6-3
Pneumatics
The Pneumatics consists of the following hardware:
• Valve Manifold
• Seal Bar
• Heater Bar
• Load Shelf
• Air Guide
Seal Area
Sealing Area consists of the following hardware:
• Sealer Bar
• Heater Bar
• Air Blip
• Air Pulse
• Air Blower
Load Shelf
Load shelf consists of the following hardware:
• Vertical Shelf
HMI
The HMI consists of the following hardware:
• Control Screen
• Adjustable Arm
Page 6-4
E-STOP System
When the machine is in E-STOP, the following happens:
Anti-Jam Safety
The Anti‐Jam safety circuit looks at a variety of sensors and signals to determine thru logic gates and
flip flops if the system is in a safe state or not. The logic then drives an output stage to power up two
intercept valves.
Boards Overview:
• Main Control Board (MCB)
MCB
The Main Control Board (MCB) for the machine is the main brain of the machine. The MCB controls the
motion system for the machine. It collects and distributes Ethernet signals for the machine. The SRAM
battery is located on the MCB.
EBCB
This board is the heart of the Autobag electrical system. This board takes every signal to/from the Main
Control Board and redistributes them and/or manipulates the signal.
Page 6-5
UFCB
Takes bulk connections of I/O (J1‐J3) and power (J4) and distributes those to additional
connectors/devices located in the ‘upper frame’ section of the machine. The safety E-STOP is a large
part of this board.
HWCB
The machine has a Heat Wire Control Board (HWCB) that controls the heat of the wire by suppling
constant current thru the heat wire
CBB
This board looks for voltage spikes generated by the motors on the power rail. If a spike is detected, it
is diverted and suppressed thru power resistors.
Page 6-6
TROUBLESHOOTING
Subject Page
Page 7-1
BLANK PAGE
Page 7-2
General Troubleshooting
A good maintenance policy includes checking the operation of the machine against known
specifications. When operating difficulties occur, observe what is happening, search out the cause, and
make an adjustment. Make only one adjustment at a time and then check for a result. If an adjustment
does not help or increases the difficulty encountered, adjust it back to the previous position and then
move on to the next step.
Power is always live to line filters, contactors and power switch. Unplug
and perform LOTO procedures when servicing or troubleshooting.
Page 8-3
Power Supplies
The Autobag 500 and 550 has three power supplies used to power the machine and are in the Main E-
BOX:
Page 7-4
Main Fuse Location and Replacement
The main fuse locations for the machine are mounted on the DIN rail assembly in the E-BOX. The DIN
rail also contains other components used in the electrical system.
Page 8-5
The Autobag 500 and 550 machines require different fusing depending on
the input power. Refer to Table 7-2 for correct fusing based on the power
kit selected.
Page 7-6
Fuse replacement must be accomplished by a qualified maintenance
technician.
The fuses are ATDR type arc flash rated and must be replaced with the
correct fuse. The fuse holders are designed to accept only ATDR type arc
flash rated fuses and will not work with incorrect fuses.
Part Compatibility
The Autobag 500 and 550 machines use software, firmware and hardware that must be compatible with
each other in order to function correctly. When troubleshooting or ordering parts ensure that parts
ordered are the correct versions. These parts may include, but are not limited to:
• Webserver Board
• HMI software
• Machine Firmware
In addition to correct compatibility, some parts may need to be programmed when ordered as spare
parts.
Page 8-7
E-STOP Safety Switches and Reporting
Circuit
The Autobag 500 and 550 machine uses a reporting circuit and switched for the E-STOP circuit. The E-
STOP HMI page shows the state of the switches in the circuit.
Green shows the contact closed. Red shows the contact open. Any switch that is open will cause the
machine to enter an E-STOP condition.
The reporting contact must be in the circuit for it to show for it to show that the reporting contact was
made. If a jumper on the upper frame connector board is missing or the contacts are broken for the
reporting contact, it will show as green (closed) in the HMI screen instead of open (red).
Page 7-8
Valve Pack
Valve pack stations assignments are listed in Figure 7-4. Blanks will be installed for machines that do
not require the needed valves for an option.
A tool is required to open the drawer containing the valve pack.
Page 8-9
FIGURE 7-4. VALVE PACK
Page 7-10
E-BOX Connections
The E-BOX connections are shown in Figure 7-5.
Page 8-11
Heat Wire Board (HWB)
The HWB controls the heat wire for proper sealing. There are (2) heat wires available for the Autobag
500 and 550 machines, Reflex for standard machines and Trim for trim model machines. Below is a
table showing values for each heat wire.
MODEL
REFLEX TRIM
Wire
resistance
0.050 (Ω/inch) 0.027 (Ω/inch)
/ inch
(default)
Wire
12 inch 12 inch
length
Heat state Current Current
Current Current
Temperature Channel Temperature Channel
Level Level
Number Number
OFF N/A N/A ≤ 0.005 A N/A N/A ≤ 0.005 A
IDLE 130 °F 3 6.59 A 130 °F 5 10.68 A
RUN 180 °F to 180 °F to
3 6.59 A 5 10.68 A
234 °F 204 °F
235 °F to 205 °F to
6 12.7 A 10 20.91 A
374 °F 384 °F
375 °F to 375 °F to
7 14.75 A 12 25.01 A
450 °F 450 °F
The HWB has a specific MAC address that is stored in the machine software during calibration. The
MCB and HWB boards MAC addresses must match; otherwise a heat wire error will occur. When either
the HWB or the MCB is changed, a heat wire calibration must be performed.
Page 7-12
Heater Bar and Heat Wire
The heater bar requires calibration whenever any of the follow criteria are met:
• HWB is changed.
A reflex wire should measure between .55 to .64 ohms for Calibrated Wire
Resistance in the Heat Wire screen.
Page 8-13
Dancer
The dancer menu in the HMI is explained below for aiding troubleshooting.
Name Indication
APS Hall Sensor Count A number representation of the position of the Hall
Sensors for Homing Unwind
Dancer Encoder Count Number representation of the Encoder position in relation
to the Homed position. Hall Sensors are only used during
Homing of the Unwind, after the homing is complete the
Unwind is controlled by using the Encoder count and the
calculated Dancer Angle.
Dancer Angle in degrees A calculated number that is used to control the start, stop,
speed, bag out and up positions for the Unwind.
Homed Status Green is indication that the Unwind was Homed
Tensioning Position Goes green when homed and has bags in place. Will go
Status red if the machine is in e-stop.
The dancer menu will show the counts and angle of the dancer in real time. Below are some expected
values to expect during machine operation.
Page 7-14
FIGURE 7-7. MACHINE WAS JUST HOMED BUT HAS NOT MOVED
THE FESTOON TO TENSION THE BAG WEB
Page 8-15
Upper Frame Connector Board (UFCB)
The upper frame connector board connections are explained below for aiding in troubleshooting.
Fuse
Connector Description Fuse Description
Value
J1 D SUB TO MAIN CONTROL F1 .75A 33Volt Guard Switch
BOX Input signals 123
J2 D SUB TO MAIN CONTROL F2 .75A 33Volt Start Stop
BOX Output signals Button
J3 D SUB TO MAIN CONTROL F3 .75A 33Volt Guard Switch 4
BOX Slot Sensors and I/O
J4 +12 and +24 VDC Power F4 OPEN
supply
J5 HMI Reset Button, Start F5 .75A Light Curtain
Stop, HMI Report Contacts E 33Volts
stop, E Stop button String A
and B
J6 +24 VDC Ground and Earth F6 OPEN
J7 Guard Switch 1-2-3 Strings F7 .75A 33 Light Curtain 2
A and B E-stop Volts
J8 Heat Board Signaling and E- F8 .20A 30Volt Heat E-stop
stop Strings A and B string
J9 Rear E-stop Left reporting E- F9 .20A 30Volt E-stop buttons
stop Strings A and B, Dancer
Thread
J10 Rear E-stop Right reporting F10 .20A 30Volt Spare E-stop
E-stop Strings A and B, Heat board
Dancer Thread signals
J11 External E-stop Strings A F11 OPEN
and B
J12 Guard Switch 4 Strings A F12 .20A 30Volt Count Eye
and B E-stop
J13 Light Curtain Muting LED F13 .20A 30Volt SureFill
J14 Light Curtain #2 F14 .20A 30Volt Bag Detect
Sensor Back
J15 Curtain Fans 1-4 F15 .20A 30Volt Bag Detect
Sensor Front
J16 Light Pole F16 .20A 30Volt Air Pressure
Sensor
J17 Count Eye and Cycle Eye F17 .20A 30Volt SureFill Emitter
J18 Air Pressure Sensor F18 .20A 30Volt Count/Cycle
Emitter
Page 7-16
TABLE 7-7. UPPER FRAME CONNECTOR BOARD
Page 8-17
Connector Description Fuse Fuse Value Description
Page 7-18
Main Control Board (MCB)
The main control board connections are explained below for aiding in troubleshooting.
Connecto Descriptio
Supplies LED Color Status Description
r n
J1 Ethernet +1.2 Vdc DS Blue On when Reset
block of 4 500mA 1 button is Button LED
Supply for pressed
FPGA
J2 Ethernet +2.5 Vdc DS Red / Various Heartbeat
block of 2 500mA for 2 Green (Refer to LED
FPGA Heartbeat
Codes)
J3 Ethernet + 3.3Vdc DS Green On unless +3.3 Vdc
block of 4 for always 3 fuse blown Supply
on LDO Regulator
J4 SD Card +1.5 Vdc DS Green On unless +5 Vdc
Port 220mA for 4 fuse blown Supply
DDR Regulator
J5 Boot +3.3Vdc DS Yellow On unless +24 Vdc
Jumpers 200ma For 5 fuse blown Supply FH1
for SD Battery
Booting
J6 DataMax +3.3Vdc 1 DS Yellow Off unless Valve Pack
and A for 6 fuse blown FH2
Pressure VYBRID
Sensor and
Analog
Input
Interface
J7 JTAG +24Vdc DS7 Yellow Off unless Safety
Main fuse blown String FH3
Supply
J8 3.7Vdc +12 Vdc DS Yellow Off unless PMW
lithium 8 fuse blown Supply FH4
Battery
J9 Batter off +5 Vdc DS Yellow Off unless Motor 1
or on 9 fuse blown Main Nip
Battery on Servo
= 2 and 3
J10 VYBRID +3.3 Vdc DS Yellow Off unless Motor 2
COM 0 10 fuse blown Dancer
Spare RS TCU Servo
232
J11 VYBRID DS Yellow Off unless Motor 3
COM 2 11 fuse blown Unwind Nip
DEBUG Servo
RS 232
Page 8-19
J12 Sensors, DS Yellow Off unless Motor 4
Signaling 12 fuse blown Seal Bar
and Spare Servo
Inputs
Page 7-20
Connector Description Supplies LED Color Status Description
J13 High Voltage
interface and
spare
outputs
J14 External pins
for External
Software
Test Probing
J15 +24 Vdc IN
from power
supply
J16 VYBRID
COM 3
DataMax
RS232
Interface
J17 PMD
DEBUG RS
232 Interface
J18 Valve Station
1 -5
J19 FPGA JTAG
Programming
Port
J20 Signaling,
Light Pole,
Heat Bd,
Light Curtain
muting and
spare
outputs
J21 External
UART COM
A and B
J22 External
UART COM
A and B
J23 Valve Station
6-12
J24 E-stop
strings HMI,
Heat Bd,
Guards and
reporting
Page 8-21
Connecto Descriptio Descriptio
Supplies LED Color Status
r n n
J25 PMD Atlas
Motor
Power
from
Crowbar
Bd
J26 Main Nip
Encoder
feedback
J27 Unwinder
Dancer
Encoder
Feedback
J28 Unwinder
Nip
Encoder
Feedback
J29 Seal Bar
Encoder
Feedback
J30 PMD
Position
Limit I/O
J31 Servo
Motor Main
NIP
J32 Servo
Motor
Unwind
Dancer
850S
J33 Servo
Motor
Unwind
NIP
J34 Servo
Motor Seal
Bar 850S
J35 Light
Curtain
fans, Print
Head
solenoid
J36 E stop
string A
and B In
and out
Page 7-22
Heartbeat Codes
The MCB contains a heartbeat LED indicator on the board. This LED indicator will indicate status of the
machine using a red and green LED indicator.
Blink Codes
The heartbeat LED will indicate blink codes for machine errors. If the heartbeat LED is indicating a blink
code, use Table 7-9 for fault codes and Table 7-10 for failure codes to determine the likely fault.
Fault codes and failure codes overlap for blink codes. Confirm with
diagnostics log in the HMI if you have a fault or failure in the event of an
overlapping code.
Page 8-23
Blink Code Fault Code
24 FaultDancerDriveOvercurrent
25 FaultDancerDriveOperatingModeMismatch
26 FaultDancerDriveOvervoltage
27 FaultDancerDriveUndervoltage
28 FaultDancerDriveFoldback
29 FaultDancerDriveOverTemperature
30 FaultDancerDriveSPIChecksum
32 FaultUnwinderDriveOvercurrent
33 FaultUnwinderDriveOperatingModeMismatch
34 FaultUnwinderDriveOvervoltage
35 FaultUnwinderDriveUndervoltage
36 FaultUnwinderDriveFoldback
37 FaultUnwinderDriveOverTemperature
38 FaultUnwinderDriveSPIChecksum
40 FaultSealbarDriveOvercurrent
41 FaultSealbarDriveOperatingModeMismatch
42 FaultSealbarDriveOvervoltage
43 FaultSealbarDriveUndervoltage
44 FaultSealbarDriveFoldback
45 FaultSealbarDriveOverTemperature
46 FaultSealbarDriveSPIChecksum
48 FaultHeat
52 FaultHeatWire
Page 7-24
Blink Code Failure Code
3 FailureControlFPGAVersionInvalid
5 FailureControlHighVoltage
6 FailureControlSealbarSensors
7 FailureControlSafetyRelay
16 FailureMainNipDriveBoot
17 FailureMainNipDriveSoftwareVersionInvalid
18 FailureMainNipHallSensor
24 FailureDancerDriveBoot
25 FailureDancerDriveSoftwareVersionInvalid
26 FailureDancerHallSensor
32 FailureUnwinderDriveBoot
33 FailureUnwinderDriveSoftwareVersionInvalid
34 FailureUnwinderHallSensor
40 FailureSealbarDriveBoot
41 FailureSealbarDriveSoftwareVersionInvalid
42 FailureSealbarHallSensor
48 FailureHeatBoot
49 FailureHeatSoftwareVersionInvalid
50 FailureHeatCommunications
53 FailureHeatWireBoot
54 FailureHeatWireSoftwareVersionInvalid
55 FailureHeatWireCommunications
58 FailurePrinterBoot
59 FailurePrinterSoftwareVersionInvalid
61 FailurePMDBoot
62 FailurePMDSoftwareVersionInvalid
Page 8-25
E-BOX Connector Board (EBCB)
The E-BOX connector board connections are explained below for aiding in troubleshooting.
Page 7-26
Fuse Fuse Test
Connector Description Description
Number Value Point
J15 To MCB Spare F15 .20A 30 Spares out
I/O EBCB Volt
J16 Spare I/O and F16 .05A 60 Signaling TP64
Anti-jam EBCB Volt Spare 2 Input
J17 Take Away F17 .05A 60 Feeder OK TP60
Conveyor Start EBCB Volt cycle Bagger
J18 Valve Pack 1-5 F18 .05A 60 Inhibit Cycle TP57
stations +24 EBCB Volt
Vdc and Palm
and foot switch
In
J19 Dancer F19 .05A 60 Printer Busy TP52
Position EBCB Volt Fused
Feedback
J20 Output Signals F20 .05A 60 Signaling TP79
from MCB pass EBCB Volt Spare 2 Fused
thru
J21 Signaling and F21 .05A 60 Feeder OK TP80
Spare in EBCB Volt Cycle Bagger
Fused
J22 Shorting F22 .05A 60 Printer Busy
Jumper EBCB Volt
connector
J23 Valve Station F23 0.05A Inhibit Cycle TP83
6-12 and EBCB 60Volt Input
common
J24 E Stop Status F24 .05A 60 Inputs Output TP88
Reporting EBCB Volt Pull up or down
J25 Not used F25 .05A 60 Outputs, TP91
EBCB Volt Output pull up
or down
J26 F26 .05A 60 Inputs Input TP 95
EBCB Volt pull up or down
J27 F27 .05A 60 Bagger Stop TP96
EBCB Volt Error Fused
J28 F28 .05A 60 Bagger Hold TP93
EBCB Volt Fused
J29 F29 .05A 60 Signaling TP131
EBCB Volt Spare 1
Page 8-27
Fuse Fuse Test
Connector Description Description
Number Value Point
J30 F30 .05A 60 Bagger OK TP121
EBCB Volt Ready to load
Fused
J31 F31 .05A 60 Signaling Spare TP118
EBCB Volt Output 1 fused
J32 F32 .20A Conveyor Start NC
EBCB 30V Stop Out
J33 F33 .05A Signaling Spare TP136
EBCB 1 Input fused
J34 BF1 2A
58Volt
J35 Curtain Fans,
Print Head
Solenoid and
spare PWM
J36 E Stop String A F36 .20A 30
-B in and A-B EBCB Volt
out
F37 .20A
EBCB 30Volt
F38 TP13
EBCB
LED Seal Bar F39
out Pressure EBCB
LED Anti Jam F40 .20A 30 NC
Safety Logic EBCB Volt
Output
Power On Red F41 .20A 30 NC
EBCB Volt
Fuse Red F42 .05A 60 Foot and Palm TPTP96
EBCB Volt Switch In
F43 .05A 60 Input Output TP160
EBCB Volt Pull up or down
F44 .05A 60 Input, Input Pull TP176
EBCB Volt up or down
Page 7-28
Heat Wire Board (HWB)
The heat wire board connections are explained below for aiding in troubleshooting.
Crowbar Board
Regulates voltage for Servo Power Supply from the high regenerative voltage created in the Servo
motors during deceleration and braking
Page 8-29
HMI Control Board (HMICB)
The HMI control board connections are explained below for aiding in troubleshooting.
Page 7-30
Anti-Jam Safety System
The Anti‐Jam safety circuit looks at a variety of sensors and signals to determine thru logic gates and
flip flops if the system is in a safe state or not. The logic then drives an output stage to power up two
intercept valves.
These intercept valves control air to the Seal Bar In and the Heat Bar Out. The following devices are
integral to the circuit:
1. Anti-Jam Receiver. Detects the beam from the Anti-Jam Emitter. If the emitter signal is not detected,
the receiver will trip the Anti-Jam circuit. The receiver has a gray cabling and a red LED that will be
illuminated when it is operation.
2. Anti-Jam Emitter. Emits the beam for the Anti-Jam system. The beam is bounced off 2 reflecting
mirrors on the seal bar and is detected by the receiver. The emitter has black cabling.
3. Seal Bar Out Sensor #1. Detects when the seal bar is fully out. The LED light on the sensor will be
illuminated when the sensor is OFF and dark when the sensor is ON.
4. Seal Bar Out Sensor #2. Mutes the anti-jam sensors for the bounce when the seal bar reaches the
end of its travel. The LED light on the sensor will be illuminated when the sensor is OFF and dark when
the sensor is ON.
5. Anti-Jam Mute Sensor #1. Detects when the seal bar enters the safe zone near the gripper plate, just
before the seal cycle starts. The LED light on the sensor will be illuminated when the sensor is OFF and
dark when the sensor is ON.
6. Anti-Jam Mute Sensor #2. Detects when the seal bar enters the safe zone near the gripper plate, just
before the seal cycle starts. The LED light on the sensor will be illuminated when the sensor is OFF and
dark when the sensor is ON. Allows for the Anti-Jam safety logic to be muted during the retract of the
seal bar.
Page 8-31
7. Seal Bar In Sensor. Detects when the seal bar is all the way in and the seal cycle can begin. The
LED light on the sensor will be illuminated when the sensor is OFF and dark when the sensor is ON.
When the seal bar is retracting away from the gripper plate, this acts as a start to the mute for the
retract of the seal bar.
a. The mute clears when any of the following happen:
(1). Seal Bar Out Sensor 1 is actuated.
(2). Seal Bar Out Sensor 2 is actuated.
(3). Valve Station 1A (seal bar in signal) is activated.
(4). Machine goes into E-STOP.
(5). It receives a clear signal from the software.
8. Intercept Valves. The intercept valves must be active to allow the sealbar to cycle. If they are tripped
or faulted, they interrupt the Seal Bar In Valve pneumatic/air lines to Valve Station 1A.
b. 1V2 Seal Bar on top.
c. 2V2 Heater Bar on bottom.
9. Seal Bar Out Pressure Sensor. Pressure sensor must read 50 Psi for the seal bar to close properly.
10. Fixed Flow Control Valve. Restricts flow to the seal bar cylinder. 1.4mm iris for normal operation
and 1.0mm iris for slow operation.
The Anti-Jam signals can be monitored and troubleshot using the Sealbar menu in the HMI
Diagnostics. To troubleshoot individual sensors, place the machine in E-STOP or dump air and move
the seal bar manually to engage/disengage each sensor.
Page 7-32
Sealbar Sealbar Heatbar Heatbar
Diagnostic Name Indication
Open Closed Engage Disengage
Main Air Pressure Actual Reading in
N/A N/A N/A N/A
psi
Sealbar Out Green ON,
Green Red Red Red
Red OFF
Sealbar Out Mute Green ON,
Green Red Red Red
Red OFF
Sealbar In Green ON,
Red Green Green Green
Red OFF
Jam Green ON.
Green Red Red Red
Red OFF
Jam Mute 1 Green ON.
Red Green Green Green
Red OFF
Jam Mute2 Green ON.
Red Green Green Green
Red OFF
Jam Reset Output Green ON.
Green Green Green Green
Red OFF
Jam Detect Input * Green ON.
Red Red Red Red
Red OFF
Sealbar close Green ON.
Red Green Green Green
Output Red OFF
Sealbar Open Green ON.
Green Red Red Red
Output Red OFF
Sealbar Home Green ON.
Red Red Red Red
Output Red OFF
Heaterbar Output Green ON.
Red Red Green Red
Red OFF
Page 8-33
2
1
8
10
4 9
6
7
Page 7-34
Possible Operational Faults
Listed in table 7-17 are some possible operational faults a user may encounter and suggested items to
check to resolve the problem.
Page 8-35
Symptom Possible Problem Possible Solution
Machine won’t come out of Dump valve inoperative Replace dump valve
E-STOP, LOW AIR Connection to UFCB Repair connection
PRESSURE #151 popup broken/disconnected
error
HEAT WIRE BOOT Network connection to Repair connection
FAILURE #320 popup error, HWCB broken/disconnected
Machine won’t come out of
E-STOP
Seal bar goes in and stays FU10031 Replace fuse
in, HEAT SYSTEM FAULT
#233 popup error
MOTOR 1 & 3 MOTOR FU10101 Replace fuse
VOLTAGE FAULT #200
and #202 popup error
HMI screen blank with HMI connection 34301 on Repair connection
machine powered on UFCB broken/disconnected
Power switch inside HMI Turn power switch on
turned off
Machine won’t come out of Jumper on J7 of UFCB Replace jumper
E-STOP, No error popups, broken/disconnected
E-STOP screen shows Main E-STOP switch broken Replace switch
error on main E-STOP
switch
Funnel not operating No air, pressure regulators Adjust air pressure
set at 0
Valve in valve pack not Replace valve
operating
Seal Flattener not operating No air, pressure regulators Adjust air pressure
set at 0
Valve in valve pack not Replace valve
operating
Machine fails safety circuit Sensors and/or flags not Inspect sensor and flags for
test functioning correctly proper operation, Repair or
replace as needed
Seal rubber deformed or Replace seal rubber
deteriorated
Funnel jam error Funnel physically obstructed Remove obstruction
Sensor misaligned or not Align sensor
functioning Verify sensor connection to
UFCB
Check HMI setting for funnel
Page 7-36
Symptom Possible Problem Possible Solution
Gateway timeout on HMI Bad or corrupted SD card on Verify SD card and files
MCB
FAB Disconnecting Bad or corrupted SD card on Check blink code on
message on HMI MCB heartbeat LED
Bad or corrupted SD card Verify SD card and files for
Webserver MCB and Webserver board
Webserver board
Printer E-BOX repeatedly Shorted wiring on DATA side Check cabling for shorts to
reboots ground on DATA side
Ensure metal retaining clip
on black connecter on the
printer has not shorted wiring
440R-S12R2 relay Relay is not programmed or Program relay
PWR/Fault LED blinking red lost programming Replace relay
Solid amber LED on Machine configuration lost or Check machine is configured
heartbeat light. Seal bar defaulted correctly
does not go in, load shelf
cycles one direction only
when machine is cycled, no
errors on HMI
Printer E-BOX
The printer E-BOX power switch should always remain on . Control of the printer E-BOX should be
controlled by the main E-BOX power switch only. If the printer E-BOX is turned on after the main E-
BOX, the machine will not communication with the printer correctly and will require a power cycle.
Page 8-37
BLANK PAGE
Page 7-38
MECHANICAL DRAWINGS
Subject Page
Page 8-1
Assy, Long Frame CE Trim 12” 3-005601-004 Rev D ........ 8-26
Assy, Sealer with Shutter 3-003150 Rev M.1..................... 8-27
Assy, Heater W/ Scroll CE 12” Reflex
3-005600-001 Rev B ......................................................... 8-28
Assy, Heater W/ Scroll CE 12” Trim
3-005600-002 Rev B ......................................................... 8-29
Assy, Elec Routing Kit CE, AB-500 3-005593 Rev D ......... 8-30
ASSY, PNEUMATIC ROUTING KIT, F12V
3-003138 Rev K ................................................................ 8-31
Assy, EBOX Main Control, AB500 3-005591 Rev B........... 8-32
Assy, DIN Rail AB Series EBOX 3-004845 Rev C ............. 8-33
Assy, Hotwire Thermal, Mounting 3-003306 Rev E............ 8-34
Assy, HMI Display 3-006612 Rev B ................................... 8-35
Assy, HMI Arm 3-003470 Rev D ........................................ 8-36
Assy, Powered Unwind 12” 3-001800 Rev N
Sheet 1 of 2 ....................................................................... 8-37
Assy, Powered Unwind 12” 3-001800 Rev N
Sheet 2 of 2 ....................................................................... 8-38
Assy, Latch Printer Pivot, Ext 3-003018 Rev C .................. 8-39
Assy, Printer AB H-Class, CE 3-004010 Rev J
Sheet 1 of 2 ....................................................................... 8-40
Assy, Printer AB H-Class, CE 3-004010 Rev F
Sheet 2 of 2 ....................................................................... 8-41
Assy, EBOX Printer Top Mount 3-002746 Rev G............... 8-42
Kit, DPI AB H-Class Printer 3-002400 Rev D
Sheet 1 of 3 ....................................................................... 8-43
Kit, DPI AB H-Class Printer 3-002400 Rev D
Sheet 2 of 3 ....................................................................... 8-44
Kit, DPI AB H-Class Printer 3-002400 Rev D
Sheet 3 of 3 ....................................................................... 8-45
Kit, Tie-In for PI-412C to AB500 3-006626 Rev A.1 ........... 8-46
Kit, Tie-In for PI-412CW to AB500 3-006627 Rev A ........... 8-47
Kit, Tie-in Autolabel 500 to AB500 3-004396 Rev C .......... 8-48
Assy, Transition Roller, AB500 3-003185 Rev B ................ 8-49
Assy, Load Shelf 12” W 3-002873 Rev C .......................... 8-50
Assy, Shelf Articulating Load 12’ W 3-003168 Rev E......... 8-51
Kit, Simple Count SM-AB500 3-003573-001 Rev B ........... 8-52
Kit, Simple Count LG-AB500 3-003573-002 Rev B ............ 8-53
Assy, Unwind, Tower, Bag-In-Box, AB500
Page 8-2
3-003640 Rev D ................................................................. 8-54
Kit, Weight STD Powered Unwind 3-003717 Rev B ........... 8-55
Kit, Weight Cross Bar Additional AB500
3-003734-001 Rev C ..........................................................8-56
Assy, HMI Arm Z-Riser 3-005142 Rev A ............................8-57
Assy, Front Guard Safety Switch 3-005118 Rev A ............. 8-58
Assy. Rotary Seal Flattener 3-003219 Rev E .....................8-59
Assy, Seal Flattener, Finger Style 3-003466 Rev B ............ 8-60
Assy, Seal Flattener, Paddle Style 3-003611 Rev B .......... 8-61
Assy, Funnel SQ Acum CE Metric – .75”
3-005297 Rev C .................................................................8-62
Assy, Funnel SQ Acum CE Metric – 1.00”
3-005297 Rev C .................................................................8-63
Assy, Funnel SQ Acum CE Metric – 1.50”
3-005297 Rev C .................................................................8-64
Assy, Funnel SQ Acum CE Metric – 2.00”
3-005297 Rev C .................................................................8-65
Assy, Funnel SQ Acum CE Metric – 2.50”
3-005297 Rev C .................................................................8-66
Assy, Funnel SQ Acum CE Metric – 3.00”
3-005297 Rev C .................................................................8-67
Assy, Funnel SQ Acum CE Metric – 3.50”
3-005297 Rev C .................................................................8-68
Assy, Funnel SQ Acum CE Metric – 4.00”
3-005297 Rev C .................................................................8-69
Assy, Funnel 3 Round Basic – 595942A30 Rev B.............. 8-70
Assy, Funnel Round 3 CE – 595941B30 Rev C ................. 8-71
Assy, Funnel Round 3.5 CE – 595941B35 Rev B .............. 8-72
Assy, Cable E-STOP 8 pin to flying leads 10’
3-005588 Rev A .................................................................8-73
Assy, Sure-Fill 3-003742 Rev B .........................................8-74
Page 8-3
BLANK PAGE
Page 8-4
ITEM QTY PART NUMBER DESCRIPTION
1 3 27488A4 DECAL, BURN HAZARD-HOT SURFACE 3/4 IN.
2 1 3-005028 DECAL, UNWIND, SAFETY RELEASE
3 1 3-004324-001 DECAL, MANIFOLD, AB500 SERIES, DOMESTIC
4 1 3-004321-002 DECAL, THREADING DIAGRAM, AB500 SERIES, OPP.
5 1 3-004321-001 DECAL, THREADING DIAGRAM, AB500 SERIES
6 2 3-004306 DECAL, AUTOBAG 500
7 1 3-004080-002 DECAL, NIP TENSIONER CONTROL, OPP.
8 1 3-004080-001 DECAL, NIP TENSIONER CONTROL
9 2 3-004079 DECAL, NIP FEED
10 1 3-004077 DECAL, AIR PULSE
9
11 1 3-004076 DECAL, AIR GUIDE 1
12 1 3-004075 DECAL, AIR BLOWER
9
13 1 2-002647-003 DECAL, DECAL, DO NOT REACH INTO, 1.5" DIA. 1
14 1 2-002489-002 DECAL, HAND CRUSH/FORCE FROM RIGHT
15 4 2-002482-002 DECAL, DO NO OPERATE W/GUARDS REMOVED, 1.5" DIA.
16 2 2-002482-001 DECAL, DO NO OPERATE W/GUARDS REMOVED, 3/4" DIA.
17 1 2-002478-002 DECAL, GENERAL DANGER 1.30"
3
OPEN TRAY TO APPLY DECAL
1
DETAIL A
SCALE 3/4
15
BEHIND MAIN COVER 1
1
1
A
16 APPLY TO EXTRUSION
1 UNDER LEXAN GUARD
5
1
16 APPLY TO EXTRUSION
1 UNDER LEXAN GUARD
2
1 DETAIL B
SCALE 1/2
15
BEHIND MAIN COVER 1
SEE DETAIL A
7 11 10 12
8 1 1 1 1
1
6
1 6
17 1
1
15
2 4
BEHIND MAIN COVER 1
NEARSIDE AND FARSIDE
APPLY NAMEPLATE
DECAL IN SHOWN
LOCATION
SEE DETAIL B
Under Review
TOLERANCE INCHES mm
1 PLACE DIMS # .1 # 2,5
2 PLACE DIMS # .02 # 0,51 10175 PHILIPP PARKWAY - STREETSBORO, OH 44241
3 PLACE DIMS # .005 # 0,10
ANGULAR # 1/2 $
DRAWING SIZE SCALE DRAWN BY BOM REFERENCE NUMBER
E
NOTICE: THIS DOCUMENT CONTAINS PROPRIETARY INFORMATION NAME: DMF
AND IT SHALL NOT BE USED OR REPRODUCED OR ITS CONTENT
DISCLOSED, IN WHOLE OR PART, WITHOUT THE PRIOR WRITTEN 7/32 DATE: 04-13-16
CONSENT OF AUTOMATED PACKAGING SYSTEMS INC.
KIT, DECAL,
DRAWING NO. SHEET 1 OF 1 REV
3-004313 K
THIRD ANGLE
to be RoHS Compliant INCH [MM] PROJECTION AB 500, CE
ITEM QTY PART NUMBER DESCRIPTION
1 1 595163A1 DECAL, APS DOMED
2 3 27488A4 DECAL, BURN HAZARD-HOT SURFACE 3/4 IN.
3 1 3-005028 DECAL, UNWIND, SAFETY RELEASE
4 1 3-004324-001 DECAL, MANIFOLD, AB500 SERIES, DOMESTIC
5 1 3-004321-002 DECAL, THREADING DIAGRAM, AB500 SERIES, OPP.
6 1 3-004321-001 DECAL, THREADING DIAGRAM, AB500 SERIES
7 2 3-004307 DECAL, AUTOBAG 550
8 1 3-004080-002 DECAL, NIP TENSIONER CONTROL, OPP.
9 1 3-004080-001 DECAL, NIP TENSIONER CONTROL 14
1
10 2 3-004079 DECAL, NIP FEED 10
11 1 3-004077 DECAL, AIR PULSE 1
12 1 3-004076 DECAL, AIR GUIDE
13 1 3-004075 DECAL, AIR BLOWER
14 1 3-003269 DECAL, PRINTHEAD, THREADING DIAGRAM 10
1
15 1 2-002647-003 DECAL, DECAL, DO NOT REACH INTO, 1.5" DIA.
16 1 2-002489-002 DECAL, HAND CRUSH/FORCE FROM RIGHT
17 4 2-002482-002 DECAL, DO NO OPERATE W/GUARDS REMOVED, 1.5" DIA.
18 2 2-002482-001 DECAL, DO NO OPERATE W/GUARDS REMOVED, 3/4" DIA.
19 1 2-002478-002 DECAL, GENERAL DANGER 1.30"
4
OPEN TRAY TO APPLY DECAL
DETAIL A 1
SCALE 3/4
17
BEHIND MAIN COVER 1
18 APPLY TO EXTRUSION
1 UNDER LEXAN GUARD
2
1
6
1
18 APPLY TO EXTRUSION
1 UNDER LEXAN GUARD
17 DETAIL B
BEHIND MAIN COVER SCALE 1/2
1
SEE DETAIL A
7 9 1 8 12 11 13 19 7
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
APPLY NAMEPLATE
DECAL IN SHOWN
LOCATION
SEE DETAIL B
2 2 PRINTER AND MAIN E-BOX NOT SHOWN FOR CLARITY E GHM 7-28-17 1165 ADDED AB-500-OP, -FR,-GR, -ES, -NL
APPLY TO GRIPPER PLATE APPLY TO GRIPPER PLATE
1 1 D GHM 6-12-17 1095
ADDED AB-500-MM & AB-500-OP
ADDED REV TO TABLE
ADDED 2-002647-003, 3-005028, 2-002482-001;
C DMF 831
15 11-15-16 CHANGED QTY- 27488A4 (3) WAS (2)
Under Review
TOLERANCE INCHES mm
1 PLACE DIMS # .1 # 2,5
2 PLACE DIMS # .02 # 0,51 10175 PHILIPP PARKWAY - STREETSBORO, OH 44241
3 PLACE DIMS # .005 # 0,10
ANGULAR # 1/2 $
DRAWING SIZE SCALE DRAWN BY BOM REFERENCE NUMBER
E
NOTICE: THIS DOCUMENT CONTAINS PROPRIETARY INFORMATION NAME: DMF
AND IT SHALL NOT BE USED OR REPRODUCED OR ITS CONTENT
DISCLOSED, IN WHOLE OR PART, WITHOUT THE PRIOR WRITTEN 7/32 DATE: 04-13-16
CONSENT OF AUTOMATED PACKAGING SYSTEMS INC.
KIT, DECAL,
DRAWING NO. SHEET 1 OF 1 REV
3-004332 J
THIRD ANGLE
to be RoHS Compliant INCH [MM] PROJECTION AB 550, CE
ITEM QTY PART NO. DESCRIPTION
1 1 3-005016 ASSY, STAND, UPRIGHT, AB500
2 1 3-002912 ASSY, FRL, AB500 SERIES
3 2 3-002886 BLOCK, UNWIND MOUNT
4 1 3-002859 BASE, FRAME, STAND
5 2 3-002703-1 BLOCK, E-BOX MOUNT ADAPTER
6 2 1-32165A NUT, JAM, M10X1.5, STEEL, ZINC PLATED
J
7 2 1-14465A-020M SCREW, SET, FLAT POINT, SOCKET HEAD, M10X1.5 X 20MM, ZINC PLATED
8 4 1-11165F-035M SCREW, CAP, SOCKET HEAD, M10X1.5 X 35MM LG, SS
9 4 1-11163F-030M SCREW, CAP, SOCKET HEAD, M8X1.25 X 30MM LG, SS
10 4 1-11159F-016M SCREW, CAP, SOCKET HEAD, M5X0.8 X 16MM LG, SS
1
1
2
1
3 9
2 4
8
1
FASTENER TORQUE REQUIREMENTS
TIGHTEN ALL FASTENERS PER TABLE UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED.
MINIMUM TORQUE SHALL BE 85% OF LISTED MAXIMUM TORQUE.
G GHM 1069
8 1 5-24-17 ADDED 1-32165A & 1-14465A-020M
TOLERANCE INCHES mm
1 PLACE DIMS # .1 # 2,5
Vaulted
2 PLACE DIMS # .02 # 0,51 10175 PHILIPP PARKWAY - STREETSBORO, OH 44241
3 PLACE DIMS # .005 # 0,10
ANGULAR # 1/2 $
DRAWING SIZE SCALE DRAWN BY BOM REFERENCE NUMBER
D
NOTICE: THIS DOCUMENT CONTAINS PROPRIETARY INFORMATION NAME: DMF
AND IT SHALL NOT BE USED OR REPRODUCED OR ITS CONTENT
DISCLOSED, IN WHOLE OR PART, WITHOUT THE PRIOR WRITTEN 1/2 DATE: 5-15-15
CONSENT OF AUTOMATED PACKAGING SYSTEMS INC.
ASSY, STAND,
DRAWING NO. SHEET 1 OF 2 REV
3-003095 J
THIRD ANGLE
to be RoHS Compliant INCH [MM] PROJECTION MANUAL ADJUST AB500
ITEM QTY PART NO. DESCRIPTION
1 1 3-005016 ASSY, STAND, UPRIGHT, AB500
2 1 3-002912 ASSY, FRL, AB500 SERIES
3 2 3-002886 BLOCK, UNWIND MOUNT
4 1 3-002859 BASE, FRAME, STAND
5 2 3-002703-1 BLOCK, E-BOX MOUNT ADAPTER
6 2 1-32165A NUT, JAM, M10X1.5, STEEL, ZINC PLATED
J 7 2 1-14465A-020M SCREW, SET, FLAT POINT, SOCKET HEAD, M10X1.5 X 20MM, ZINC PLATED
8 4 1-11165F-035M SCREW, CAP, SOCKET HEAD, M10X1.5 X 35MM LG, SS
9 4 1-11163F-030M SCREW, CAP, SOCKET HEAD, M8X1.25 X 30MM LG, SS
10 4 1-11159F-016M SCREW, CAP, SOCKET HEAD, M5X0.8 X 16MM LG, SS
1
1
9 3
4 2
2
1
TOLERANCE INCHES mm
1 PLACE DIMS # .1 # 2,5
Vaulted
2 PLACE DIMS # .02 # 0,51 10175 PHILIPP PARKWAY - STREETSBORO, OH 44241
3 PLACE DIMS # .005 # 0,10
ANGULAR # 1/2 $
DRAWING SIZE SCALE DRAWN BY BOM REFERENCE NUMBER
D
NOTICE: THIS DOCUMENT CONTAINS PROPRIETARY INFORMATION NAME: DMF
AND IT SHALL NOT BE USED OR REPRODUCED OR ITS CONTENT
1/2
ASSEMBLY FOR LEFT-HAND MACHINE DISCLOSED, IN WHOLE OR PART, WITHOUT THE PRIOR WRITTEN
CONSENT OF AUTOMATED PACKAGING SYSTEMS INC.
DATE: 5-15-15
ASSY, STAND,
DRAWING NO. SHEET 2 OF 2 REV
3-003095 J
THIRD ANGLE
to be RoHS Compliant INCH [MM] PROJECTION MANUAL ADJUST AB500
ITEM QTY PART NO. DESCRIPTION
14 C 1 6 27473A1 STRAP, TIE MOUNTING
C
4
3 2 1 3-003638 STANCHION, INNER, RAISED UNWIND
C 1 3 1 3-002992 PLATE, MOUNTING, RAISED UNWIND
8
9 4 4 1 3-002988 STANCHION, INNER, RAISED UNWIND
C 4 5 2 3-002986 STANCHION, OUTER, RAISED UNWIND
6 2 2-002126 PIN, COTTER, 3MM DIA WIRE, SS
C 7 2 2-002125 PIN, CLEVIS, 10MM DIA X 70MM LG
C 8 4 1-33163F NUT, HEX, NYLON LOCK, M8X1.25, SS
C C 9 4 1-21163F WASHER, FLAT, M8, SS
10
4 10 4 1-12163F-030M SCREW, CAP, HEX HEAD, M8X1.25 X 30MM LG, SS
C 11 6 1-11457F-006M SCREW, BUTTON HEAD, SOCKET, M4X0.7 X 6MM LG, SS
C 12 8 1-11163F-020M SCREW, CAP, SOCKET HEAD, M8X1.25 X 20MM LG, SS
13 4 1-11163F-012M SCREW, CAP, SOCKET HEAD, M8X1.25 X 12MM LG, SS
14 4 1-11161F-020M SCREW, CAP, SOCKET HEAD, M6X1.0 X 20MM LG, SS
5
2
C 11 1
6 6
13
4
7
2
6
2
4 12
1 4
REPLACED 1-11161F-012M WITH -020M, ADDED
C GHM 5-19-17 1069 1-33163F, 1-21163F, 1-12163F-030M,
27473A1 & 1-11457F-006
REPLACED 1-12163F-012M WITH
B DMF 10-1-15 226 1-11163F-012M
TOLERANCE INCHES mm
1 PLACE DIMS # .1 # 2,5
2 12
Vaulted
1 4 ANGULAR # 1/2 $
DRAWING SIZE SCALE DRAWN BY BOM REFERENCE NUMBER
C
NOTICE: THIS DOCUMENT CONTAINS PROPRIETARY INFORMATION NAME: DMF
AND IT SHALL NOT BE USED OR REPRODUCED OR ITS CONTENT
DISCLOSED, IN WHOLE OR PART, WITHOUT THE PRIOR WRITTEN 1/4 DATE: 6-5-15
CONSENT OF AUTOMATED PACKAGING SYSTEMS INC.
3-002996 C
THIRD ANGLE
to be RoHS Compliant INCH [MM] PROJECTION RAISED UNWIND
ITEM QTY PART NO. DESCRIPTION
1 1 3-004591 ARM, FRL MOUNT
2 1 3-002592 ASSY, AIR PREPARATION
3 1 2-002260 FITTING, ELBOW, SWIVEL, 10MM TUBE, R1/4
4 1 2-001031 SILENCER, RESIN, G1/8
5 1 2-001013 VALVE, ELEC EXHAUST, 24V, G1/4
6 2 1-21159F WASHER, FLAT, M5, SS
G 7 2 1-11161F-020M SCREW, CAP, SOCKET HEAD, M6X1.0 X 20MM LG, SS
G 8 8 2 1-11159F-020M SCREW, CAP, SOCKET HEAD, M5X0.8 X 20MM LG, SS
2
7
2 6
2 G
8 7
1 2
6 2
1
2
1
1
5
1
5
3
1
1
3
1
2
1 2
1
4
1
4
1
A DMF 5-22-15
M2 X 0.4 2.5
PROTOTYPE
ASTM A 1047/A 1047M. PRESSURE DECAY SHALL NOT M4 X 0.7 21.0 UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED
PART MUST BE FREE OF BURRS AND SHARP EDGES
C
NOTICE: THIS DOCUMENT CONTAINS PROPRIETARY INFORMATION
M8 X 1.25 175.0
NAME: DMF
AND IT SHALL NOT BE USED OR REPRODUCED OR ITS CONTENT
DISCLOSED, IN WHOLE OR PART, WITHOUT THE PRIOR WRITTEN 5/8 DATE: 5-19-15
CONSENT OF AUTOMATED PACKAGING SYSTEMS INC.
3-002912 G
THIRD ANGLE
to be RoHS Compliant M12 X 1.75 604.1
INCH [MM] PROJECTION AB500 SERIES
ITEM QTY PART NO. DESCRIPTION
1 1 29638A1 MOUNT, CABLE TIE
2 1 3-004054-001 REGULATOR, FIXED, 6MM INLINE, 30 PSI
19 3 1 3-002585 BRACKET, MOUNTING, PRESSURE REG
6
4 1 3-002565 BRACKET, RETENTION, PNEUMATICS, F22V
14 5 2 3-002564 BRACKET, SUPPORT, PNEUMATICS, F22V
6 6 1 3-002562 PLATE, SLIDING, PNEUMATICS, F22V
7 1 3-002498 ASSY, VALVE MANIFOLD, 12 STATION
8 1 2-002195 TUBE FITTING, STR, PLUG-IN, 6mm-4mm
7
1 9 1 2-002010 PLUG, BLANKING, 6mm TUBE
10 1 2-001375 KNOB, KNURLED GRIP YELLOW 25MM X 22.5MM LG X M4
11 2 2-001021 REGULATOR, W/ GAUGE, 6MM INLINE
18
6 12 6 1-23155F WASHER, LOCK, INTERNAL TOOTH, M3, SS
13 4 1-21255F WASHER, FLAT, FENDER, M3, SS
14 6 1-21155F WASHER, FLAT, M3, SS
11
2 15 6 1-11161F-010M SCREW, CAP, SOCKET HEAD, M6X1.0 X 10MM LG, SS
16 1 1-11157F-010M SCREW, CAP, SOCKET HEAD, M4X0.7 X 10MM LG, SS
17 1 1-11157F-005M SCREW, CAP, SOCKET HEAD, M4X0.7 X 5MM LG, SS
18 6 1-11155F-030M SCREW, CAP, SOCKET HEAD, M3X0.5 X 30MM LG, SS
19 6 1-11155F-010M SCREW, CAP, SOCKET HEAD, M3X0.5 X 10MM LG, SS
12 20 4 1-11155F-006M SCREW, CAP, SOCKET HEAD, M3X0.5 X 6MM LG, SS
6
2
1
9
1
8
10 1
1
17
15 1
4
1
5 1
2
3
1
4
13 1
A MDS 01-27-16 387 NEW DRAWING
4
MACHINE SURFACES TO BE NO GREATER THAN 125 [3,2]
UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED
PART MUST BE FREE OF BURRS AND SHARP EDGES
TOLERANCE INCHES mm
6
1 PLACE DIMS # .1 # 2,5
Vaulted
1 ANGULAR # 1/2 $
DRAWING SIZE SCALE DRAWN BY BOM REFERENCE NUMBER
C
NOTICE: THIS DOCUMENT CONTAINS PROPRIETARY INFORMATION NAME: MDS
AND IT SHALL NOT BE USED OR REPRODUCED OR ITS CONTENT
DISCLOSED, IN WHOLE OR PART, WITHOUT THE PRIOR WRITTEN 3/4 DATE: 01-27-16
CONSENT OF AUTOMATED PACKAGING SYSTEMS INC.
3-004052 A
THIRD ANGLE
to be RoHS Compliant INCH [MM] PROJECTION VALVE MANIFOLD
ITEM QTY PART NO. DESCRIPTION
1 1 3-006257 ASSY, COVER, 12" BAGGER SIDE LARGE, LH, IM
2 1 3-006255 ASSY, COVER, 12" BAGGER SIDE LARGE, RH, IM
3 1 3-006240 ASSY, COVER, 12" BAGGER SIDE SMALL, LONG, RH, IM
4 1 3-006239 ASSY, COVER, 12" BAGGER SIDE SMALL, LONG, LH, IM
10 5 APPLY LOW STRENGTH 5 1 3-005008 COVER, 12" BAGGER, CENTER
2 1 LOCTITETO SET SCREW
6 1 3-004711 COVER, AB500 LONG REAR
BEFORE INSTALLATION
10 7 IN STANDOFF. 7 1 3-004593 BRACKET, COVER, 12" BAGGER, CENTER
2 1 6X LOCATIONS 8 6 3-004587-001 STANDOFF, ROUND, 0.5" OD, AL, M5x0.8, 2.18" LONG
8 9 9 6 1-14159F-025M SCREW, SET, CUP POINT, SOCKET HEAD, M5X0.8 X 25MM, SS
1 1 10 4 1-11659F-012M SCREW, FLAT HEAD, SOCKET, M5X0.8 X 12MM LG, SS
11 4 1-11457F-006M SCREW, BUTTON HEAD, SOCKET, M4X0.7 X 6MM LG, SS
9 8
1 1 1
9 8 1
1 1
8 9
1 1
8 9
1 1 8 9
1 1
2
1
4
1
11 6
4 1
3-003104-001
3 ADDED 1-11659F-012M (8)
ADDED 3-004711 (1), REMOVED
D LDC 08-12-16 707
1 3-004232 (2)
REPLACED 3-003025 WITH 3-004581, 3-003024
WITH 3-004580, 3-003039 WITH 3-004501,
LONG BAGGER C MDS 7-15-16 618 3-002394 WITH 3-004587-XXX; ADDED 3-004577,
3-004576, 3-004593
TOLERANCE INCHES mm
1 PLACE DIMS # .1 # 2,5
Vaulted
C
NOTICE: THIS DOCUMENT CONTAINS PROPRIETARY INFORMATION
-
NAME: B.STINARD
AND IT SHALL NOT BE USED OR REPRODUCED OR ITS CONTENT
DISCLOSED, IN WHOLE OR PART, WITHOUT THE PRIOR WRITTEN 3/8 DATE: 7-2-15
CONSENT OF AUTOMATED PACKAGING SYSTEMS INC.
3-003104 F
THIRD ANGLE
to be RoHS Compliant INCH [MM] PROJECTION AB500
ITEM QTY PART NO. DESCRIPTION
1 1 3-006257 ASSY, COVER, 12" BAGGER SIDE LARGE, LH, VF
2 1 3-006255 ASSY, COVER, 12" BAGGER SIDE LARGE, RH, VF
3 1 3-006252 ASSY, COVER, 12" BAGGER SIDE SMALL, SHORT, RH, VF
4 1 3-006241 ASSY, COVER, 12" BAGGER SIDE SMALL, SHORT, LH, VF
APPLY LOW STRENGTH
10 5 LOCTITETO SET SCREW 5 1 3-005008 COVER, 12" BAGGER, CENTER
2 1 BEFORE INSTALLATION 6 1 3-004712 COVER, AB500 SHORT REAR
IN STANDOFF. 7 1 3-004593 BRACKET, COVER, 12" BAGGER, CENTER
6X LOCATIONS
8 6 3-004587-001 STANDOFF, ROUND, 0.5" OD, AL, M5x0.8, 2.18" LONG
10 7 8 9 9 6 1-14159F-025M SCREW, SET, CUP POINT, SOCKET HEAD, M5X0.8 X 25MM, SS
2 1 1 1
10 4 1-11659F-012M SCREW, FLAT HEAD, SOCKET, M5X0.8 X 12MM LG, SS
11 4 1-11457F-006M SCREW, BUTTON HEAD, SOCKET, M4X0.7 X 6MM LG, SS
1
1
9 8
1 1
9 8
1 1
8 9
1 1
8 9
1 1 2
8 9
1
1 1
4
1
11 6
4 1
3-003104-002
WITH 3-004580, 3-003039 WITH 3-004501,
C MDS 7-15-16 618 3-002394 WITH 3-004587-XXX; ADDED 3-004577,
3-004576, 3-004593
TOLERANCE INCHES mm
1 PLACE DIMS # .1 # 2,5
Vaulted
C
NOTICE: THIS DOCUMENT CONTAINS PROPRIETARY INFORMATION
-
NAME: B.STINARD
AND IT SHALL NOT BE USED OR REPRODUCED OR ITS CONTENT
DISCLOSED, IN WHOLE OR PART, WITHOUT THE PRIOR WRITTEN 3/8 DATE: 7-2-15
CONSENT OF AUTOMATED PACKAGING SYSTEMS INC.
3-003104 F
THIRD ANGLE
to be RoHS Compliant INCH [MM] PROJECTION AB500
ITEM QTY PART NO. DESCRIPTION
4 7 1 3 3-004298 STANDOFF, MOUNTING, BELT GUARD
1 4
2 1 3-004292 GUARD, BELT, AB500
3 2 3-004278 COVER, INTERNAL, SIDE, TIE BAR, AB500
4 1 3-003385 COVER, SEAL BAR, AB500
5 4 2-002232 STANDOFF, M/F, 8MM HEX, 52mm LG, M5X0.8 THREAD, ZINC PLATED BRASS
6 3 1-14157F-020M SCREW, SET, CUP POINT, SOCKET HEAD, M4X0.7 X 20MM, SS
7 4 1-11459F-010M SCREW, BUTTON HEAD, SOCKET, M5X0.8 X 10MM LG, SS
8 8 1-11457F-010M SCREW, BUTTON HEAD, SOCKET, M4X0.7 X 10MM LG, SS
9 3 1-11457F-006M SCREW, BUTTON HEAD, SOCKET, M4X0.7 X 6MM LG, SS
5
4
3
2
8
8
TOLERANCE INCHES mm
1 PLACE DIMS # .1 # 2,5
Vaulted
2 PLACE DIMS # .02 # 0,51 10175 PHILIPP PARKWAY - STREETSBORO, OH 44241
3 PLACE DIMS # .005 # 0,10
ANGULAR # 1/2 $
D
NOTICE: THIS DOCUMENT CONTAINS PROPRIETARY INFORMATION NAME: MDS
ASSY, INTERNAL
DRAWING NO. SHEET 1 OF 1 REV
3-004217 A
THIRD ANGLE
to be RoHS Compliant INCH [MM] PROJECTION GUARDS, AB500
ITEM QTY PART NO. DESCRIPTION
1 6 3-004426 SCREW, BHC M5 X 12mm LG, SS, MODIFIED
2 1 3-003656 PLATE, PNEUMATIC, PORTS, AB500
3 1 3-003655 PLATE, BOTTOM, FRONT, BELLY PAN, AB500
MOUNTS TO MAIN BASE PLATE 9 4 1 3-003654 PLATE, FRONT, BELLY PAN, AB500
4
5 1 3-003653 PLATE, TRAY-SIDE, BELLY PAN, AB500
12
8 6 1 3-003652 PLATE, SIDE, BELLY PAN, AB500
7 1 3-003651 PLATE, BOTTOM, BELLY PAN, AB500
8 1 3-003650 PLATE, REAR, BELLY PAN, AB500
9 4 3-002572 BLOCK, SUPPORT, LOWER COVER
C 10 6 1-61507F RING, RETAINING, E-CLIP, 4MM DIA. NOM, DIN 6799, SS
5
1 11 22 1-11459F-008M SCREW, BUTTON HEAD, SOCKET, M5X0.8 X 8MM LG, SS
12 8 1-11159F-020M SCREW, CAP, SOCKET HEAD, M5X0.8 X 20MM LG, SS
8
1
FASTENER TORQUE REQUIREMENTS
TIGHTEN ALL FASTENERS PER TABLE UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED.
MINIMUM TORQUE SHALL BE 85% OF LISTED MAXIMUM TORQUE.
MOUNTS TO RESERVOIR
CLAMP BLOCKS
6
1
11
22
7
TOWARDS FRONT 1
OF MACHINE 10
6
1 C
6
4
1
3
1
Vaulted
2 PLACE DIMS # .02 # 0,51 10175 PHILIPP PARKWAY - STREETSBORO, OH 44241
3 PLACE DIMS # .005 # 0,10
ANGULAR # 1/2 $
DRAWING SIZE SCALE DRAWN BY BOM REFERENCE NUMBER
D
NOTICE: THIS DOCUMENT CONTAINS PROPRIETARY INFORMATION NAME: DMF
AND IT SHALL NOT BE USED OR REPRODUCED OR ITS CONTENT
DISCLOSED, IN WHOLE OR PART, WITHOUT THE PRIOR WRITTEN 1/2 DATE: 09-15-15
CONSENT OF AUTOMATED PACKAGING SYSTEMS INC.
3-003649 C
THIRD ANGLE
to be RoHS Compliant INCH [MM] PROJECTION AB500
ITEM QTY PART NO. DESCRIPTION
1 6 3-004426 SCREW, BHC M5 X 12mm LG, SS, MODIFIED
2 1 3-003656 PLATE, PNEUMATIC, PORTS, AB500
3 1 3-003655 PLATE, BOTTOM, FRONT, BELLY PAN, AB500
4 1 3-003654 PLATE, FRONT, BELLY PAN, AB500
5 1 3-003653 PLATE, TRAY-SIDE, BELLY PAN, AB500
6 1 3-003652 PLATE, SIDE, BELLY PAN, AB500
7 1 3-003651 PLATE, BOTTOM, BELLY PAN, AB500
9 8 1 3-003650 PLATE, REAR, BELLY PAN, AB500
4
9 4 3-002572 BLOCK, SUPPORT, LOWER COVER
12 C 10 6 1-61507F RING, RETAINING, E-CLIP, 4MM DIA. NOM, DIN 6799, SS
MOUNTS TO MAIN BASE PLATE
8 11 22 1-11459F-008M SCREW, BUTTON HEAD, SOCKET, M5X0.8 X 8MM LG, SS
12 8 1-11159F-020M SCREW, CAP, SOCKET HEAD, M5X0.8 X 20MM LG, SS
6
1 8 FASTENER TORQUE REQUIREMENTS
1 TIGHTEN ALL FASTENERS PER TABLE UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED.
MINIMUM TORQUE SHALL BE 85% OF LISTED MAXIMUM TORQUE.
MOUNTS TO RESERVOIR
CLAMP BLOCKS
5
1
11
22
7
1
10
6
TOWARDS FRONT 1 C
OF MACHINE 6
4
1
3
1
C DMF 1-11-17 897 ADDED SHEET 2 WITH LH CONFIGURATION
ASSEMBLY FOR LEFT-HAND MACHINE PART MUST BE FREE OF BURRS AND SHARP EDGES
TOLERANCE INCHES mm
1 PLACE DIMS # .1 # 2,5
Vaulted
2 PLACE DIMS # .02 # 0,51 10175 PHILIPP PARKWAY - STREETSBORO, OH 44241
3 PLACE DIMS # .005 # 0,10
ANGULAR # 1/2 $
DRAWING SIZE SCALE DRAWN BY BOM REFERENCE NUMBER
D
NOTICE: THIS DOCUMENT CONTAINS PROPRIETARY INFORMATION NAME: DMF
AND IT SHALL NOT BE USED OR REPRODUCED OR ITS CONTENT
DISCLOSED, IN WHOLE OR PART, WITHOUT THE PRIOR WRITTEN 1/2 DATE: 09-15-15
CONSENT OF AUTOMATED PACKAGING SYSTEMS INC.
3-003649 C
THIRD ANGLE
to be RoHS Compliant INCH [MM] PROJECTION AB500
ITEM QTY PART NO. DESCRIPTION
1 1 3-002609 PLATE, BASE, MAIN FRAME
2 2 3-002603 PLATE, SPINE NARROW BAGGER
3 2 3-002602 ASSY, GUIDE, SEALER ROD
C 4 2 1-15112F-012M SCREW, SHOULDER, 12MM DIA X 12MM LG, SS, ISO 7379
3
2
4 C
1
1 7
1 8 C GHM 8-16-17 1186
REPLACED (2) 1-11165F-030M WITH
1-15112F-012M
ADDED LOCTITE NOTE, TORQUE NOTE,
B LDC 11-09-16 821 ADDED 1-11165F-030M (4)
1 A ZR 4-1-15 42 PROTOTYPE
TOLERANCE INCHES mm
1 PLACE DIMS # .1 # 2,5
Vaulted
C
NOTICE: THIS DOCUMENT CONTAINS PROPRIETARY INFORMATION NAME: DMF
AND IT SHALL NOT BE USED OR REPRODUCED OR ITS CONTENT
DISCLOSED, IN WHOLE OR PART, WITHOUT THE PRIOR WRITTEN 1/2 DATE: 4-1-15
CONSENT OF AUTOMATED PACKAGING SYSTEMS INC.
3-002667 C
THIRD ANGLE
to be RoHS Compliant INCH [MM] PROJECTION BASE, AB500
ITEM QTY PART NO. DESCRIPTION
1 1 3-004223 ASSY, MOTOR, SERVO NEMA23 W/ENCODER & 5:1 GEARBOX
2 1 3-002725 PULLEY, MAIN NIP F12 DRIVE MOTOR END
3 1 3-002711 PLATE, MOUNTING MAIN NIP MOTOR
4 1 3-001963 BLOCK, MOUNTING NIP BELT TENSION SCREW
5 4 1-22161F WASHER, SPLIT LOCK, M6, SS
6 1 1-14157F-006M SCREW, SET, CUP POINT, SOCKET HEAD, M4X0.7 X 6MM, SS
C 7 4 1-11459F-016M SCREW, BUTTON HEAD, SOCKET, M5X0.8 X 16MM LG, SS
8 1 1-11161F-030M SCREW, CAP, SOCKET HEAD, M6X1.0 X 30MM LG, SS
9 6 1-11161F-018M SCREW, CAP, SOCKET HEAD, M6X1.0 X 18MM LG, SS
1
1
8
1
4 9
1 2
6
1
9 5 3
4 4 1
7 2
C 4 1
TOLERANCE INCHES mm
SCALE 1/4 1 PLACE DIMS # .1 # 2,5
Vaulted
C
NOTICE: THIS DOCUMENT CONTAINS PROPRIETARY INFORMATION
---
NAME: LDC
AND IT SHALL NOT BE USED OR REPRODUCED OR ITS CONTENT
DISCLOSED, IN WHOLE OR PART, WITHOUT THE PRIOR WRITTEN 3/8 DATE: 07-02-15
CONSENT OF AUTOMATED PACKAGING SYSTEMS INC.
3-002771 C
THIRD ANGLE
to be RoHS Compliant INCH [MM] PROJECTION DRIVE
ITEM QTY PART NO. DESCRIPTION
1 2 3-004233 BRACKET, NIP GUARD, AB 500
2 1 3-004224 RAKE PLATE, REAR, AB 500
3 1 3-004221 INNER NIP GUARD, AB 850
4 1 3-003082 ASSY, FINGER PERF DETECTOR
5 1 3-003077 ASSY, MAIN AIR KNIFE
6 1 3-003040 ASSY, NIP WELDMENT W/ PINS
7 2 3-002739 CAM, NIP LIFTING
8 1 3-002731 ASSY, HIGH VOLTAGE FINGER
9 1 3-002725 PULLEY, MAIN NIP F12 DRIVE MOTOR END
10 1 3-002714 PULLEY, NIP ROLL DRIVE
11 1 3-002712 PULLEY, NIP ROLL DRIVE
12 2 3-002710 PLATE, SPRING MOUNTING CAP
13 1 3-002707 ASSY, CROSS BAR, MAIN NIP, F12V
14 1 3-002702 SHAFT, NIP ROLLER, UPPER
15 1 3-002698 ASSY, ROLLER, UPPER NIP, F12V
16 1 3-002663-002 ASSY, PIVOT BLCK NIP ROLLER 12" BGR, LH
17 1 3-002663-001 ASSY, PIVOT BLCK NIP ROLLER 12" BGR, RH
18 1 3-002661-002 ASSY, NIP BEARING HOUSING, RH
19 1 3-002661-001 ASS'Y, NIP BEARING HOUSING, LH
20 1 3-002635 ROLLER, PRINT 12" BAGGER
21 1 3-002634 ROLLER, NIP RUBBER 12" BAGGER
22 2 3-001974 ASSY, NIP HANDLE
23 1 2-002607 WASHER, FLAT OVERSIZED .16"ID X .56"OD X .05"THK SS
24 2 2-002429 SPRING, COMPRESSION .477 OD X 1.75 LG X .087 MW BLACK
25 2 2-002153-002 SCREW, SHOULDER, PREC, SOCKET, 10MM DIA X 12MM LG, SS
26 1 2-002040 BELT, ROUND, 1/8"DIA, 5.00" OUTER CIRCLE, URETHANE
27 2 1-63253F-010M KEY, 4MM SQ, 10MM LG, ROUND END, SS
28 1 1-63153F-028M KEY, 4MM X 4MM, 28MM LG, SS
29 4 1-61512F RING, RETAINING, E-CLIP, 9MM DIA. NOM, DIN 6799, SS
30 1 1-22155F WASHER, SPLIT LOCK, M3, SS
31 1 1-21155F WASHER, FLAT, M3, SS
32 2 1-14159F-006M SCREW, SET, CUP POINT, SOCKET HEAD, M5X0.8 X 6MM, SS
33 2 1-14159F-005M SCREW, SET, CUP POINT, SOCKET HEAD, M5X0.8 X 5MM, SS
34 1 1-14157F-006M SCREW, SET, CUP POINT, SOCKET HEAD, M4X0.7 X 6MM, SS
35 4 1-11657F-014M SCREW, FLAT HEAD, SOCKET, M4X0.7 X 14MM LG, SS
J 36 2 1-11463F-020M SCREW, BUTTON HEAD, SOCKET, M8X1.25 X 20MM LG, SS
37 10 1-11457F-006M SCREW, BUTTON HEAD, SOCKET, M4X0.7 X 6MM LG, SS
2 35 38 1 1-11455F-006M SCREW, BUTTON HEAD, SOCKET, M3X0.5 X 6MM LG, SS
1 4
39 4 1-11161F-018M SCREW, CAP, SOCKET HEAD, M6X1.0 X 18MM LG, SS
39 6 40 4 1-11159F-014M SCREW, CAP, SOCKET HEAD, M5X0.8 X 14MM LG, SS
4 1 41 2 1-11157F-008M SCREW, CAP, SOCKET HEAD, M4X0.7 X 8MM LG, SS
22
42 1 1-11155F-006M SCREW, CAP, SOCKET HEAD, M3X0.5 X 6MM LG, SS
2
25
12 40 1 32 10
2 4 1 1
17 USE LOW-STRENGTH LOCTITE
1
24
2 5
1 13
1 9 34
1 1
11 32
1 1
26
1
18
1
14
29
1
4
7 33 FASTENER TORQUE REQUIREMENTS
2 2 TIGHTEN ALL FASTENERS PER TABLE UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED.
27 MINIMUM TORQUE SHALL BE 85% OF LISTED MAXIMUM TORQUE.
2 LUBRICATE NIP FRAME UNDER CAM SIZE MAX TORQUE (IN-LBF)
WITH MOBILITH SHC PM 460 M2 X 0.4 2.5
SYNTHETIC GREASE.
M2.5 X 0.45 5.1
M3 X 0.5 9.0
36
J M4 X 0.7 21.0
2
8 41 M5 X 0.8 42.4
31 30 42 4 2
1 M6 X 1.0 72.1
1 1 1 1
3 28 M8 X 1.25 175.0
1 1 M10 X 1.5 346.4
23 M12 X 1.75 604.1
15
1 1
38
1
ASSEMBLE BLIP TUBE HERE.
USE: 3-002722 SHORT FRAME
uSE: 3-003777 LONG FRAME
1
2
37 20
10 1
16
1
21
1 J KJD 01-10-19 1784 1-11463F-020M WAS 1-11463F-025M
A ZR 4-20-15 PROTOTYPE
TOLERANCE INCHES mm
1 PLACE DIMS # .1 # 2,5
Vaulted
2 PLACE DIMS # .02 # 0,51 10175 PHILIPP PARKWAY - STREETSBORO, OH 44241
3 PLACE DIMS # .005 # 0,10
ANGULAR # 1/2 $
DRAWING SIZE SCALE DRAWN BY BOM REFERENCE NUMBER
E
NOTICE: THIS DOCUMENT CONTAINS PROPRIETARY INFORMATION NAME: DMF
AND IT SHALL NOT BE USED OR REPRODUCED OR ITS CONTENT
DISCLOSED, IN WHOLE OR PART, WITHOUT THE PRIOR WRITTEN 1/1 DATE: 4-20-15
CONSENT OF AUTOMATED PACKAGING SYSTEMS INC.
ASSY, MAIN
DRAWING NO. SHEET 1 OF 1 REV
3-002758 J
THIRD ANGLE
to be RoHS Compliant INCH [MM] PROJECTION NIP, F12V
ITEM QTY PART NO. DESCRIPTION
1 2 3-004233 BRACKET, NIP GUARD, AB 500
2 1 3-004224 RAKE PLATE, REAR, AB 500
3 1 3-004221 INNER NIP GUARD, AB 850
4 1 3-003826-002 ASSY, NIP BEARING HOUSING W/O PRINTER BEARING, RH
5 1 3-003826-001 ASSY, NIP BEARING HOUSING W/O PRINTER BEARING, LH
6 1 3-003082 ASSY, FINGER PERF DETECTOR
7 1 3-003077 ASSY, MAIN AIR KNIFE
8 1 3-003040 ASSY, NIP WELDMENT W/ PINS
9 2 3-002739 CAM, NIP LIFTING
10 1 3-002731 ASSY, HIGH VOLTAGE FINGER
11 1 3-002725 PULLEY, MAIN NIP F12 DRIVE MOTOR END
12 1 3-002712 PULLEY, NIP ROLL DRIVE
13 2 3-002710 PLATE, SPRING MOUNTING CAP
14 1 3-002707 ASSY, CROSS BAR, MAIN NIP, F12V
15 1 3-002702 SHAFT, NIP ROLLER, UPPER
16 1 3-002698 ASSY, ROLLER, UPPER NIP, F12V
17 1 3-002663-002 ASSY, PIVOT BLCK NIP ROLLER 12" BGR, LH
18 1 3-002663-001 ASSY, PIVOT BLCK NIP ROLLER 12" BGR, RH
19 1 3-002634 ROLLER, NIP RUBBER 12" BAGGER
20 2 3-001974 ASSY, NIP HANDLE
21 1 2-002607 WASHER, FLAT OVERSIZED .16"ID X .56"OD X .05"THK SS
22 2 2-002429 SPRING, COMPRESSION .477 OD X 1.75 LG X .087 MW BLACK
23 2 2-002153-002 SCREW, SHOULDER, PREC, SOCKET, 10MM DIA X 12MM LG, SS
24 2 1-63253F-010M KEY, 4MM SQ, 10MM LG, ROUND END, SS
25 1 1-63153F-028M KEY, 4MM X 4MM, 28MM LG, SS
26 4 1-61512F RING, RETAINING, E-CLIP, 9MM DIA. NOM, DIN 6799, SS
27 1 1-22155F WASHER, SPLIT LOCK, M3, SS
28 1 1-21155F WASHER, FLAT, M3, SS
29 1 1-14159F-006M SCREW, SET, CUP POINT, SOCKET HEAD, M5X0.8 X 6MM, SS
30 2 1-14159F-005M SCREW, SET, CUP POINT, SOCKET HEAD, M5X0.8 X 5MM, SS
31 1 1-14157F-006M SCREW, SET, CUP POINT, SOCKET HEAD, M4X0.7 X 6MM, SS
32 4 1-11657F-014M SCREW, FLAT HEAD, SOCKET, M4X0.7 X 14MM LG, SS
F 33 2 1-11463F-020M SCREW, BUTTON HEAD, SOCKET, M8X1.25 X 20MM LG, SS
34 10 1-11457F-006M SCREW, BUTTON HEAD, SOCKET, M4X0.7 X 6MM LG, SS
35 1 1-11455F-006M SCREW, BUTTON HEAD, SOCKET, M3X0.5 X 6MM LG, SS
36 4 1-11161F-018M SCREW, CAP, SOCKET HEAD, M6X1.0 X 18MM LG, SS
37 4 1-11159F-014M SCREW, CAP, SOCKET HEAD, M5X0.8 X 14MM LG, SS
2 32
38 2 1-11157F-008M SCREW, CAP, SOCKET HEAD, M4X0.7 X 8MM LG, SS
1 4
36 8 39 1 1-11155F-006M SCREW, CAP, SOCKET HEAD, M3X0.5 X 6MM LG, SS
4 1 20
2
23
1 USE LOW-STRENGTH LOCTITE
13 37
2 4
18
1
22
7
2 14
1
1
11 31
1 1
12 29
1 1
10
1 15 4
1 1
26
4
9 30 FASTENER TORQUE REQUIREMENTS
2 2 TIGHTEN ALL FASTENERS PER TABLE UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED.
24 MINIMUM TORQUE SHALL BE 85% OF LISTED MAXIMUM TORQUE.
2 LUBRICATE NIP FRAME UNDER CAM SIZE MAX TORQUE (IN-LBF)
WITH MOBILITH SHC PM 460
M2 X 0.4 2.5
SYNTHETIC GREASE.
33 M2.5 X 0.45 5.1
F
2
M3 X 0.5 9.0
28 27 39 6 M4 X 0.7 21.0
38
1 1 1 1 2 M5 X 0.8 42.4
M6 X 1.0 72.1
M8 X 1.25 175.0
25
1 M10 X 1.5 346.4
16 M12 X 1.75 604.1
21 1
3 1
1
1
2 35
1 ASSEMBLE BLIP TUBE HERE.
USE: 3-002722 SHORT FRAME
USE: 3-003777 LONG FRAME
34
10
17
1
19
1
TOLERANCE INCHES mm
1 PLACE DIMS # .1 # 2,5
Vaulted
2 PLACE DIMS # .02 # 0,51 10175 PHILIPP PARKWAY - STREETSBORO, OH 44241
3 PLACE DIMS # .005 # 0,10
ANGULAR # 1/2 $
DRAWING SIZE SCALE DRAWN BY BOM REFERENCE NUMBER
E
NOTICE: THIS DOCUMENT CONTAINS PROPRIETARY INFORMATION NAME: D ROMO
AND IT SHALL NOT BE USED OR REPRODUCED OR ITS CONTENT
DISCLOSED, IN WHOLE OR PART, WITHOUT THE PRIOR WRITTEN 1/1 DATE: 12/8/15
CONSENT OF AUTOMATED PACKAGING SYSTEMS INC.
3-003827 F
THIRD ANGLE
to be RoHS Compliant INCH [MM] PROJECTION W/O PRINT ROLLER
FASTENER TORQUE REQUIREMENTS ITEM QTY PART NO. DESCRIPTION
TIGHTEN ALL FASTENERS PER TABLE UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED.
MINIMUM TORQUE SHALL BE 85% OF LISTED MAXIMUM TORQUE.
1 1 3-005369 PLATE, SLIDING, PT ADJUST
SIZE MAX TORQUE (IN-LBF) 2 2 3-005290 SIDE RAILS, PT ADJUST
M2 X 0.4 2.5 3 1 3-003496 SHAFT, PT ADJUST, F12
M2.5 X 0.45 5.1 4 1 3-002984 KNOB, PT ADJUST
M3 X 0.5 9.0 5 1 3-002981 BEARING BLOCK, PT ADJUST
M4 X 0.7 21.0 6 2 2-002740 SPRING, DIE, URETHANE, 60A, OD.69 X L.75
M5 X 0.8 42.4 7 1 2-002122 WASHER, FLAT, ID8.4mm X OD16mm X 3mm THICK, SS
M6 X 1.0 72.1 8 2 1-31163F NUT, HEX, M8X1.25, SS
M8 X 1.25 175.0 9 1 1-22163F WASHER, SPLIT LOCK, M8, SS
M10 X 1.5 346.4 10 2 1-21163F WASHER, FLAT, M8, SS
1 11 2 1-11657F-016M SCREW, FLAT HEAD, SOCKET, M4X0.7 X 16MM LG, SS
M12 X 1.75 604.1 1
6 12 8 1-11459F-016M SCREW, BUTTON HEAD, SOCKET, M5X0.8 X 16MM LG, SS
2 13 4 1-11161F-025M SCREW, CAP, SOCKET HEAD, M6X1.0 X 25MM LG, SS
11
2 14 1 1-11155F-020M SCREW, CAP, SOCKET HEAD, M3X0.5 X 20MM LG, SS
12
8
3
1
2
2
13
4
5
1
14
1
10
1
9
1
10
1
7 A MDS 03-30-17 973 NEW DRAWING
IN SHAFT BUT TORQUE TO TURN SHAFT MACHINE SURFACES TO BE NO GREATER THAN 125 [3,2]
4
UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED
PART MUST BE FREE OF BURRS AND SHARP EDGES
DOES NOT EXCEED 0.75 IN-LBS
1 TOLERANCE
1 PLACE DIMS
INCHES
# .1
mm
# 2,5
Vaulted
C
NOTICE: THIS DOCUMENT CONTAINS PROPRIETARY INFORMATION
---
NAME: LDC
AND IT SHALL NOT BE USED OR REPRODUCED OR ITS CONTENT
DISCLOSED, IN WHOLE OR PART, WITHOUT THE PRIOR WRITTEN 5/8 DATE: 02-17-17
CONSENT OF AUTOMATED PACKAGING SYSTEMS INC.
3-005291 A
THIRD ANGLE
to be RoHS Compliant INCH [MM] PROJECTION ADJUST, AB500
FASTENER TORQUE REQUIREMENTS ITEM QTY PART NO. DESCRIPTION
TIGHTEN ALL FASTENERS PER TABLE UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED.
MINIMUM TORQUE SHALL BE 85% OF LISTED MAXIMUM TORQUE.
1 1 3-005374 PLATE, SLIDING, PT ADJUST
SIZE MAX TORQUE (IN-LBF) 2 2 2-002740 SPRING, DIE, URETHANE, 60A, OD.69 X L.75
M2 X 0.4 2.5 3 2 1-11657F-016M SCREW, FLAT HEAD, SOCKET, M4X0.7 X 16MM LG, SS
M2.5 X 0.45 5.1 4 2 1-11163F-014M SCREW, CAP, SOCKET HEAD, M8X1.25 X 14MM LG, SS
M3 X 0.5 9.0
M4 X 0.7 21.0 4
M5 X 0.8 42.4 2
M6 X 1.0 72.1
M8 X 1.25 175.0 1
M10 X 1.5 346.4 1
M12 X 1.75 604.1 2
2
3
2
TOLERANCE INCHES mm
1 PLACE DIMS # .1 # 2,5
Vaulted
B
NOTICE: THIS DOCUMENT CONTAINS PROPRIETARY INFORMATION
---
NAME: LDC
AND IT SHALL NOT BE USED OR REPRODUCED OR ITS CONTENT
DISCLOSED, IN WHOLE OR PART, WITHOUT THE PRIOR WRITTEN 7/8 DATE: 02-17-17
CONSENT OF AUTOMATED PACKAGING SYSTEMS INC.
ASSY, PASSTHROUGH
DRAWING NO. SHEET 1 OF 1 REV
3-005373 A
THIRD ANGLE
to be RoHS Compliant INCH [MM] PROJECTION ADJUST, AB500
ITEM QTY PART NO. DESCRIPTION
1 1 3-006537-001 ASSY, PLATE GRIPPER W/ SENSOR BARRELS SHORT
2 1 3-005600-001 ASSY, HEATER W/ TEFLON SCROLL CE 12" REFLEX
7
3 2 3-005554 NUT, T FASTENER W/ PIN 1
14
4 1 3-004131 ASSY, AIR GUIDE 4"
6
5 2 3-003415 STANDOFF, FACEPLATE
6 1 3-003129 ASSY, FRONT GUARD, CLEAR, AB500
7 1 3-002763 TRAY, INFEED 12" SHORT
8 1 3-002751 FACEPLATE, SHORT 12" BAGGER
9 1 3-002727 PLATE, STRIPPER 12"
10 1 3-002722 TUBE, AIR BLIP SHORT FRAME
11 7 1-11661F-012M SCREW, FLAT HEAD, SOCKET, M6X1.0 X 12MM LG, SS
12 4 1-11659F-012M SCREW, FLAT HEAD, SOCKET, M5X0.8 X 12MM LG, SS 4
13 4 1-11655F-006M SCREW, FLAT HEAD, SOCKET, M3X0.5 X 6MM LG, SS 1
15
14 6 1-11459F-006M SCREW, BUTTON HEAD, SOCKET, M5X0.8 X 6MM LG, SS 4
15 4 1-11159F-016M SCREW, CAP, SOCKET HEAD, M5X0.8 X 16MM LG, SS
5
ITEMS NOT SHOWN 2
10 2
1 1
12
4
8
1
1
B 1
9
1
13 3
4 2
6
1 11
7
TOLERANCE INCHES mm
1 PLACE DIMS # .1 # 2,5
Vaulted
C
NOTICE: THIS DOCUMENT CONTAINS PROPRIETARY INFORMATION
-
NAME: LDC
AND IT SHALL NOT BE USED OR REPRODUCED OR ITS CONTENT
DISCLOSED, IN WHOLE OR PART, WITHOUT THE PRIOR WRITTEN 5/16 DATE: 06-07-17
CONSENT OF AUTOMATED PACKAGING SYSTEMS INC.
ASSY, SHORT
DRAWING NO. SHEET 1 OF 1 REV
3-005601-001 B
THIRD ANGLE
to be RoHS Compliant INCH [MM] PROJECTION FRAME CE REFLEX 12"
ITEM QTY PART NO. DESCRIPTION
1 1 3-006537-002 ASSY, PLATE GRIPPER W/ SENSOR BARRELS REFLEX LONG
2 1 3-005600-001 ASSY, HEATER W/ TEFLON SCROLL CE 12" REFLEX
3 2 3-005554 NUT, T FASTENER W/ PIN 15
4 2 3-004158 STANDOFF, M/F 10 HEX X 49 L X M4X0.7 X 6 L (MODIFIED) 6
5 1 3-004131 ASSY, AIR GUIDE 4" 9
1
6 1 3-003777 TUBE, AIR BLIP LONG FRAME
7 2 3-003415 STANDOFF, FACEPLATE
8 1 3-003129 ASSY, FRONT GUARD, CLEAR, AB500
9 1 3-002762 TRAY, INFEED 12" LONG
5
10 1 3-002750 WELDMENT, FACE PLATE, NIP ROLLER
1
11 1 3-002727 PLATE, STRIPPER 12"
12 7 1-11661F-012M SCREW, FLAT HEAD, SOCKET, M6X1.0 X 12MM LG, SS 4
2
13 4 1-11659F-012M SCREW, FLAT HEAD, SOCKET, M5X0.8 X 12MM LG, SS 16
4
14 4 1-11655F-006M SCREW, FLAT HEAD, SOCKET, M3X0.5 X 6MM LG, SS
7
15 6 1-11459F-006M SCREW, BUTTON HEAD, SOCKET, M5X0.8 X 6MM LG, SS
2
16 4 1-11159F-016M SCREW, CAP, SOCKET HEAD, M5X0.8 X 16MM LG, SS
6
ITEMS NOT SHOWN 1
QTY PART NO. DESCRIPTION
1 2-002165 BELT, TIMING, 150XL, 15.0" OC, 75T, 3/8" WIDE
2
1
13
4
10
1
1
B 1
11
1
14
4
3
2
8
1 12
7
TOLERANCE INCHES mm
1 PLACE DIMS # .1 # 2,5
Vaulted
C
NOTICE: THIS DOCUMENT CONTAINS PROPRIETARY INFORMATION
-
NAME: LDC
AND IT SHALL NOT BE USED OR REPRODUCED OR ITS CONTENT
DISCLOSED, IN WHOLE OR PART, WITHOUT THE PRIOR WRITTEN 5/16 DATE: 06-07-17
CONSENT OF AUTOMATED PACKAGING SYSTEMS INC.
ASSY, LONG
DRAWING NO. SHEET 1 OF 1 REV
3-005601-002 B
THIRD ANGLE
to be RoHS Compliant INCH [MM] PROJECTION FRAME CE REFLEX 12"
ITEM QTY PART NO. DESCRIPTION
1 1 26988A1 DECAL, EAR PROTECTION
2 1 3-006537-001 ASSY, PLATE GRIPPER W/ SENSOR BARRELS SHORT
3 1 3-005600-002 ASSY, HEATER W/ TEFLON SCROLL CE 12" TRIM
4 2 3-005554 NUT, T FASTENER W/ PIN
5 1 3-004962 BAR, MOUNTING TRIM CHUTE
6 1 3-004503 CHUTE, TRIM COLLECTOR
10
7 2 3-003415 STANDOFF, FACEPLATE
1
8 1 3-003129 ASSY, FRONT GUARD, CLEAR, AB500 19
9 1 3-002916 ASSY, AIR GUIDE W/ TRIM JETS 4" 6
10 1 3-002763 TRAY, INFEED 12" SHORT
11 1 3-002751 FACEPLATE, SHORT 12" BAGGER
12 1 3-002727 PLATE, STRIPPER 12"
13 1 3-002722 TUBE, AIR BLIP SHORT FRAME
14 1 2-002170-M8 T-NUT, 3030 SERIES, M8x1.25
15 7 1-11661F-012M SCREW, FLAT HEAD, SOCKET, M6X1.0 X 12MM LG, SS
16 4 1-11659F-012M SCREW, FLAT HEAD, SOCKET, M5X0.8 X 12MM LG, SS
17 4 1-11655F-006M SCREW, FLAT HEAD, SOCKET, M3X0.5 X 6MM LG, SS
18 2 1-11463F-018M SCREW, BUTTON HEAD, SOCKET, M8X1.25 X 18MM LG, SS
19 6 1-11459F-006M SCREW, BUTTON HEAD, SOCKET, M5X0.8 X 6MM LG, SS 9
20 4 1-11457F-008M SCREW, BUTTON HEAD, SOCKET, M4X0.7 X 8MM LG, SS 1
21 4 1-11159F-016M SCREW, CAP, SOCKET HEAD, M5X0.8 X 16MM LG, SS 21
4
* 1
1
200398A1
3-004883
VALVE, DOUBLE 3 WAY NC 2 POS 24VDC
KIT, TUBE ROUTING TRIM NOZZLES
1 2-002166 BELT, TIMING, 140XL, 14.0" OC, 70T, 3/8" WIDE 13
D 5 1
16
1 4 3
6 1
20
4 18 11
2 1
14
FASTENER TORQUE REQUIREMENTS 1
TIGHTEN ALL FASTENERS PER TABLE UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED.
MINIMUM TORQUE SHALL BE 85% OF LISTED MAXIMUM TORQUE.
12
SIZE MAX TORQUE (IN-LBF) 1
M2 X 0.4 2.5
M2.5 X 0.45 5.1 4
17 2
M3 X 0.5 9.0 4
M4 X 0.7 21.0
M5 X 0.8 42.4
2
M6 X 1.0 72.1
8 1
M8 X 1.25 175.0
1
M10 X 1.5 346.4 15
M12 X 1.75 604.1 7
TOLERANCE INCHES mm
1 PLACE DIMS # .1 # 2,5
Vaulted
2 PLACE DIMS # .02 # 0,51 10175 PHILIPP PARKWAY - STREETSBORO, OH 44241
3 PLACE DIMS # .005 # 0,10
ANGULAR # 1/2 $
DRAWING SIZE SCALE DRAWN BY BOM REFERENCE NUMBER
D
NOTICE: THIS DOCUMENT CONTAINS PROPRIETARY INFORMATION
-
NAME: LDC
AND IT SHALL NOT BE USED OR REPRODUCED OR ITS CONTENT
DISCLOSED, IN WHOLE OR PART, WITHOUT THE PRIOR WRITTEN 3/8 DATE: 06-07-17
CONSENT OF AUTOMATED PACKAGING SYSTEMS INC.
ASSY, SHORT
DRAWING NO. SHEET 1 OF 1 REV
3-005601-003 D
THIRD ANGLE
to be RoHS Compliant INCH [MM] PROJECTION FRAME CE TRIM 12"
ITEM QTY PART NO. DESCRIPTION
1 1 26988A1 DECAL, EAR PROTECTION
2 1 3-006537-003 ASSY, PLATE GRIPPER W/ SENSOR BARRELS LONG TRIM
3 1 3-005600-002 ASSY, HEATER W/ TEFLON SCROLL CE 12" TRIM
4 2 3-005554 NUT, T FASTENER W/ PIN
5 1 3-004962 BAR, MOUNTING TRIM CHUTE
6 1 3-004844 BLOCK, GAP FILLING TRIM CHUTE LONG FRAME
7 1 3-004503 CHUTE, TRIM COLLECTOR
8 1 3-004131 ASSY, AIR GUIDE 4" 22
6
9 1 3-004127 ASSY, BLOCK TRIM AIR JETS 4"
10 1 3-003777 TUBE, AIR BLIP LONG FRAME
11 2 3-003415 STANDOFF, FACEPLATE
13
12 1 3-003129 ASSY, FRONT GUARD, CLEAR, AB500 1
13 1 3-002762 TRAY, INFEED 12" LONG
14 1 3-002750 WELDMENT, FACE PLATE, NIP ROLLER
15 1 3-002727 PLATE, STRIPPER 12"
16 2 2-002445 STANDOFF, 10MM HEX X 46MM LONG X M4X0.7 THREAD
8
17 1 2-002170-M8 T-NUT, 3030 SERIES, M8x1.25
1
18 7 1-11661F-012M SCREW, FLAT HEAD, SOCKET, M6X1.0 X 12MM LG, SS
19 4 1-11659F-012M SCREW, FLAT HEAD, SOCKET, M5X0.8 X 12MM LG, SS 16
20 4 1-11655F-006M SCREW, FLAT HEAD, SOCKET, M3X0.5 X 6MM LG, SS 2
21 2 1-11463F-018M SCREW, BUTTON HEAD, SOCKET, M8X1.25 X 18MM LG, SS 9
24
22 6 1-11459F-006M SCREW, BUTTON HEAD, SOCKET, M5X0.8 X 6MM LG, SS 4 1
23 6 1-11457F-008M SCREW, BUTTON HEAD, SOCKET, M4X0.7 X 8MM LG, SS
24 4 1-11159F-016M SCREW, CAP, SOCKET HEAD, M5X0.8 X 16MM LG, SS 6 11
1 2
1
1
ITEMS NOT SHOWN
QTY PART NO. DESCRIPTION
1 21036A1 BAG, RECEIPT 18 X 30 IRON CLAD WHITE 5
* 1
1
200398A1
3-004883
VALVE, DOUBLE 3 WAY NC 2 POS 24VDC
KIT, TUBE ROUTING TRIM NOZZLES
23
2
1
23
4
17
1
15
1
FASTENER TORQUE REQUIREMENTS
TIGHTEN ALL FASTENERS PER TABLE UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED.
MINIMUM TORQUE SHALL BE 85% OF LISTED MAXIMUM TORQUE.
20
SIZE MAX TORQUE (IN-LBF) 4
M2 X 0.4 2.5 4
M2.5 X 0.45 5.1 2
M3 X 0.5 9.0
M4 X 0.7 21.0 2
M5 X 0.8 42.4 1
M6 X 1.0 72.1 12
1 18
M8 X 1.25 175.0 7
M10 X 1.5 346.4
M12 X 1.75 604.1
TOLERANCE INCHES mm
1 PLACE DIMS # .1 # 2,5
Vaulted
2 PLACE DIMS # .02 # 0,51 10175 PHILIPP PARKWAY - STREETSBORO, OH 44241
3 PLACE DIMS # .005 # 0,10
ANGULAR # 1/2 $
DRAWING SIZE SCALE DRAWN BY BOM REFERENCE NUMBER
D
NOTICE: THIS DOCUMENT CONTAINS PROPRIETARY INFORMATION
-
NAME: LDC
AND IT SHALL NOT BE USED OR REPRODUCED OR ITS CONTENT
DISCLOSED, IN WHOLE OR PART, WITHOUT THE PRIOR WRITTEN 3/8 DATE: 06-07-17
CONSENT OF AUTOMATED PACKAGING SYSTEMS INC.
ASSY, LONG
DRAWING NO. SHEET 1 OF 1 REV
3-005601-004 D
THIRD ANGLE
to be RoHS Compliant INCH [MM] PROJECTION FRAME CE TRIM 12"
ITEM QTY PART NO. DESCRIPTION
1 1 3-006531 SHIELD, SENSOR SEAL BAR
2 1 3-005379 NUT, CYLINDER ROD, M10x1.5
3 1 3-003151 ASSY, SEALBAR W/ INTERNAL ANTI-JAM
4 1 3-003148 ASSY, SHUTTER SEALBAR
5 1 3-003122 BAR, PRESSURE 12" MACHINE
6 2 3-003121 ROD, GUIDE, SOLID
7 5 3-003081 BRACKET, FLAG, MUTING SENSOR
13 8 1 3-002759 SPACER, MAIN CYLINDER
2 9 1 2-002189 WASHER, PLASTIC 10.5mm ID x 22mm OD x 2.5mm THK
5 10 1 2-002188 COLLAR, SHAFT, M10x1.5 BORE x24mmOD x 9mm LG
1
9 11 1 2-001985 CYLINDER, SEALBAR 1-1/2" BORE, 5-1/2" STROKE
1
10 14 12 10 1-11457F-008M SCREW, BUTTON HEAD, SOCKET, M4X0.7 X 8MM LG, SS
1 2 13 4 1-11165F-025M SCREW, CAP, SOCKET HEAD, M10X1.5 X 25MM LG, SS
7
5 11 14 2 1-11161F-050M SCREW, CAP, SOCKET HEAD, M6X1.0 X 50MM LG, SS
12 1 15 4 1-11159F-010M SCREW, CAP, SOCKET HEAD, M5X0.8 X 10MM LG, SS
10
6
2
2 3
1 1
13
2
1
8 1
1 M
4
1
M2.5 X 0.45 5.1 J GHM 10-9-17 1253 2-002189 WAS QTY (1) NOW (2)
M12 X 1.75 604.1 PART MUST BE FREE OF BURRS AND SHARP EDGES
TOLERANCE INCHES mm
1 PLACE DIMS # .1 # 2,5
Vaulted
C
NOTICE: THIS DOCUMENT CONTAINS PROPRIETARY INFORMATION
---
NAME: D ROMO
AND IT SHALL NOT BE USED OR REPRODUCED OR ITS CONTENT
DISCLOSED, IN WHOLE OR PART, WITHOUT THE PRIOR WRITTEN 7/16 DATE: 7-13-15
CONSENT OF AUTOMATED PACKAGING SYSTEMS INC.
3-003150 M
THIRD ANGLE
to be RoHS Compliant INCH [MM] PROJECTION WITH SHUTTER
ITEM QTY PART NO. DESCRIPTION
B 1 1 4-001083-XX_XX ASSY, HEAT WIRE CONTROLLER, PROGRAMMED CE
2 1 3-003954 ASSY, HEATER MOUNTING BAR W/ BEARINGS 12"
3 1 3-003915 ASSY, TEFLON SHEET WITH RODS
4 2 3-003298 ARM, PIVOT TRIM ADVANCE
5 1 3-003162-001 ASSY, HEATER BAR 12" REFLEX
6 2 2-002490 SCREW, SHOULDER 1/4 DIA X 3/8 L LOW HEAD SLOTTED SS
7 2 2-002396 GEAR, SPUR HUBLESS PLASTIC, TEFLON LARGE
8 4 2-002182 FITTING, AIR ELBOW FIXED FLOW M5 TO 4mm TUBE x 1mm IRIS
9 2 2-001986 CYLINDER, HEATERBAR 3/4" BORE, 1-1/2" STROKE
10 2 1-41104F-014M PIN, DOWEL, 4MM DIA X 14MM LG, SS
11 2 1-33159F NUT, HEX, NYLON LOCK, M5X0.8, SS
12 2 1-15104F-004M SCREW, SHOULDER, 4MM DIA X 4MM LG, SS, ISO 7379
13 4 1-11161F-016M SCREW, CAP, SOCKET HEAD, M6X1.0 X 16MM LG, SS
B 14 2 1-11155F-016M SCREW, CAP, SOCKET HEAD, M3X0.5 X 16MM LG, SS
15 8 1-11155F-014M SCREW, CAP, SOCKET HEAD, M3X0.5 X 14MM LG, SS
B 16 4 1-11155F-012M SCREW, CAP, SOCKET HEAD, M3X0.5 X 12MM LG, SS
PRIOR TO INSTALLATION
REMOVE THERMAL PAD LINER
1
1
14
3 13 2
1 4 USE LOW USE LOW B
16
STRENGTH B 12 STRENGTH
4 1-11155F-016M WAS -014M, 1-11155F-012M
ROLL TEFLON TO INSIDE LOCTITE. 2 LOCTITE. B GHM 10-12-17 1235 WAS -010M, 4-001083-XX.XX WAS 4-001083
TOP SHAFT IS THE TEFLON SUPPLY. SCALE 7/16 FINISH NONE REV BY DATE ECN DESCRIPTION
UNTIL IT DOES.
DRAWING SIZE SCALE DRAWN BY BOM REFERENCE NUMBER
C
NOTICE: THIS DOCUMENT CONTAINS PROPRIETARY INFORMATION NAME: LDC
ASSY, HEATER
DRAWING NO. SHEET 1 OF 1 REV
3-005600-001 B
THIRD ANGLE
to be RoHS Compliant INCH [MM] PROJECTION W/ SCROLL CE 12" REFLEX
ITEM QTY PART NO. DESCRIPTION
B 1 1 4-001083-XX_XX ASSY, HEAT WIRE CONTROLLER, PROGRAMMED CE
2 1 3-003954 ASSY, HEATER MOUNTING BAR W/ BEARINGS 12"
3 1 3-003915 ASSY, TEFLON SHEET WITH RODS
4 2 3-003298 ARM, PIVOT TRIM ADVANCE
5 1 3-003162-002 ASSY, HEATER BAR TRIM 12"
6 2 2-002490 SCREW, SHOULDER 1/4 DIA X 3/8 L LOW HEAD SLOTTED SS
7 2 2-002396 GEAR, SPUR HUBLESS PLASTIC, TEFLON LARGE
8 4 2-002182 FITTING, AIR ELBOW FIXED FLOW M5 TO 4mm TUBE x 1mm IRIS
9 2 2-001986 CYLINDER, HEATERBAR 3/4" BORE, 1-1/2" STROKE
10 2 1-41104F-014M PIN, DOWEL, 4MM DIA X 14MM LG, SS
11 2 1-33159F NUT, HEX, NYLON LOCK, M5X0.8, SS
12 2 1-15104F-004M SCREW, SHOULDER, 4MM DIA X 4MM LG, SS, ISO 7379
13 4 1-11161F-016M SCREW, CAP, SOCKET HEAD, M6X1.0 X 16MM LG, SS
B 14 2 1-11155F-016M SCREW, CAP, SOCKET HEAD, M3X0.5 X 16MM LG, SS
15 8 1-11155F-014M SCREW, CAP, SOCKET HEAD, M3X0.5 X 14MM LG, SS
B 16 4 1-11155F-012M SCREW, CAP, SOCKET HEAD, M3X0.5 X 12MM LG, SS
PRIOR TO INSTALLATION
REMOVE THERMAL PAD LINER
1
1
13
3 4 14
1 5 2
B 12 USE LOW
1 16
2 STRENGTH
USE LOW 4 LOCTITE
STRENGTH B 1-11155F-016M WAS -014M, 1-11155F-012M
ROLL TEFLON TO INSIDE SCALE 7/16 LOCTITE B GHM 10-12-17 1235 WAS -010M, 4-001083-XX.XX WAS 4-001083
FINISH NONE
TOP SHAFT IS THE TEFLON SUPPLY. REV BY DATE ECN DESCRIPTION
TIGHTEN NUT UNTIL FULLY SNUG. 2 2 2 2 MACHINE SURFACES TO BE NO GREATER THAN 125 [3,2]
R
ASSY, HEATER
DRAWING NO. SHEET 1 OF 1 REV
3-005600-002 B
THIRD ANGLE
to be RoHS Compliant INCH [MM] PROJECTION W/ SCROLL 12" CE TRIM
FASTENER TORQUE REQUIREMENTS ITEM QTY PART NO. DESCRIPTION
TIGHTEN ALL FASTENERS PER TABLE UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED.
MINIMUM TORQUE SHALL BE 85% OF LISTED MAXIMUM TORQUE.
1 2 656084A1 BAR, BUS GROUNDING
ASSEMBLE 2X SENSORS TO SIZE MAX TORQUE (IN-LBF) 2 16 29638A1 MOUNT, CABLE TIE
ADJUSTABLE PASSTHROUGH M2 X 0.4 2.5 3 2 27144A1 LABEL, GROUND
(SHOWN FOR REFERENCE ONLY) 4 2 25289A1 SWITCH, ROCKER
M2.5 X 0.45 5.1
M3 X 0.5 9.0 5 1 3-008254 ASSY, ANTI-JAM RX SHIELD
17 6 1 3-004843 INSULATOR, UFCB, AB500
M4 X 0.7 21.0
6
M5 X 0.8 42.4 7 1 3-003198-X ASSY, FAB UPPER FRAME CONNECTOR BOARD POPULATED
11
5 M6 X 1.0 72.1 8 2 3-002643 FOAM, WIRE ENTRY, F22V
M8 X 1.25 175.0 9 2 3-002642 BRACKET, WIRE ENTRY, F22V
M10 X 1.5 346.4 10 2 3-002397 BRACKET, JOG BUTTON
M12 X 1.75 604.1 11 5 2-002443 SENSOR, PHOTOELECTRIC, 5mm SLOT, 24V PNP, 200mm M8 Lead
12 8 2-001978 STANDOFF, M/F, 6MM HEX, M3X0.5, 8MM LG, SS
13 6 2-001928 STANDOFF, M/F, 8MM HEX, 25mm LG, M4X0.7 THREAD
14 8 1-11459F-014M SCREW, BUTTON HEAD, SOCKET, M5X0.8 X 14MM LG, SS
5 15 8 1-11455F-006M SCREW, BUTTON HEAD, SOCKET, M3X0.5 X 6MM LG, SS
1 D
16 20 1-11157F-010M SCREW, CAP, SOCKET HEAD, M4X0.7 X 10MM LG, SS
17 10 1-11155F-014M SCREW, CAP, SOCKET HEAD, M3X0.5 X 14MM LG, SS
(RECEIVER)
18 4 1-11155F-012M SCREW, CAP, SOCKET HEAD, M3X0.5 X 12MM LG, SS
17
2
18
4
(TRANSMITTER)
4 14 10 16 2 13 17
2 4 2 14 14 6 2
14 9 8 2 16 16 1 3 7 15 12 6
4 2 2 2 2 4 2 2 1 8 8 1
D DMF 5-10-19 1922 REPLACED 3-002709, 2-002167 WITH 3-008254; CHANGED QTY:
29638A1 (16) WAS (18), 1-11157F-010M (20) WAS (22)
Vaulted
2 PLACE DIMS # .02 # 0,51 10175 PHILIPP PARKWAY - STREETSBORO, OH 44241
3 PLACE DIMS # .005 # 0,10
ANGULAR # 1/2 $
DRAWING SIZE SCALE DRAWN BY BOM REFERENCE NUMBER
D
NOTICE: THIS DOCUMENT CONTAINS PROPRIETARY INFORMATION NAME: LDC
AND IT SHALL NOT BE USED OR REPRODUCED OR ITS CONTENT
DISCLOSED, IN WHOLE OR PART, WITHOUT THE PRIOR WRITTEN 13/64 DATE: 06-07-17
CONSENT OF AUTOMATED PACKAGING SYSTEMS INC.
3-005593 D
THIRD ANGLE
to be RoHS Compliant INCH [MM] PROJECTION KIT CE, AB 500
ITEM QTY PART NO. DESCRIPTION
1 4 29638A1 MOUNT, CABLE TIE
2 1 3-005224 ASSY, PRESSURE SENSOR W/ PLUG 10 1 19 4 11 16 20 17
3 1 3-003532 ASSY, PRESSURE SENSOR W/ PLUG 1 1 1 1 3 2 2 2 19
4 1 3-003356 BRACKET, NEEDLE, AB 500 1 1
5 1 3-003351 ASSY, VALVE, SEAL BAR HOME 1
6 1 3-003118 ASSY, MOUNTING, VALVE MANIFOLD, F12 18
7 6 2-002843 CLAMP, DUAL TUBING FOR 1/4 (6mm) OD 6
8 2 2-002702 VALVE, SOLENOID, 3/2 NC, EXT PILOT, SILENCER, 24VDC
9 1 2-002701 FITTING, 45DEG ELBOW, 6MM TUBE, R1/4
7
10 1 2-002276 FITTING, BULKHEAD, ELBOW, 10mm 6
11 3 2-002231 VALVE, NEEDLE, 6MM INLINE, 8MM BODY
12 2 2-002186 FITTING, TEE, UNEQUAL UNION, 10mm - 6mm
13 1 2-002010 PLUG, BLANKING, 6mm TUBE
14 3 2-002007 FITTING, WYE UNION, REDUCING, 6-4mm
15 2 2-002006 FITTING, WYE UNION, 6mm
16 4 1-23155F WASHER, LOCK, INTERNAL TOOTH, M3, SS
17 2 1-11459F-010M SCREW, BUTTON HEAD, SOCKET, M5X0.8 X 10MM LG, SS
18 6 1-11457F-016M SCREW, BUTTON HEAD, SOCKET, M4X0.7 X 16MM LG, SS
19 4 1-11157F-010M SCREW, CAP, SOCKET HEAD, M4X0.7 X 10MM LG, SS 12
2
20 4 1-11155F-050M SCREW, CAP, SOCKET HEAD, M3X0.5 X 50MM LG, SS
9
14 1
14 3 1
1 14
1 1
13 20
1 15 2
1 16
1 2 2
K 8
2
19
2
5 2
1 1
15
1
6
1
K
ALTERNATE ASSEMBLY LOCATIONS
LEFT HAND BAGGER
SCALE 1/4
DATE
42
ECN
NEW DRAWING
DESCRIPTION
1 6 1-11457F-016M SCREW, BUTTON HEAD, SOCKET, M4X0.7 X 16MM LG, SS ITEM QTY PART NO. DESCRIPTION UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED
21 1 2-002746 FITTING, AIR ELBOW FIXED FLOW R1/4 TO 6mm TUBE x 1.4mm IRIS 1 6 1-11457F-016M SCREW, BUTTON HEAD, SOCKET, M4X0.7 X 16MM LG, SS TOLERANCE
1 PLACE DIMS
INCHES
# .1
mm
# 2,5
Vaulted
2 PLACE DIMS # .02 # 0,51 10175 PHILIPP PARKWAY - STREETSBORO, OH 44241
21 1 2-002523 FITTING, PLUG-IN STRAIGHT, 8mm - 6mm
3 PLACE DIMS # .005 # 0,10
ANGULAR # 1/2 $
DRAWING SIZE SCALE DRAWN BY BOM REFERENCE NUMBER
22 1 2-002520 FITTING, AIR ELBOW FIXED FLOW R1/4 TO 8mm TUBE x 1.0mm IRIS E
NOTICE: THIS DOCUMENT CONTAINS PROPRIETARY INFORMATION NAME: MDS
AND IT SHALL NOT BE USED OR REPRODUCED OR ITS CONTENT
DISCLOSED, IN WHOLE OR PART, WITHOUT THE PRIOR WRITTEN 3/8 DATE: 07-14-15
CONSENT OF AUTOMATED PACKAGING SYSTEMS INC.
ASSY, PNEUMATIC
DRAWING NO. SHEET 1 OF 1 REV
3-003138 K
THIRD ANGLE
to be RoHS Compliant INCH [MM] PROJECTION ROUTING KIT, AB500
ITEM QTY PART NO. DESCRIPTION
1 2 656084A1 BAR, BUS GROUNDING
2 1 29996A1 TERM,WAGO,NO.LABELS,1-50(2SET) (NOT SHOWN)
3 1 29113A1 OUTLET, IEC SCREW ON QUICK CONNECT TERM
REFERENCE: FUSES ON POWER KIT
4 1 27483A2 DECAL, ELECTRICAL SHOCK 1 1/4 IN.
5 4 27144A1 LABEL, GROUND FUSING FOR 100V AND 120V
6 1 200280A1 DECAL, PE 3/8 X 3/8 LOCATION PART NO. DESCRIPTION
7 1 3-008049 ASSY, SHIELD BUSBAR CLAMP 1 27014A8 FUSE, 5 AMP CC, TIME DELAY
8 1 3-007869 PLATE, MOUNT, MOV BOARD, AB500 2 27014A8 FUSE, 5 AMP CC, TIME DELAY
9 1 3-007215-X ASSY, AC INPUT MOV BOARD POPULATED
41 3 5 4 3 2 1 3 27014A14 FUSE, 15 AMP CC, TIME DELAY
10 1 3-005066-002 ASSY, MAIN CONTROL BOARD, 2 MOTOR DRIVES 4 27014A14 FUSE, 15 AMP CC, TIME DELAY
2 1
11 1 3-004971 PANEL, CONTROL BOARD 5 27014A17 FUSE, 30 AMP CC, TIME DELAY
12 1 3-004884 ASSY, CHASSIS, EBOX, AB SERIES
13 1 3-004845 ASSY, DIN RAIL, AB SERIES EBOX
FUSING FOR 200V AND 220V
14 1 3-004753 PANEL, MOUNTING MAIN EBOX 1 27014A5 FUSE, 2.5 AMP CC, TIME DELAY
15 1 3-004523-2 DECAL, EBOX DOOR, AB500, CONTROL BOARD SIDE 2 27014A5 FUSE, 2.5 AMP CC, TIME DELAY
16 1 3-004523-1 DECAL, EBOX DOOR, AB500, POWER SUPPLY SIDE 3 27014A10 FUSE, 7.0 AMP CC, TIME DELAY
17 1 3-003705 ASSY, EBOX COVER W/CAPTIVE FASTENERS 4 27014A14 FUSE, 15 AMP CC, TIME DELAY
18 1 3-003513 PLATE, CONNECT BOARD 34 5 27014A17 FUSE, 30 AMP CC, TIME DELAY
1
19 1 3-002674 COVER, BATTERY MOUNT DETAIL A
20 1 3-002595 ASSY, MOTOR CABLE CLAMP SCALE 1/1
29
1 8
1 B
25
4
5
1
1 34 38
1 2 8
27 43
1 4
5
1
34 30 43
1 1 2
21
4 4
1
20 43
1 2
32
44
1
4 18 39
36 31 1 3
4 1
22 39
35 1 5
4 7
B 1
45
B 2
NOTES:
36 1. USE FIXTURE 3-004977 FOR ELECTRICAL ROUTING
B
2
35
B
2
17
1
12 ADDED 3-007215-X, 3-007869, 3-008049,
1-11159F-008M (2); CHANGED QTY- 1-33157F (7)
B DMF 3-1-19 1790
1 WAS (6), 1-16155F-006M (30) WAS (26),
1-22159F (6) WAS (4), 1-22159F (6) WAS (4)
TOLERANCE INCHES mm
1 PLACE DIMS # .1 # 2,5
Vaulted
2 PLACE DIMS # .02 # 0,51 10175 PHILIPP PARKWAY - STREETSBORO, OH 44241
3 PLACE DIMS # .005 # 0,10
ANGULAR # 1/2 $
DRAWING SIZE SCALE DRAWN BY BOM REFERENCE NUMBER
E
NOTICE: THIS DOCUMENT CONTAINS PROPRIETARY INFORMATION
---
NAME: LDC
AND IT SHALL NOT BE USED OR REPRODUCED OR ITS CONTENT
DISCLOSED, IN WHOLE OR PART, WITHOUT THE PRIOR WRITTEN 5/8 DATE: 06-07-17
CONSENT OF AUTOMATED PACKAGING SYSTEMS INC.
3-005591 B
THIRD ANGLE
to be RoHS Compliant INCH [MM] PROJECTION CONTROL CE, AB500
ITEM QTY PART NO. DESCRIPTION
1 1 3-002577 RAIL, DIN 35mm X 15MM X 12" LG
2 5 29496A1 FUSE, HOLDER 10 X 38 CLASS CC
3 1 27355A1 FILTER, MULTI-STAGE, 20A
4 2 200716A1 BRACKET, TERMINAL RAIL END, 6MM W
5 1 200689A1 DIVIDER, TERMINAL BLOCK BLACK 2004 SERIES
6 4 200688A1 BLOCK, TERMINAL BLACK 2004 SERIES 4 WIRE
7 2 2-002474 TERMINAL BLOCK, JUMPER 2- POLE 2006 SERIES
8 1 2-002472 TERM. BLOCK, DIVIDER/END PLATE 2006 SERIES 3 POS
9 4 2-002471 TERMINAL BLOCK, 2006 SERIES 3 WIRE, 20-8AWG
10 1 2-002115 CONTACTOR, E-STOP WITH N.O. AUX CONTACT
11 1 2-002113 RELAY, SAFETY, 24VDC, ONE DUAL CHANNEL INPUT
C
7
CONNECTS COLUMNS 1 & 2
1
3
1
7
MACHINE SURFACES TO BE NO GREATER THAN 125 [3,2]
UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED
C CONNECTS COLUMNS 2 & 3 PART MUST BE FREE OF BURRS AND SHARP EDGES
1 TOLERANCE INCHES mm
1 PLACE DIMS # .1 # 2,5
Vaulted
C
NOTICE: THIS DOCUMENT CONTAINS PROPRIETARY INFORMATION
---
NAME: DMF
AND IT SHALL NOT BE USED OR REPRODUCED OR ITS CONTENT
DISCLOSED, IN WHOLE OR PART, WITHOUT THE PRIOR WRITTEN 0.625 DATE: 9-15-16
Fabricated & Documented USE FIXTURE 3-004977 FOR CABLE KIT WIRING
CONSENT OF AUTOMATED PACKAGING SYSTEMS INC.
TITLE DRAWING NO. SHEET 1 OF 1 REV
ASSY, DIN RAIL,
3-004845 C
THIRD ANGLE
to be RoHS Compliant INCH [MM] PROJECTION AB SERIES EBOX
ITEM QTY PART NO. DESCRIPTION
FASTENER TORQUE REQUIREMENTS 1 1 3-004897 ASSY, CABLE, HEAT WIRE BOARD THERMOCOUPLE
TIGHTEN ALL FASTENERS PER TABLE UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED.
MINIMUM TORQUE SHALL BE 85% OF LISTED MAXIMUM TORQUE. 2 1 3-003397 GAP PAD, HEAT SPREADER, HOTWIRE
SIZE MAX TORQUE (IN-LBF) 3 1 3-003386 COVER, HOTWIRE BOARD
M3 X 0.5 9.0 4 2 3-003310 GAP PAD, THERMAL CLAMP, HOTWIRE
5 1 3-003309 PLATE, THERMAL CLAMP, HOTWIRE
NOTED BOARD MOUNTING FASTENERS
1 6 1 3-003305 PLATE, THERMAL CLAMP, HOTWIRE
HAVE TORQUE REQUIREMENTS
10 7 1 3-002001-X ASSY, HEAT STICK CONTROL PCB
1 SCREW FOR GROUNDING
E
8 1 2-002623 STANDOFF, M/F, 6MM HEX, M3X0.5, 22MM LG, NYLON
2
6 9 4 2-002233 STANDOFF, M/F, 6MM HEX, 25mm LG, M3X0.5 THREAD, SS
1
1
10 1 1-11157F-006M SCREW, CAP, SOCKET HEAD, M4X0.7 X 6MM LG, SS
11 4 1-11155F-014M SCREW, CAP, SOCKET HEAD, M3X0.5 X 14MM LG, SS
12 5 1-11155F-010M SCREW, CAP, SOCKET HEAD, M3X0.5 X 10MM LG, SS
13 5 1-11155F-006M SCREW, CAP, SOCKET HEAD, M3X0.5 X 6MM LG, SS
7
9 1
E 1
4
12
5
3
1
13
4
1
R
MACHINE SURFACES TO BE NO GREATER THAN 125 [3,2]
1 1 1 ANGULAR # 1/2 $
DRAWING SIZE SCALE DRAWN BY BOM REFERENCE NUMBER
C
NOTICE: THIS DOCUMENT CONTAINS PROPRIETARY INFORMATION
E
NAME: MDS
1
AND IT SHALL NOT BE USED OR REPRODUCED OR ITS CONTENT
DISCLOSED, IN WHOLE OR PART, WITHOUT THE PRIOR WRITTEN 1/1 DATE: 09-18-15
13 CONSENT OF AUTOMATED PACKAGING SYSTEMS INC.
3-003306 E
THIRD ANGLE
to be RoHS Compliant INCH [MM] PROJECTION THERMAL MOUNTING
ITEM QTY PART NO. DESCRIPTION
1 1 29910A3 SWITCH, PUSHBUTTON, MOMENTARY, ILLUMINATED BLUE 1 NO
8 TIGHTEN PANEL MOUNT KIT (INCLUDED WITH ITEM 8): 2 1 29910A1 SWITCH, PUSHBUTTON, MOMENTARY, ILLUMINATED WHITE 1 NO
1 -MINIMUM TORQUE: 0.28 Nm (2.5 in-lbf) 3 1 29907A1 SWITCH, PUSHBUTTON, RED 22mm, EMERGENCY STOP 1NC
-MAXIMUM TORQUE: 0.45 Nm (4.0 in-lbf)
B 4 2 29638A1 MOUNT, CABLE TIE
5 1 27144A1 LABEL, GROUND
INSTALL BUTTONS IN ORIENTATION SHOWN
6 1 200189A1 SWITCH, CONTACT BLOCK, NC
2
1 7 1 200188A1 SWITCH, CONTACT BLOCK, NO
B 8 1 4-001098-X_X_X ASSY, LINUX HMI, PROGRAMMED
12 9 1 3-004648 PANEL, WIRE INLET, HMI
1 10 2 3-004608 BLOCK, HMI PIVOT
B
11 1 3-004606 BRACKET, HMI FACE
13
2 12 1 3-004595 PLATE, HMI FACE
13 2 3-004587-004 STANDOFF, ROUND, 0.5" OD, AL, M5x0.8, 1.47" LONG
14 2 3-004587-002 STANDOFF, ROUND, 0.5" OD, AL, M5x0.8, 2.61" LONG
15 1 3-004582 ASSY, COVER, HMI BACK, F22V, VF
1 16 1 3-004312-X ASSY, HMI CONNECTOR BOARD POPULATED
1
17 1 3-003477 OVERLAY, HMI HARD BUTTONS
18 1 3-003476 BRACKET, WEBSERVER
SCALE 3/4
3 19 1 2-003070 COVER, CAP FOR ETHERNET RJ45 CONNECTORS
1
20 1 2-002169 HANDLE, NYLON, ADJUSTABLE, M8 x 1.25, 20mm STUD
21 4 1-33159F NUT, HEX, NYLON LOCK, M5X0.8, SS
22
1 B 22 6 1-33157F NUT, HEX, NYLON LOCK, M4X0.7, SS
23 4 1-22161F WASHER, SPLIT LOCK, M6, SS
24 2 1-15108F-008M SCREW, SHOULDER, 8MM DIA X 8MM LG, SS, ISO 7379
25 1 1-11457F-008M SCREW, BUTTON HEAD, SOCKET, M4X0.7 X 8MM LG, SS
18 27
26 4 1-11161F-016M SCREW, CAP, SOCKET HEAD, M6X1.0 X 16MM LG, SS
1 4
27 4 1-11157F-005M SCREW, CAP, SOCKET HEAD, M4X0.7 X 5MM LG, SS
17 28 4 1-11155F-006M SCREW, CAP, SOCKET HEAD, M3X0.5 X 6MM LG, SS
1
22 ITEMS NOT SHOWN
1
ITEM QTY PART NO. DESCRIPTION
21 11
29 1 3-006684 KIT, CABLE, AB500/600 DETACHABLE HMI
4 1
14
2
6
1
7 16 28
1 1 4
24 9 22
2 1 2
20
1
26 23 10
4 4 2
25
1
5
1
B 22 4
2 2 15
1
19
1
REMOVED (1) EA OF 29638A1 & 1-33157F
B GHM 2-11-19 1818 ROTATED SWITCHES 180 $
TOLERANCE INCHES mm
1 PLACE DIMS # .1 # 2,5
Vaulted
2 PLACE DIMS # .02 # 0,51 10175 PHILIPP PARKWAY - STREETSBORO, OH 44241
3 PLACE DIMS # .005 # 0,10
ANGULAR # 1/2 $
DRAWING SIZE SCALE DRAWN BY BOM REFERENCE NUMBER
D
NOTICE: THIS DOCUMENT CONTAINS PROPRIETARY INFORMATION
---
NAME: LDC
AND IT SHALL NOT BE USED OR REPRODUCED OR ITS CONTENT
DISCLOSED, IN WHOLE OR PART, WITHOUT THE PRIOR WRITTEN 1/2 DATE: 06-19-18
CONSENT OF AUTOMATED PACKAGING SYSTEMS INC.
ASSY, HMI
DRAWING NO. SHEET 1 OF 1 REV
3-006612 B
THIRD ANGLE
to be RoHS Compliant INCH [MM] PROJECTION DISPLAY
ITEM QTY PART NO. DESCRIPTION
1 4 3-003113 GASKET, HMI SUPPORT LOCKING
2 1 3-003112 PLATE, HMI MOUNT
3 1 3-003110 BLOCK, HMI MOUNT MAIN
4 1 3-003108 BRACKET, HMI MOUNT STRAIGHT
5 1 3-003107 BRACKET, HMI MOUNT
6 2 3-003106 BRACKET, HMI MOUNT W/ STUD
7 1 3-002923 BAR, HMI SUPPORT ARM
8 2 2-002170-M8 T-NUT, 3030 SERIES, M8x1.25
9 2 2-002168 HANDLE, NYLON, ADJUSTABLE, M8 x 1.25, FEMALE
D 10 2 1-11163F-016M SCREW, CAP, SOCKET HEAD, M8X1.25 X 16MM LG, SS
11 8 1-11159F-010M SCREW, CAP, SOCKET HEAD, M5X0.8 X 10MM LG, SS
9 4
1 1 11
2
1
1
3
DETAIL A 1
SCALE 3/2
SEE DETAIL A
11 1
2 1
9
1
5
1
6
1 1
D 1 SCALE 3/8
11
10 2
2 2
1
1 1
8
2
7 D CAS 10-30-18 1711 1-11163F-016M WAS 1-11163F-012M
FINISH NONE
11 REV BY DATE ECN DESCRIPTION
6
MACHINE SURFACES TO BE NO GREATER THAN 125 [3,2]
UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED
PART MUST BE FREE OF BURRS AND SHARP EDGES
1 TOLERANCE INCHES mm
1 PLACE DIMS # .1 # 2,5
Vaulted
C
NOTICE: THIS DOCUMENT CONTAINS PROPRIETARY INFORMATION
3-003469
NAME: LDC
AND IT SHALL NOT BE USED OR REPRODUCED OR ITS CONTENT
DISCLOSED, IN WHOLE OR PART, WITHOUT THE PRIOR WRITTEN 1/2 DATE: 3-14-16
CONSENT OF AUTOMATED PACKAGING SYSTEMS INC.
3-003470 D
THIRD ANGLE
to be RoHS Compliant INCH [MM] PROJECTION ARM
ITEMS NOT SHOWN ITEM QTY PART NO. DESCRIPTION
QTY PART NO. DESCRIPTION 1 1 656084A1 BAR, BUS GROUNDING
( .19 ) 1 3-003717 KIT, WEIGHT STD POWERED UNWIND 2 1 595101A4 DECAL, BAG LOCATION
3 2 591091A1 SPRING, EXTENTION NIP
4 3 55015A33 ASSY, ROLLER 3/4 OD X 14-7/8 LG
SHAFT 5 5 55015A23 ASSY, ROLLER 3/4 OD X 13-3/8 LG
REFERENCE ITEMS ONLY
SILVER OR BLACK SIDE EXPOSED 6 1 55015A21 ASSY, ROLLER 3/4 OD X 14-3/4 LG
SEE NOTE 1 QTY PART NO. DESCRIPTION
7 2 29638A1 MOUNT, CABLE TIE
1 3-005014 KIT, CABLE, AB500 LOWERED POWERED UNWIND
8 10 28748A1 FASTENER, RATCHET NYLON 1/4 DIA X 1-1/16 LG
1 3-005015 KIT, CABLE, AB500 RAISED POWERED UNWIND
9 2 28352A1 MAGNET, SENSOR 1/4 OD X 1/4 LG
10 1 28351A1 BEARING, RULON LR 5/16 ID X 1/2 OD X 3/8 LG
RED SIDE EXPOSED 11 1 27144A1 LABEL, GROUND
SEE NOTE 1 12 2 24722A5 BEARING, FLANGED
13 4" 21679B2 GROMMET, NYTRIM EXTRUDED BLACK
5 16
DETAIL A 1 1
14 1 20521A1 BELT, TIMING 1/5 PITCH 3/8 WIDE 110 TEETH
12 46
ALIGN ETCHING
1 2
45 WITH "0" MARK FASTENER TORQUE REQUIREMENTS
6 58 35
TIGHTEN ALL FASTENERS PER TABLE UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED.
MINIMUM TORQUE SHALL BE 85% OF LISTED MAXIMUM TORQUE.
2 1 SIZE MAX TORQUE (IN-LBF)
M2 X 0.4 2.5
53 63 M2.5 X 0.45 5.1
4 4 38 M3 X 0.5 9.0
1
M4 X 0.7 21.0
M5 X 0.8 42.4
39 M6 X 1.0 72.1
33 64 1
1 2 M8 X 1.25 175.0
M10 X 1.5 346.4
M12 X 1.75 604.1
34 59
1 1
17 14
1 1 28
55 49 21 10 1
4 4 1 1
18 62
1 2 N CAS 11-30-17 1299 ADDED SPARE PARTS P/N
TOLERANCE INCHES mm
Vaulted
2 PLACE DIMS # .02 # 0,51 10175 PHILIPP PARKWAY - STREETSBORO, OH 44241
SEE DETAIL A 3 PLACE DIMS # .005 # 0,10
2 ANGULAR # 1/2 $
DRAWING SIZE SCALE DRAWN BY BOM REFERENCE NUMBER
E
NOTICE: THIS DOCUMENT CONTAINS PROPRIETARY INFORMATION
-
NAME: DMF
AND IT SHALL NOT BE USED OR REPRODUCED OR ITS CONTENT
DISCLOSED, IN WHOLE OR PART, WITHOUT THE PRIOR WRITTEN 5/8 DATE: 1-30-15
CONSENT OF AUTOMATED PACKAGING SYSTEMS INC.
ASSY, POWERED
DRAWING NO. SHEET 1 OF 2 REV
3-001800 N
THIRD ANGLE
to be RoHS Compliant INCH [MM] PROJECTION UNWIND, 12"
ITEMS NOT SHOWN ITEM QTY PART NO. DESCRIPTION
QTY PART NO. DESCRIPTION 1 1 656084A1 BAR, BUS GROUNDING
1 3-003717 KIT, WEIGHT STD POWERED UNWIND 2 1 595101A4 DECAL, BAG LOCATION
3 2 591091A1 SPRING, EXTENTION NIP
REFERENCE ITMES ONLY 4 3 55015A33 ASSY, ROLLER 3/4 OD X 14-7/8 LG
QTY PART NO. DESCRIPTION 5 5 55015A23 ASSY, ROLLER 3/4 OD X 13-3/8 LG
1 3-005014 KIT, CABLE, AB500 LOWERED POWERED UNWIND 6 1 55015A21 ASSY, ROLLER 3/4 OD X 14-3/4 LG
1 3-005015 KIT, CABLE, AB500 RAISED POWERED UNWIND 7 2 29638A1 MOUNT, CABLE TIE
8 10 28748A1 FASTENER, RATCHET NYLON 1/4 DIA X 1-1/16 LG
9 2 28352A1 MAGNET, SENSOR 1/4 OD X 1/4 LG
10 1 28351A1 BEARING, RULON LR 5/16 ID X 1/2 OD X 3/8 LG
11 1 27144A1 LABEL, GROUND
16 12 2 24722A5 BEARING, FLANGED
1
13 2 21679B2 GROMMET, NYTRIM EXTRUDED BLACK
14 1 20521A1 BELT, TIMING 1/5 PITCH 3/8 WIDE 110 TEETH
5 15 1 3-004592 COVER, GAP FILLING POWERED UNWIND
1 16 1 3-004575 ASSY, COVER, UNWIND, LH, VF
17 1 3-004574 ASSY, COVER, UNWIND, RH, VF
18 1 3-004270 GUARD, INTERNAL UNWIND DRIVE PULLEYS
19 1 3-003720-002 BRACKET, MOUNTING EXTENSION UNWIND EXIT ROLLER LH
20 1 3-003720-001 BRACKET, MOUNTING EXTENSION UNWIND EXIT ROLLER RH
21 1 3-003625-X ASSY, DANCER TRIPLE HALL EFFECT BOARD
22 1 3-003087 LATCH, DANCER OPEN
23 1 3-003084 PIN, PIVOT DANCER LATCH
8 24 1 3-002454 ASSY, MOTOR SERVO NEMA23 W/ENCODER WIRED
2 25 1 3-001807 ROLLER, NIP 1.12"DIA X 13.37"LG
26 1 3-001806 SHAFT, PIVOT DANCER
27 1 3-001805 ASSY, FRAME, UNWIND, 12"
69 28 1 3-001804 SHAFT, BAG ROLL REMOVABLE
2" PER SIDE 1 29 1 3-001803 ROLL, NIP RUBBER COVERED
13
ADHERE WITH
2 30 3 3-001802 SHAFT, ROLLER
LOCTITE 441 37 ATTACH MOTOR GROUND 31 1 3-001801 SHAFT, ROLLER SPRING LOADED
2 LUG HERE
32 5 32 1 3-001799 ARM, DANCER AZ LOAD
1 4 33 1 3-001796 PLATE, INFEED SUPPORT
54 65 24 34 1 3-001789 PULLEY, TIMING, 12T, MODIFIED
4 4 1
35 1 3-001788 PULLEY, TIMING 1/2" BORE
47 36 1 3-001783 SPACER, DANCER ARM
1
57 31 37 2 3-001782 PLATE, MOTOR CLAMP
1 1 38 1 3-001780 ASSY, HUB
8 39 1 3-001779 ASSY, HUB, BAG ROLL UNWIND, MODIFIED
8 36 19 67 40 1 3-001777 PLATE, ARM, POWER UNWIND
1 1 2 25
41 1 2-002485 HANDLE, ADJUSTABLE 40mm LG M6X1.0 X 15mm STUD YELLOW
1
42 1 2-002452 ENCODER, OPTICAL E5 4096CPR W/INDEX, .313" SHAFT
43 2 1-61512F RING, RETAINING, E-CLIP, 9MM DIA. NOM, DIN 6799, SS
44 2 1-61510F RING, RETAINING, E-CLIP, 7MM DIA. NOM, DIN 6799, SS
45 7 1-61508F RING, RETAINING, E-CLIP, 5MM DIA. NOM, DIN 6799, SS
46 2 1-33161F NUT, HEX, NYLON LOCK, M6X1.0, SS
47 1 1-33159F NUT, HEX, NYLON LOCK, M5X0.8, SS
48 1 1-33157F NUT, HEX, NYLON LOCK, M4X0.7, SS
45 3 49 4 1-23153F WASHER, LOCK, INTERNAL TOOTH, M2.5, SS
1 2
29 43 50 1 1-22171F WASHER, SPLIT LOCK, M16, SS
22 1 2
51 2 1-22161F WASHER, SPLIT LOCK, M6, SS
1 52 1 1-22159F WASHER, SPLIT LOCK, M5, SS
6
1 23 53 4 1-21163F WASHER, FLAT, M8, SS
27 1 51 64 12 54 4 1-21159F WASHER, FLAT, M5, SS
4 2 2 1
1 3 55 4 1-16253F-006M SCREW, SLOTTED PAN HEAD, M2.5X0.45, 6MM LG, SS
56 2 1-16157F-010M SCREW, PHILLIPS PAN HEAD, M4X0.7, 10MM LG, SS
52 57 1 1-15106B-012M SCREW, SHOULDER, 6MM DIA X 12MM LG, BLACK OXIDE, ISO 7379
1 58 2 1-14159F-008M SCREW, SET, CUP POINT, SOCKET HEAD, M5X0.8 X 8MM, SS
FOR SPARE PARTS ORDER 59 1 1-14157F-008M SCREW, SET, CUP POINT, SOCKET HEAD, M4X0.7 X 8MM, SS
PART NUMBER 3-006026 H
67 20 66 60 1 1-12171F-045M SCREW, CAP, HEX HEAD, M16X2.0 X 45MM LG, SS
2 1 1
42 70 61 4 1-11463F-016M SCREW, BUTTON HEAD, SOCKET, M8X1.25 X 16MM LG, SS
1 2
62 2 1-11459F-010M SCREW, BUTTON HEAD, SOCKET, M5X0.8 X 10MM LG, SS
63 4 1-11163F-020M SCREW, CAP, SOCKET HEAD, M8X1.25 X 20MM LG, SS
64 4 1-11161F-012M SCREW, CAP, SOCKET HEAD, M6X1.0 X 12MM LG, SS
11
1 65 4 1-11159F-016M SCREW, CAP, SOCKET HEAD, M5X0.8 X 16MM LG, SS
30
3 66 1 1-11159F-010M SCREW, CAP, SOCKET HEAD, M5X0.8 X 10MM LG, SS
48 ALIGN ETCHING 67 4 1-11159F-006M SCREW, CAP, SOCKET HEAD, M5X0.8 X 6MM LG, SS
1 WITH THIS SURFACE 68 2 1-11157F-010M SCREW, CAP, SOCKET HEAD, M4X0.7 X 10MM LG, SS
44
2 7 68 69 1 1-11157F-006M SCREW, CAP, SOCKET HEAD, M4X0.7 X 6MM LG, SS
56 1 2 2
70 2 1-11153F-006M SCREW, CAP, SOCKET HEAD, M2.5X0.45 X 6MM LG, SS
2 1
45 12 46
6 1 2
58 35
2 1
FASTENER TORQUE REQUIREMENTS
TIGHTEN ALL FASTENERS PER TABLE UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED.
53 63 60 50 MINIMUM TORQUE SHALL BE 85% OF LISTED MAXIMUM TORQUE.
4 4 1 1 SIZE MAX TORQUE (IN-LBF)
M2 X 0.4 2.5
M2.5 X 0.45 5.1
M3 X 0.5 9.0
ALIGN ETCHING 40 61 M4 X 0.7 21.0
WITH "0" MARK 1 2 M5 X 0.8 42.4
M6 X 1.0 72.1
15 61
1 2 33 64 M8 X 1.25 175.0
2 1 2 M10 X 1.5 346.4
34 59 1 M12 X 1.75 604.1
14 1 1
1
55 49 21 10
18 62 4 4 1 1
1 2
41
1
1 1
M GHM 10-11-17 1235 SEE SHEET 1 OF 2
26 38
1 1
K GHM 7-11-17 1138 SEE SHEET 1 OF 2
9 SEE DETAIL A 39
MATERIAL SEE B/M
TOLERANCE INCHES mm
1 PLACE DIMS # .1 # 2,5
Vaulted
2 PLACE DIMS # .02 # 0,51 10175 PHILIPP PARKWAY - STREETSBORO, OH 44241
3 PLACE DIMS # .005 # 0,10
ANGULAR # 1/2 $
DRAWING SIZE SCALE DRAWN BY BOM REFERENCE NUMBER
E
NOTICE: THIS DOCUMENT CONTAINS PROPRIETARY INFORMATION
-
NAME: DMF
AND IT SHALL NOT BE USED OR REPRODUCED OR ITS CONTENT
DISCLOSED, IN WHOLE OR PART, WITHOUT THE PRIOR WRITTEN 5/8 DATE: 1-30-15
CONSENT OF AUTOMATED PACKAGING SYSTEMS INC.
ASSY, POWERED
DRAWING NO. SHEET 2 OF 2 REV
3-001800 N
THIRD ANGLE
to be RoHS Compliant INCH [MM] PROJECTION UNWIND, 12"
ITEM QTY PART NO. DESCRIPTION
1 1 3-003019 SHAFT, PRINTER PIVOT REAR SHORT
2 2 3-002960 BOSS, DAMPER PRINTER PIVOTING
3 1 3-002780 SHAFT,PIVOT PRINT HEAD, FRONT
4 1 3-002778-002 ASSY, PRINT HEAD STOP, LH
5 1 3-002778-001 ASSY, PRINT HEAD STOP, RH
6 2 3-002773 ASSY, BEARING BLOCK, PIVOT PRINTER, REAR
7 1 3-001900 ASSY, PRINTER LOCK HANDLE
8 2 3-001898 HOOK, LATCHING, PRINTER PIVOT
9 1 3-001896-2 BAR, LINKAGE, PRINTER PIVOT, LH
10 1 3-001896-1 BAR, LINKAGE, PRINTER PIVOT, RH
11 2 3-001894 BAR, MOUNT DAMPER REAR
5 22
12 2 2-002137 DAMPER, 100 LBS, 4" STROKE, 5/16-18 THREAD STUDS, EXTENSION
1 2
24 13 2 2-001925 BUMPER, M8X1.25 x 15MM STUD, 70 DURO.
1 14 2 2-001853-121 BEARING, BALL, SHIELDED, 6mm ID x 13mm OD x 5mm, SS
3 15 2 2-001851-064 BEARING, BALL, SHILEDED, 10mm ID x 22mm OD x 6mm, SS
1 16 2 2-001379 SHIM, 10MM ID, 16MM OD, 2MM THK, SS
17 2 1-63152A-006M KEY, 3MM X 3MM, 6MM LG, STEEL, ZINC PLATED
18 2 1-61110F RING, RETAINING, EXTERNAL, 10 MM DIA SHAFT, SS
19
19 2 1-61106F RING, RETAINING, EXTERNAL, 6 MM DIA SHAFT, SS
2 14
2 20 2 1-22163F WASHER, SPLIT LOCK, M8, SS
10 4
1 C 21 2 1-21163F WASHER, FLAT, M8, SS
1
18 22 4 1-15106F-016M SCREW, SHOULDER, 6MM DIA X 16MM LG, SS, ISO 7379
2 23 4 1-11659F-012M SCREW, FLAT HEAD, SOCKET, M5X0.8 X 12MM LG, SS
17
2 24 1 1-11461F-022M SCREW, BUTTON HEAD, SOCKET, M6X1.0 X 22MM LG, SS
25 2 1-11163F-020M SCREW, CAP, SOCKET HEAD, M8X1.25 X 20MM LG, SS
26 4 1-11161A-014M SCREW, CAP, SOCKET HEAD, M6X1.0 X 14MM LG, ZINC PLATED
12
7
1
1
HANDLE LOCATION
CORRESPONDS 8
TO LEFT OR RIGHT-HAND 2 16
BAGGER 2 15 22
CONFIGURATION.
2 2
25
2
9
1
2
2
26
1 2
1 26
2
6 23
2 4 21
2 20
C 2 12
13
1
2 11
2
C LDC 07-18-16 618 ADDED 2X 1-21163F WASHERS
1-11161A-014M ADDED. 1-14161F-010M REMOVED.
B DAR 10/5/15 226 1-63152A-006M ADDED. 1-63152F-006M REMOVED.
TOLERANCE INCHES mm
1 PLACE DIMS # .1 # 2,5
Vaulted
2 PLACE DIMS # .02 # 0,51 10175 PHILIPP PARKWAY - STREETSBORO, OH 44241
3 PLACE DIMS # .005 # 0,10
ANGULAR # 1/2 $
DRAWING SIZE SCALE DRAWN BY BOM REFERENCE NUMBER
D
NOTICE: THIS DOCUMENT CONTAINS PROPRIETARY INFORMATION NAME: B.STINARD
AND IT SHALL NOT BE USED OR REPRODUCED OR ITS CONTENT
DISCLOSED, IN WHOLE OR PART, WITHOUT THE PRIOR WRITTEN 3/4 DATE: 6-11-15
CONSENT OF AUTOMATED PACKAGING SYSTEMS INC.
ASSY, LATCH
DRAWING NO. SHEET 1 OF 1 REV
3-003018 C
THIRD ANGLE
to be RoHS Compliant INCH [MM] PROJECTION PRINTER PIVOT, EXT
ITEM QTY PART NO. DESCRIPTION
1 1 597242A1 ASSY, SPINDLE SUPPLY W/ LOCKING KEYS & PLUG RH
20 ITEM
1 2 1 56994A1 SPRING, COIL
QTY 3 1 29740A1 CLAMP, CABLE "U" TYPE 11/16 DIA
40 BALLOON 4 2 29726A1 SPRING, COMPRESSION .300 OD X 1 LG X .032 WIRE
1 DESIGNATION
5 1 29638A1 MOUNT, CABLE TIE
6 1 29537A1 HINGE, BLACK ACETAL
7 1 28559A1 SPINDLE, RIBBON TAKE-UP CCW (LH)
48 69 6
2 4 1 8 4 27144A1 LABEL, GROUND
9 2 26705A1 WASHER, SPRING
10 1 3-008100 BRACKET, CABLE SUPPORT, AUTOLABEL
11
1 11 1 3-004570 ASSY, COVER, SIDE PRINTER, RH, VF
12 1 3-004426 SCREW, BHC M5 X 12mm LG, SS, MODIFIED
21
1 13 1 3-004050 ASSY, SOL VALVE HEAD DOWN W/ CABLE AND FITTINGS - 6mm
14 1 3-004048 ASSY, CYLINDER AIR HEAD DOWN 14mm BORE W/ FITTINGS
15 1 3-003867 BLOCK, PIVOT PRINTER
16 1 3-002522 PAD, WEAR HEAD DOWN CYLINDER NOSE
17 1 3-002521 NOSE, ROD END HEAD DOWN CYLINDER
18 1 3-002515 BLOCK, SUB MOUNTING HEAD DOWN VALVE
19 1 3-001936 BLOCK, VERTICAL HEAD ALIGNMENT
20 1 3-001931 COVER, DUST PRINTER RIBBON
67 39 21 1 3-001930 MOUNT, HANDLE AND DUSTCOVER FRONT
2 1 22 1 3-001929 BRACKET, REAR DUSTCOVER SUPPORT
58 23 1 3-001927 BLOCK, BELT TENSIONING
45
41 1
1 12 24 1 3-001926 GEAR, RIBBON TAKEUP DRIVE
1
1 25 1 3-001925 ROLLER, REAR RIBBON
26 1 3-001924 SHAFT, REAR RIBBON ROLLER
27 2 3-001920 BLOCK, HORIZONTAL HEAD ALIGNMENT
22 73 53
1 2 2 28 1 3-001919 PLATE, PRINT HEAD MOUNTING
52 68
2 2 29 1 3-001918 BLOCK, PIVOT PRINT HEAD
30 1 3-001917 SHAFT, PIVOT PRINT HEAD
31 1 3-001916 PULLEY, RIBBON DRIVE ROLLER LARGE
32 1 3-001915 ROLLER, RUBBER RIBBON DRIVE
33 1 3-001914 BRACKET, SIDE PIVOT BLOCK
52 34 1 3-001912 BLOCK, PIVOT PRINTER REAR
3 69
3 MOUNT CYLINDER 35 1 3-001911-001 PLATE, SIDE PRINTER RH
43 1 INTO HOLE PATTERN
1 DETAIL A 36 1 2-003136 GROMMET, SPLIT, LOCKING, 1" ID HOLE, BLACK NYLON
1 SCALE 1/1 AS SHOWN
37 2 2-001879 BEARING, FLANGED, 10MM ID X 22MM OD X 6MM LG
38 2 2-001378 THUMBSCREW, KEY DRIVE 10-32 X 1/2 LG BLACK SS
39 1 2-001376 MAGNET, FLAT RETAINING WITH COUNTERSUNK HOLE
40 1 2-001375 KNOB, KNURLED GRIP YELLOW 25MM X 22.5MM LG X M4
41 1 2-001374 HANDLE, PULL ALUM 7MM X 16MM OVAL X 102MM LG X M4X.7 THD
34 42 1 2-001373 COLLAR, CLAMP TWO-PIECE 10MM ID X 25.4 OD X 9MM WD STEEL
1 43 1 2-001372 LEVER, PLASTIC ADJUSTABLE YELLOW STEEL STUD M5 X 25MM
62
1 51 44 1 2-001368-017 BEARING, SLEEVE, PLAIN, 6MM ID x 9MM OD x 6MM , BRONZE
1 52 45 1 1-61507F RING, RETAINING, E-CLIP, 4MM DIA. NOM, DIN 6799, SS
61
59 49 3 69
2 46 1 1-61112F RING, RETAINING, EXTERNAL, 12 MM DIA SHAFT, SS
2 2 3 7
8 1 47 1 1-61110F RING, RETAINING, EXTERNAL, 10 MM DIA SHAFT, SS
1 48 2 1-33157F NUT, HEX, NYLON LOCK, M4X0.7, SS
35
36 49 7 1-23159F WASHER, LOCK, INTERNAL TOOTH, M5, SS
1
1 50 2 1-23157F WASHER, LOCK, INTERNAL TOOTH, M4, SS
51 1 1-22159F WASHER, SPLIT LOCK, M5, SS
50 70
52 10 1-22157F WASHER, SPLIT LOCK, M4, SS
2 1
53 6 1-22155F WASHER, SPLIT LOCK, M3, SS
25 54 2 1-21159F WASHER, FLAT, M5, SS
1
55 4 1-21157F WASHER, FLAT, M4, SS
37 56 1 1-15106F-006M SCREW, SHOULDER, 6MM DIA X 6MM LG, SS, ISO 7379
1 26 57 2 1-14157F-006M SCREW, SET, CUP POINT, SOCKET HEAD, M4X0.7 X 6MM, SS
1
58 1 1-11657F-016M SCREW, FLAT HEAD, SOCKET, M4X0.7 X 16MM LG, SS
32 59 2 1-11459F-020M SCREW, BUTTON HEAD, SOCKET, M5X0.8 X 20MM LG, SS
46
1 1 60 1 1-11457F-006M SCREW, BUTTON HEAD, SOCKET, M4X0.7 X 6MM LG, SS
30 37 61 4 1-11161F-020M SCREW, CAP, SOCKET HEAD, M6X1.0 X 20MM LG, SS
1 29 67 1
1 52 2 62 2 1-11159F-018M SCREW, CAP, SOCKET HEAD, M5X0.8 X 18MM LG, SS
2 63 1 1-11159F-014M SCREW, CAP, SOCKET HEAD, M5X0.8 X 14MM LG, SS
55
42 2 64 2 1-11159F-010M SCREW, CAP, SOCKET HEAD, M5X0.8 X 10MM LG, SS
1 33 61 65 2 1-11159F-008M SCREW, CAP, SOCKET HEAD, M5X0.8 X 8MM LG, SS
1 2
66 4 1-11157F-018M SCREW, CAP, SOCKET HEAD, M4X0.7 X 18MM LG, SS
67 4 1-11157F-016M SCREW, CAP, SOCKET HEAD, M4X0.7 X 16MM LG, SS
ASSEMBLE RETAINING RING 68 2 1-11157F-014M SCREW, CAP, SOCKET HEAD, M4X0.7 X 14MM LG, SS
IN THIS GROOVE (1ST FROM END) SEE DETAIL A 69 10 1-11157F-012M SCREW, CAP, SOCKET HEAD, M4X0.7 X 12MM LG, SS
70 4 1-11157F-008M SCREW, CAP, SOCKET HEAD, M4X0.7 X 8MM LG, SS
15 71 2 1-11155F-030M SCREW, CAP, SOCKET HEAD, M3X0.5 X 30MM LG, SS
BEND THIS LEG 90 $ OVER 19 14
TOP OF PIVOT BLOCK 2 1 72 4 1-11155F-012M SCREW, CAP, SOCKET HEAD, M3X0.5 X 12MM LG, SS
1 1 1
AFTER INSTALLATION 73 6 1-11155F-010M SCREW, CAP, SOCKET HEAD, M3X0.5 X 10MM LG, SS
74 2 1-11155F-008M SCREW, CAP, SOCKET HEAD, M3X0.5 X 8MM LG, SS
SEE 47 27
NOTE 1 2
70 71
FOR GROUND 2
1
USE FOR ITEMS NOT SHOWN
8
GROUNDING 1 QTY PART NO. DESCRIPTION
49 65 1 3-003876-011 ASSY, STRAP PRINTER PLATE TO PRINT HEAD
53 73 16 66 2 1
4 4 1 2 1 3-004871 KIT, TUBE ROUTING, ONESTEP PRINTER
64
4 18 2
8 2 66 1
1 17 2
1 DPI KITS (REF.)
PART NO. DESCRIPTION
72 55
2 8 3-002400-203 KIT, 203 DPI, AB H-CLASS PRINTER
4 1
70 3-002400-300 KIT, 300 DPI, AB H-CLASS PRINTER
9 13 2 3-002400-406 KIT, 406 DPI, AB H-CLASS PRINTER
2 1
28
FASTENER TORQUE REQUIREMENTS 1 54
2
TIGHTEN ALL FASTENERS PER TABLE UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED. 3
MINIMUM TORQUE SHALL BE 85% OF LISTED MAXIMUM TORQUE.
38 1 J DMF 04-10-19 1891 ADDED 3-008100, 1-11155F-008M (2)
SIZE MAX TORQUE (IN-LBF) 49 65
2 ADDED 27144A1 (4), 3-004426, 1-61507F,
M6 X 1.0 72.1 B LDC 03-21-16 499 REMOVED 3-003986 CABLE KIT (1)
3-004010-001
REV BY DATE ECN DESCRIPTION
M10 X 1.5 346.4 STRENGTH 1 MATERIAL SEE B/M
M12 X 1.75 604.1 LOCTITE
R
MACHINE SURFACES TO BE NO GREATER THAN 125 [3,2]
1 1 60 5 31 57
PART MUST BE FREE OF BURRS AND SHARP EDGES
1 TOLERANCE INCHES mm
1 1 1 2
1 PLACE DIMS # .1 # 2,5
Vaulted
2 PLACE DIMS # .02 # 0,51 10175 PHILIPP PARKWAY - STREETSBORO, OH 44241
3 PLACE DIMS # .005 # 0,10
49 62 ANGULAR # 1/2 $
DRAWING SIZE SCALE DRAWN BY BOM REFERENCE NUMBER
1 1
E
NOTICE: THIS DOCUMENT CONTAINS PROPRIETARY INFORMATION
-
NAME: DMF
AND IT SHALL NOT BE USED OR REPRODUCED OR ITS CONTENT
DISCLOSED, IN WHOLE OR PART, WITHOUT THE PRIOR WRITTEN 7/8 DATE: 1-19-16
CONSENT OF AUTOMATED PACKAGING SYSTEMS INC.
ASSY, PRINTER
DRAWING NO. SHEET 1 OF 2 REV
3-004010 J
THIRD ANGLE
to be RoHS Compliant INCH [MM] PROJECTION AB H-CLASS, CE
ITEM QTY PART NO. DESCRIPTION
40 20
1 1 ITEM 1 1 597242A2 ASSY, SPINDLE SUPPLY W/ LOCKING KEYS & PLUG RH
2 1 56994A1 SPRING, COIL
MOUNT CYLINDER INTO QTY 3 1 29740A1 CLAMP, CABLE "U" TYPE 11/16 DIA
HOLE PATTERN AS SHOWN
BALLOON 4 2 29726A1 SPRING, COMPRESSION .300 OD X 1 LG X .032 WIRE
DESIGNATION
5 1 29638A1 MOUNT, CABLE TIE
6 1 29537A1 HINGE, BLACK ACETAL
7 1 28559A2 SPINDLE, RIBBON TAKE-UP CCW (RH)
8 4 27144A1 LABEL, GROUND
9 2 26705A1 WASHER, SPRING
10 1 3-008100 BRACKET, CABLE SUPPORT, AUTOLABEL
11 1 3-004571 COVER, SIDE PRINTER, CE, RH
12 1 3-004426 SCREW, BHC M5 X 12mm LG, SS, MODIFIED
13 1 3-004050 ASSY, SOL VALVE HEAD DOWN W/ CABLE AND FITTINGS - 6mm
14 71 39
1 2 6 69 14 1 3-004048 ASSY, CYLINDER AIR HEAD DOWN 14mm BORE W/ FITTINGS
1 1 4
15 1 3-003867 BLOCK, PIVOT PRINTER
LOW STRENGTH SERVICEABLE 58 16 1 3-002522 PAD, WEAR HEAD DOWN CYLINDER NOSE
17 1
1 LOCTITE THIS PART 17 1 3-002521 NOSE, ROD END HEAD DOWN CYLINDER
ONTO THE CYLINDER
18 1 3-002515 BLOCK, SUB MOUNTING HEAD DOWN VALVE
48 11
1 19 1 3-001936 BLOCK, VERTICAL HEAD ALIGNMENT
2
20 1 3-001931 COVER, DUST PRINTER RIBBON
35
1 21 1 3-001930 MOUNT, HANDLE AND DUSTCOVER FRONT
22 1 3-001929 BRACKET, REAR DUSTCOVER SUPPORT
45 23 1 3-001927 BLOCK, BELT TENSIONING
12
1 1 24 1 3-001926 GEAR, RIBBON TAKEUP DRIVE
53 73 22
25 1 3-001925 ROLLER, REAR RIBBON
2 2 1
26 1 3-001924 SHAFT, REAR RIBBON ROLLER
27 2 3-001920 BLOCK, HORIZONTAL HEAD ALIGNMENT
28 1 3-001919 PLATE, PRINT HEAD MOUNTING
29 1 3-001918 BLOCK, PIVOT PRINT HEAD
30 1 3-001917 SHAFT, PIVOT PRINT HEAD
31 1 3-001916 PULLEY, RIBBON DRIVE ROLLER LARGE
32 1 3-001915 ROLLER, RUBBER RIBBON DRIVE
33 1 3-001914 BRACKET, SIDE PIVOT BLOCK
52 69 1
3 3 1 34 1 3-001912 BLOCK, PIVOT PRINTER REAR
35 1 3-001911-002 PLATE, SIDE, PRINT HEAD LH
36 1 2-003136 GROMMET, SPLIT, LOCKING, 1" ID HOLE, BLACK NYLON
DETAIL A
SCALE 1/1 37 2 2-001879 BEARING, FLANGED, 10MM ID X 22MM OD X 6MM LG
38 2 2-001378 THUMBSCREW, KEY DRIVE 10-32 X 1/2 LG BLACK SS
43 39 1 2-001376 MAGNET, FLAT RETAINING WITH COUNTERSUNK HOLE
1
40 1 2-001375 KNOB, KNURLED GRIP YELLOW 25MM X 22.5MM LG X M4
41 1 2-001374 HANDLE, PULL ALUM 7MM X 16MM OVAL X 102MM LG X M4X.7 THD
49 59 34 42 1 2-001373 COLLAR, CLAMP TWO-PIECE 10MM ID X 25.4 OD X 9MM WD STEEL
2 2 1 37
1 43 1 2-001372 LEVER, PLASTIC ADJUSTABLE YELLOW STEEL STUD M5 X 25MM
52 69 7 44 1 2-001368-017 BEARING, SLEEVE, PLAIN, 6MM ID x 9MM OD x 6MM , BRONZE
3 3 1 45 1 1-61507F RING, RETAINING, E-CLIP, 4MM DIA. NOM, DIN 6799, SS
46 1 1-61112F RING, RETAINING, EXTERNAL, 12 MM DIA SHAFT, SS
8
1 47 1 1-61110F RING, RETAINING, EXTERNAL, 10 MM DIA SHAFT, SS
32 48 2 1-33157F NUT, HEX, NYLON LOCK, M4X0.7, SS
36
50 70 1
1 49 7 1-23159F WASHER, LOCK, INTERNAL TOOTH, M5, SS
2 1
37 50 2 1-23157F WASHER, LOCK, INTERNAL TOOTH, M4, SS
1
21 68 52 51 1 1-22159F WASHER, SPLIT LOCK, M5, SS
1 2 2 52 10 1-22157F WASHER, SPLIT LOCK, M4, SS
53 6 1-22155F WASHER, SPLIT LOCK, M3, SS
49 62 26 54 2 1-21159F WASHER, FLAT, M5, SS
1 1 1
55 4 1-21157F WASHER, FLAT, M4, SS
56 1 1-15106F-006M SCREW, SHOULDER, 6MM DIA X 6MM LG, SS, ISO 7379
57 2 1-14157F-006M SCREW, SET, CUP POINT, SOCKET HEAD, M4X0.7 X 6MM, SS
25 58 1 1-11657F-016M SCREW, FLAT HEAD, SOCKET, M4X0.7 X 16MM LG, SS
1
59 2 1-11459F-020M SCREW, BUTTON HEAD, SOCKET, M5X0.8 X 20MM LG, SS
60 1 1-11457F-006M SCREW, BUTTON HEAD, SOCKET, M4X0.7 X 6MM LG, SS
46
1 61 4 1-11161F-020M SCREW, CAP, SOCKET HEAD, M6X1.0 X 20MM LG, SS
41 67 62 2 1-11159F-018M SCREW, CAP, SOCKET HEAD, M5X0.8 X 18MM LG, SS
61 15 1 2
61 33 2 1 63 1 1-11159F-012M SCREW, CAP, SOCKET HEAD, M5X0.8 X 12MM LG, SS
2 1
SEE DETAIL A 64 2 1-11159F-010M SCREW, CAP, SOCKET HEAD, M5X0.8 X 10MM LG, SS
BEND THIS LEG 90 $ OVER 65 2 1-11159F-008M SCREW, CAP, SOCKET HEAD, M5X0.8 X 8MM LG, SS
TOP OF PIVOT BLOCK
AFTER INSTALLATION 66 4 1-11157F-018M SCREW, CAP, SOCKET HEAD, M4X0.7 X 18MM LG, SS
67 4 1-11157F-016M SCREW, CAP, SOCKET HEAD, M4X0.7 X 16MM LG, SS
65 49
WITH 2-003136; REMOVED 597335A1; CHANGED
QTY:1-23159F (7) WAS (3)
M5 X 0.8 42.4 1 B LDC 03-21-16 499 REMOVED 3-003986 CABLE KIT (1)
A DMF 404
M6 X 1.0 72.1 1-19-16 RELEASED
3-004010-002
MATERIAL SEE B/M
M10 X 1.5 346.4 1 56
USE LOW STRENGTH LOCTITE R
24
UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED
57 31 PART MUST BE FREE OF BURRS AND SHARP EDGES
Vaulted
2 PLACE DIMS # .02 # 0,51 10175 PHILIPP PARKWAY - STREETSBORO, OH 44241
3 PLACE DIMS # .005 # 0,10
ANGULAR # 1/2 $
DRAWING SIZE SCALE DRAWN BY BOM REFERENCE NUMBER
E
NOTICE: THIS DOCUMENT CONTAINS PROPRIETARY INFORMATION
-
NAME: DMF
AND IT SHALL NOT BE USED OR REPRODUCED OR ITS CONTENT
DISCLOSED, IN WHOLE OR PART, WITHOUT THE PRIOR WRITTEN 7/8 DATE: 1-19-16
CONSENT OF AUTOMATED PACKAGING SYSTEMS INC.
ASSY, PRINTER
DRAWING NO. SHEET 2 OF 2 REV
3-004010 J
THIRD ANGLE
to be RoHS Compliant INCH [MM] PROJECTION AB H-CLASS, CE
ITEM QTY PART NO. DESCRIPTION
1 1 656084A1 BAR, BUS GROUNDING
** 2 1 597317AX_XX ASSY, PROGRAMMED PRINTER CPU BOARD
3 1 29735A1 BUSHING, SPLIT 1.25 OD X .937 ID BLK NYLON
4 1 29718A1 SUPPLY, POWER SMALL
5 1 29714A1 PLATE, COVER CARD SLOT
6 1 29713B1 BOARD, PRINTER GPIO
7 1 29710A1 BEZEL, PCB CARD HOUSING
8 1 28629A1 NUTPLATE, POWER SUPPLY
9 2 27144A1 LABEL, GROUND
10 4 10035A1 WASHER, INTERNAL STAR LOCK NO. 4
11 4 10005RS1_5 SCREW, SOC HD CAP #4-40 X 3/16 LG SS
12 1 3-007632 SHELL, PRINTER E-BOX
13 1 3-007631 PLATE, GROMMET MOUNT
14 1 3-004521 DECAL, PRINTER POWER SWITCH
15 1 3-004172 DECAL, PRINTER POWER
16 1 3-003707 ASSY, PRINTER COVER W/CAPTIVE FASTENERS
17 1 3-003648 COVER, REAR, EBOX PRINTER CARD
18 1 3-003132 DECAL, DATAMAX PRINTER ELEC. ENCLOSURE
19 1 3-002790 ASSY, CARD CAGE W/ BACKPLANE PCB MODIFIED
20 1 3-002745 COVER, PRINTER E-BOX CABLE
21 1 3-002678 PANEL, PRINTER E-BOX
22 1 3-002646 SHELL, PRINTER E-BOX
38 29 22 34 8
4 4 1 2 1 23 1 3-002622 ASSY, PRINTER HMI, H-CLASS
27 24 1 3-002619 BRACKET, CAGE MOUNT
4 33
2
1 2 25 1 2-002705 CLAMP, LOOP, VIBRATION DAMPING, 5/8" ID X 1/2" W
26 2 1-33157F NUT, HEX, NYLON LOCK, M4X0.7, SS
27 6 1-31157F NUT, HEX, M4X0.7, SS
SEE DETAIL B 20 37 28 2 1-23157F WASHER, LOCK, INTERNAL TOOTH, M4, SS
23 1 4
1 29 4 1-22159F WASHER, SPLIT LOCK, M5, SS
30 1 1-21157F WASHER, FLAT, M4, SS
31 1 1-16157F-010M SCREW, PHILLIPS PAN HEAD, M4X0.7, 10MM LG, SS
32 7 1-16157F-006M SCREW, PHILLIPS PAN HEAD, M4X0.7, 6MM LG, SS
33 2 1-11657F-014M SCREW, FLAT HEAD, SOCKET, M4X0.7 X 14MM LG, SS
34 2 1-11655F-010M SCREW, FLAT HEAD, SOCKET, M3X0.5 X 10MM LG, SS
35 4 1-11457F-014M SCREW, BUTTON HEAD, SOCKET, M4X0.7 X 14MM LG, SS
36 11 1-11457F-010M SCREW, BUTTON HEAD, SOCKET, M4X0.7 X 10MM LG, SS
37 12 1-11455F-006M SCREW, BUTTON HEAD, SOCKET, M3X0.5 X 6MM LG, SS
1 26
1 2 38 4 1-11159F-010M SCREW, CAP, SOCKET HEAD, M5X0.8 X 10MM LG, SS
9 21 35
1 1 4
5 36
1 2
24 27 19
1 2 1
36 7
2 1
11 10
17 37 4 4
1 4 36 6
USE FOR ATTACHING
2 1
PRINTER RIBBON CABLES
G G
37 13
4 1
3
1
16
1
9
14 1
1
28
2 25 31 30
1 1 1
27 ADDED 3-007632, 3-007631; REMOVED 3-003810-X,
G DMF 3-1-19 1790
2
3-003874, 3-003686, 3-003647, CHANGED QTY:
1-11455F-006M (12) WAS (8)
TOLERANCE INCHES mm
1 PLACE DIMS # .1 # 2,5
Vaulted
2 PLACE DIMS # .02 # 0,51 10175 PHILIPP PARKWAY - STREETSBORO, OH 44241
3 PLACE DIMS # .005 # 0,10
ANGULAR # 1/2 $
DRAWING SIZE SCALE DRAWN BY BOM REFERENCE NUMBER
3-002746 G
THIRD ANGLE
to be RoHS Compliant INCH [MM] PROJECTION TOP MOUNT
ITEMS NOT SHOWN ITEM QTY PART NO. DESCRIPTION
QTY PART NO. DESCRIPTION 1 1 597241A1 ASSY, MOTOR RIBBON DRIVE W/ PLUG
1 597317A3-XX.XXXX PCB, CPU H-CLASS PRINTER PROGRAMMED 203 DPI 2 1 595388A1 BAR, RIBBON FLATTENING
1 3-002400-INS INSTRUCTION, H CLASS PRINT HEAD CONVERSION 3 1 29738A1 HEAD, PRINT THERMAL TRANSFER 203 DPI
4 1 29730A1 BELT, TIMING .080 (MXL) X 153 TEETH X 3/16 WD
E 5 1 3-007942 PLATE, GEAR COVER PRINTER
6 1 3-006779-203 DECAL, DPI, AUTOLABEL, 203
7 1 3-001928 STUD, BELT IDLER
8 1 3-001926 GEAR, RIBBON TAKEUP DRIVE
E 9 2 2-003239 STANDOFF, 5mm ID X 8mm OD X 13mm LG
10 1 2-001368-017 BEARING, SLEEVE, PLAIN, 6MM ID x 9MM OD x 6MM , BRONZE
11 1 1-15106F-006M SCREW, SHOULDER, 6MM DIA X 6MM LG, SS, ISO 7379
12 2 1-11459F-020M SCREW, BUTTON HEAD, SOCKET, M5X0.8 X 20MM LG, SS
13 1 1-11455F-010M SCREW, BUTTON HEAD, SOCKET, M3X0.5 X 10MM LG, SS
14 1 1-11157F-025M SCREW, CAP, SOCKET HEAD, M4X0.7 X 25MM LG, SS
15 3 1-11157F-018M SCREW, CAP, SOCKET HEAD, M4X0.7 X 18MM LG, SS
16 1 1-11155F-006M SCREW, CAP, SOCKET HEAD, M3X0.5 X 6MM LG, SS
PRINTER SHOWN FOR REFERENCE ONLY
14
1 FASTENER TORQUE REQUIREMENTS
15 TIGHTEN ALL FASTENERS PER TABLE UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED.
3 MINIMUM TORQUE SHALL BE 85% OF LISTED MAXIMUM TORQUE.
3
1
P/N 3-002400-203
16
4 1 REMOVED NOTE ABOUT COVER 3-004430-XXX
E GHM 5-29-19 1959
1 ADDED 3-007942 & (2) 2-003239
5
MATERIAL SEE BOM
1 13
12
R
SCALE 5/8
TOLERANCE INCHES mm
1 PLACE DIMS # .1 # 2,5
2 PLACE DIMS # .02 # 0,51 10175 PHILIPP PARKWAY - STREETSBORO, OH 44241
3 PLACE DIMS # .005 # 0,10
ANGULAR # 1/2 $
DRAWING SIZE SCALE DRAWN BY BOM REFERENCE NUMBER
C
NOTICE: THIS DOCUMENT CONTAINS PROPRIETARY INFORMATION
-
NAME: D ROMO
AND IT SHALL NOT BE USED OR REPRODUCED OR ITS CONTENT
DISCLOSED, IN WHOLE OR PART, WITHOUT THE PRIOR WRITTEN 5/8 DATE: 3/6/15
CONSENT OF AUTOMATED PACKAGING SYSTEMS INC.
3-002400 E
THIRD ANGLE
to be RoHS Compliant INCH [MM] PROJECTION AB H-CLASS PRINTER
ITEMS NOT SHOWN ITEM QTY PART NO. DESCRIPTION
QTY PART NO. DESCRIPTION 1 1 595388A1 BAR, RIBBON FLATTENING
1 597317A5-XX.XXXX PCB, CPU H-CLASS PRINTER PROGRAMMED 300 DPI E 2 1 3-007942 PLATE, GEAR COVER PRINTER
1 3-002400-INS INSTRUCTION, H CLASS PRINT HEAD CONVERSION 3 1 3-006779-300 DECAL, DPI, AUTOLABEL, 300
4 1 3-001933 GEAR, COMPOUND RIBBON DRIVE 300/600 DPI
5 1 3-001926 GEAR, RIBBON TAKEUP DRIVE
6 1 3-001909 MOTOR, RIBBON DRIVE 300/600 DPI WIRED
E 7 2 2-003239 STANDOFF, 5mm ID X 8mm OD X 13mm LG
8 1 2-002087 PRINT HEAD, THERMAL TRANSFER 300 DPI H-CLASS
9 1 2-002038 WASHER, THRUST G300 PLASTIC 6mm ID X 15mm OD X 1.5mm W
10 1 2-001377 BELT, TIMING NEOPRENE MXL 130 T X .188 W
11 1 1-15106F-012M SCREW, SHOULDER, 6MM DIA X 12MM LG, SS, ISO 7379
12 1 1-15106F-006M SCREW, SHOULDER, 6MM DIA X 6MM LG, SS, ISO 7379
13 2 1-11459F-020M SCREW, BUTTON HEAD, SOCKET, M5X0.8 X 20MM LG, SS
14 1 1-11455F-010M SCREW, BUTTON HEAD, SOCKET, M3X0.5 X 10MM LG, SS
PRINTER SHOWN FOR REFERENCE ONLY 15 4 1-11157F-018M SCREW, CAP, SOCKET HEAD, M4X0.7 X 18MM LG, SS
16 1 1-11155F-006M SCREW, CAP, SOCKET HEAD, M3X0.5 X 6MM LG, SS
15
4 FASTENER TORQUE REQUIREMENTS
E TIGHTEN ALL FASTENERS PER TABLE UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED.
7 MINIMUM TORQUE SHALL BE 85% OF LISTED MAXIMUM TORQUE.
6
2 SIZE MAX TORQUE (IN-LBF)
1
M2 X 0.4 2.5
5
3 M2.5 X 0.45 5.1
1
USE LOW STRENGTH 12 1 M3 X 0.5 9.0
SERVICEABLE LOCTITE 1
M4 X 0.7 21.0
9 M5 X 0.8 42.4
1 M6 X 1.0 72.1
M8 X 1.25 175.0
M10 X 1.5 346.4
M12 X 1.75 604.1
8 P/N 3-002400-300
10 1
1 E GHM 5-29-19 1959 SEE SHEET 1 OF 4
SCALE 5/8 1
MACHINE SURFACES TO BE NO GREATER THAN 125 [3,2]
Under Revision
13 1 TOLERANCE
1 PLACE DIMS
INCHES
# .1
mm
# 2,5
2 1 2 PLACE DIMS
3 PLACE DIMS
# .02
# .005
# 0,51
# 0,10
10175 PHILIPP PARKWAY - STREETSBORO, OH 44241
ANGULAR # 1/2 $
DRAWING SIZE SCALE DRAWN BY BOM REFERENCE NUMBER
C
NOTICE: THIS DOCUMENT CONTAINS PROPRIETARY INFORMATION
-
NAME: D ROMO
AND IT SHALL NOT BE USED OR REPRODUCED OR ITS CONTENT
DISCLOSED, IN WHOLE OR PART, WITHOUT THE PRIOR WRITTEN 3/4 DATE: 3/6/15
CONSENT OF AUTOMATED PACKAGING SYSTEMS INC.
3-002400 E
THIRD ANGLE
to be RoHS Compliant INCH [MM] PROJECTION AB H-CLASS PRINTER
ITEMS NOT SHOWN ITEM QTY PART NO. DESCRIPTION
QTY PART NO. DESCRIPTION 1 1 597241A1 ASSY, MOTOR RIBBON DRIVE W/ PLUG
1 597317A4-XX.XXXX PCB, CPU H-CLASS PRINTER PROGRAMMED 406 DPI 2 1 595388A1 BAR, RIBBON FLATTENING
1 3-002400-INS INSTRUCTION, H CLASS PRINT HEAD CONVERSION 3 1 29738A2 HEAD, PRINT THERMAL TRANSFER 406 DPI
4 1 29730A1 BELT, TIMING .080 (MXL) X 153 TEETH X 3/16 WD
E 5 1 3-007942 PLATE, GEAR COVER PRINTER
6 1 3-006779-406 DECAL, DPI, AUTOLABEL, 406
7 1 3-001928 STUD, BELT IDLER
8 1 3-001926 GEAR, RIBBON TAKEUP DRIVE
E 9 2 2-003239 STANDOFF, 5mm ID X 8mm OD X 13mm LG
10 1 2-001368-017 BEARING, SLEEVE, PLAIN, 6MM ID x 9MM OD x 6MM , BRONZE
11 1 1-15106F-006M SCREW, SHOULDER, 6MM DIA X 6MM LG, SS, ISO 7379
12 2 1-11459F-020M SCREW, BUTTON HEAD, SOCKET, M5X0.8 X 20MM LG, SS
13 1 1-11455F-010M SCREW, BUTTON HEAD, SOCKET, M3X0.5 X 10MM LG, SS
14 1 1-11157F-025M SCREW, CAP, SOCKET HEAD, M4X0.7 X 25MM LG, SS
15 3 1-11157F-018M SCREW, CAP, SOCKET HEAD, M4X0.7 X 18MM LG, SS
16 1 1-11155F-006M SCREW, CAP, SOCKET HEAD, M3X0.5 X 6MM LG, SS
6
P/N 3-002400-406
1
E GHM 5-29-19 1959 SEE SHEET 1 OF 4
1
UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED
PART MUST BE FREE OF BURRS AND SHARP EDGES
7 TOLERANCE
1 PLACE DIMS
INCHES
# .1
mm
# 2,5
1 2 PLACE DIMS
3 PLACE DIMS
# .02
# .005
# 0,51
# 0,10
10175 PHILIPP PARKWAY - STREETSBORO, OH 44241
ANGULAR # 1/2 $
DRAWING SIZE SCALE DRAWN BY BOM REFERENCE NUMBER
13
C
NOTICE: THIS DOCUMENT CONTAINS PROPRIETARY INFORMATION
-
NAME: D ROMO
AND IT SHALL NOT BE USED OR REPRODUCED OR ITS CONTENT
5/8
1
DISCLOSED, IN WHOLE OR PART, WITHOUT THE PRIOR WRITTEN DATE: 3/6/15
CONSENT OF AUTOMATED PACKAGING SYSTEMS INC.
3-002400 E
THIRD ANGLE
to be RoHS Compliant INCH [MM] PROJECTION AB H-CLASS PRINTER
ITEM QTY PART NO. DESCRIPTION
1 4 10017S7 SCREW, FLAT HD SOC CAP 5/16-18 X 7/8 LG
2 1 3-006628-002 ASSY, BRACKET AB500 - PI412C MOUNT - RH
3 1 3-006628-001 ASSY, BRACKET AB500 - PI412C MOUNT - LH
4 1 3-004251 SHAFT, IDLER ROLLER PI-412
5 1 3-003188 ROLLER, IDLER BAGGER ENTRY AB500
6 2 1-61508F RING, RETAINING, E-CLIP, 5MM DIA. NOM, DIN 6799, SS
7 4 1-11163F-018M SCREW, CAP, SOCKET HEAD, M8X1.25 X 18MM LG, SS
3
1
ITEMS NOT SHOWN
QTY PART NO. DESCRIPTION
1 28605A5 CABLE, SUB-D,15 PIN MALE-15 PIN MALE, 5 FEET
1 2-002070-004 CABLE, ETHERNET EXTENSION CAT5E 5 FEET
1 3-005735 ASS'Y, PI412C FESTOON WEIGHT/AB500
5
1 4
1
7
4
2
1
6
1 2
4
TOLERANCE INCHES mm
1 PLACE DIMS # .1 # 2,5
Vaulted
C
NOTICE: THIS DOCUMENT CONTAINS PROPRIETARY INFORMATION
- - -
NAME: GHM
AND IT SHALL NOT BE USED OR REPRODUCED OR ITS CONTENT
DISCLOSED, IN WHOLE OR PART, WITHOUT THE PRIOR WRITTEN 5/8 DATE: 6-4-18
CONSENT OF AUTOMATED PACKAGING SYSTEMS INC.
3-006626 A
THIRD ANGLE
to be RoHS Compliant INCH [MM] PROJECTION AB500 - PI412C
ITEM QTY PART NO. DESCRIPTION
1 4 10017S7 SCREW, FLAT HD SOC CAP 5/16-18 X 7/8 LG
2 1 3-006629-002 ASSY, BRACKET AB500 - PI412CW MOUNT - LH
3 1 3-006629-001 ASSY, BRACKET AB500 - PI412CW MOUNT - LH
4 1 3-004251 SHAFT, IDLER ROLLER PI-412
5 1 3-003188 ROLLER, IDLER BAGGER ENTRY AB500
6 2 1-61508F RING, RETAINING, E-CLIP, 5MM DIA. NOM, DIN 6799, SS
7 4 1-11163F-018M SCREW, CAP, SOCKET HEAD, M8X1.25 X 18MM LG, SS
4
1
5 7
1 4
2
1
6
2
1
4
TOLERANCE INCHES mm
1 PLACE DIMS # .1 # 2,5
Vaulted
C
NOTICE: THIS DOCUMENT CONTAINS PROPRIETARY INFORMATION
- - -
NAME: GHM
AND IT SHALL NOT BE USED OR REPRODUCED OR ITS CONTENT
DISCLOSED, IN WHOLE OR PART, WITHOUT THE PRIOR WRITTEN 1/2 DATE: 6-5-18
CONSENT OF AUTOMATED PACKAGING SYSTEMS INC.
3-006627 A
THIRD ANGLE
to be RoHS Compliant INCH [MM] PROJECTION AB500 - PI412CW
ITEM QTY PART NO. DESCRIPTION
1 1 3-004395-002 ASSY, BRACKET W/ PIN, AUTOLABEL 500 TO AB500, LH
2 1 3-004395-001 ASSY, BRACKET W/ PIN, AUTOLABEL 500 TO AB500, RH
3 1 3-004251 SHAFT, IDLER ROLLER PI-412
4 1 3-003188 ROLLER, IDLER BAGGER ENTRY AB500
5 2 1-61508F RING, RETAINING, E-CLIP, 5MM DIA. NOM, DIN 6799, SS
6 4 1-11663F-020M SCREW, FLAT HEAD, SOCKET, M8X1.25 X 20MM LG, SS
7 4 1-11163F-016M SCREW, CAP, SOCKET HEAD, M8X1.25 X 16MM LG, SS
7
2
4
1
3
1
6
2
7
2
6
2 5
2 2
1
TOLERANCE INCHES mm
1 PLACE DIMS # .1 # 2,5
Vaulted
C
NOTICE: THIS DOCUMENT CONTAINS PROPRIETARY INFORMATION
- - -
NAME: LDC
AND IT SHALL NOT BE USED OR REPRODUCED OR ITS CONTENT
DISCLOSED, IN WHOLE OR PART, WITHOUT THE PRIOR WRITTEN 5/8 DATE: 05-06-16
CONSENT OF AUTOMATED PACKAGING SYSTEMS INC.
3-004396 C
THIRD ANGLE
to be RoHS Compliant INCH [MM] PROJECTION 500 TO AB500
ITEM QTY PART NO. DESCRIPTION B
1 2 59537A1 GUIDE, WEB
2 1 3-003188 ROLLER, IDLER BAGGER ENTRY AB500
3 1 3-003187 SHAFT, ROLLER BAGGER ENTRY AB500
4 2 3-003186 BRACKET, MOUNTING, ENTRY ROLLER
6
5 2 1-61508F RING, RETAINING, E-CLIP, 5MM DIA. NOM, DIN 6799, SS 4 B
6 4 1-11459F-010M SCREW, BUTTON HEAD, SOCKET, M5X0.8 X 10MM LG, SS
2
1
4 1 B
2 3 2
1 ADDED 2X 59537A1, 1-11459F-010M WAS
B LDC 9-06-15 226 1-11659F-008M
5 A ZR 7-21-15 42 NEW DRAWING
TOLERANCE INCHES mm
1 PLACE DIMS # .1 # 2,5
Vaulted
B
NOTICE: THIS DOCUMENT CONTAINS PROPRIETARY INFORMATION
- - -
NAME: ZR
AND IT SHALL NOT BE USED OR REPRODUCED OR ITS CONTENT
DISCLOSED, IN WHOLE OR PART, WITHOUT THE PRIOR WRITTEN 1/2 DATE: 7-21-15
CONSENT OF AUTOMATED PACKAGING SYSTEMS INC.
ASSY, TRANSITION
DRAWING NO. SHEET 1 OF 1 REV
3-003185 B
THIRD ANGLE
to be RoHS Compliant INCH [MM] PROJECTION ROLLER, AB500
ITEM QTY PART NO. DESCRIPTION
1 2 3-003316 T-NUT, 3030 SERIES, M6x1.0, NON-CLAMPING
SEE TABLE * 2 1 3-002870 PLATE, LOAD SHELF
10 6 5 3 2 3-002846 WELDMENT, LOAD SHELF MOUNT
C
2 2 2
4 2 3-002845 CLAMP, LOAD SHELF MOUNT
5 2 2-002170-M6 T-NUT, 3030 SERIES, M6x1.0
6 4 1-21261F WASHER, FLAT, FENDER, M6, SS
7 3 1-11659F-016M SCREW, FLAT HEAD, SOCKET, M5X0.8 X 16MM LG, SS
C 8 1 1-11659F-008M SCREW, FLAT HEAD, SOCKET, M5X0.8 X 8MM LG, SS
8 9 1 1-11459F-008M SCREW, BUTTON HEAD, SOCKET, M5X0.8 X 8MM LG, SS
C 1 10 6 1-11161F-018M SCREW, CAP, SOCKET HEAD, M6X1.0 X 18MM LG, SS
7
3 1
2
6
2
2 4
1 2
10
4 LOAD SHELF ASSY LOAD SHELF PART NUMBER
PART NUMBER LOAD SHELF ASSEMBLY DESCRIPTION
* 3-002873-12 3-002870-12
3-002873-12 ASSY, LOAD SHELF 12"W X 12"LG
* 3-002873-16 3-002870-16
3-002873-16 ASSY, LOAD SHELF 12"W X 16"LG
* 3-002873-20 3-002870-20
3-002873-20 ASSY, LOAD SHELF 12"W X 20"LG
9
1
C
3
2
TOLERANCE INCHES mm
1 PLACE DIMS # .1 # 2,5
Vaulted
2 PLACE DIMS # .02 # 0,51 10175 PHILIPP PARKWAY - STREETSBORO, OH 44241
3 PLACE DIMS # .005 # 0,10
ANGULAR # 1/2 $
DRAWING SIZE SCALE DRAWN BY BOM REFERENCE NUMBER
D
NOTICE: THIS DOCUMENT CONTAINS PROPRIETARY INFORMATION
---
NAME: JAS
AND IT SHALL NOT BE USED OR REPRODUCED OR ITS CONTENT
DISCLOSED, IN WHOLE OR PART, WITHOUT THE PRIOR WRITTEN 1/1 DATE: 5-11-15
CONSENT OF AUTOMATED PACKAGING SYSTEMS INC.
ASSY, LOAD
DRAWING NO. SHEET 1 OF 1 REV
3-002873 C
THIRD ANGLE
to be RoHS Compliant INCH [MM] PROJECTION SHELF 12"W
SOLENOID VALVE AND HARDWARE (INCLUDED WITH KIT 3-003168)
ITEM QTY PART NO. DESCRIPTION REMOVE BLANK IN
2 FIFTH POSITION
1 2 28240A1 FITTING, UNION FLOW RESTRICTOR IN-LINE BARBED .040 ID 1
2 1 200398A4 VALVE, SOLENOID, 3 POSITION BLOCKED CENTER
PLACE UNIONS
IN AIR LINES
TO CYLINDER
AND LOCATE CLOSE
TO VALVE PACK
6
1
1
1
2
1
4
1
8 3
4 1
E E
3 1 3-005013 GUARD, VL SHELF CYLINDER CHANGING BETWEEN B JAS 9-15-15 226 ADDED VALVING, TUBING, AND DECALS
CONFIGURATIONS FINISH NONE
4 1 3-002850 ASSEMBLY, CUSTOM CYLINDER, LOAD SHELF REV BY DATE ECN DESCRIPTION
7 2 2-002589 HANDLE, ADJ YELLOW PLASTIC 65mm LG X M6 INT STEEL THD TOLERANCE
1 PLACE DIMS
INCHES
# .1
mm
# 2,5
Vaulted
2 PLACE DIMS # .02 # 0,51 10175 PHILIPP PARKWAY - STREETSBORO, OH 44241
8 4 1-33157F NUT, HEX, NYLON LOCK, M4X0.7, SS 3 PLACE DIMS
ANGULAR
# .005
# 1/2 $
# 0,10
D
NOTICE: THIS DOCUMENT CONTAINS PROPRIETARY INFORMATION
---
NAME: JAS
AND IT SHALL NOT BE USED OR REPRODUCED OR ITS CONTENT
DISCLOSED, IN WHOLE OR PART, WITHOUT THE PRIOR WRITTEN 1/2 DATE: 7-15-15
CONSENT OF AUTOMATED PACKAGING SYSTEMS INC.
ASSY, SHELF,
DRAWING NO. SHEET 1 OF 1 REV
3-003168 E
THIRD ANGLE
to be RoHS Compliant INCH [MM] PROJECTION ARTICULATING LOAD 12"W
ITEM QTY PART NO. DESCRIPTION
1 1 28670B1 SENSOR, FRAME OPTOELECTRONIC- 80 X 80
2 1 3-005399 BRACKET, MOUNT SIMPLE COUNT AB500
3 1 3-003577 SPACER, SIMPLE COUNT
6 4 1 3-003536 ASSY, CABLE, COUNT EYE SENSOR
3
5 6 1-11457F-025M SCREW, BUTTON HEAD, SOCKET, M4X0.7 X 25MM LG, SS
6 6 1-11159F-020M SCREW, CAP, SOCKET HEAD, M5X0.8 X 20MM LG, SS
4 3
1 1
5
4
6
3
5
2
TOLERANCE INCHES mm
1 PLACE DIMS # .1 # 2,5
Vaulted
B
NOTICE: THIS DOCUMENT CONTAINS PROPRIETARY INFORMATION
---
NAME: MDS
AND IT SHALL NOT BE USED OR REPRODUCED OR ITS CONTENT
DISCLOSED, IN WHOLE OR PART, WITHOUT THE PRIOR WRITTEN 1/2 DATE: 04-10-17
CONSENT OF AUTOMATED PACKAGING SYSTEMS INC.
3-003573-001 B
THIRD ANGLE
to be RoHS Compliant INCH [MM] PROJECTION SM-AB500
ITEM QTY PART NO. DESCRIPTION
1 1 28761B1 SENSOR, OPTOELECTRONIC 80 X 120
2 1 3-005399 BRACKET, MOUNT SIMPLE COUNT AB500
3 1 3-003536 ASSY, CABLE, COUNT EYE SENSOR
4 4 1-11457F-025M SCREW, BUTTON HEAD, SOCKET, M4X0.7 X 25MM LG, SS
5
3
TOLERANCE INCHES mm
1 PLACE DIMS # .1 # 2,5
Vaulted
B
NOTICE: THIS DOCUMENT CONTAINS PROPRIETARY INFORMATION
---
NAME: MDS
AND IT SHALL NOT BE USED OR REPRODUCED OR ITS CONTENT
DISCLOSED, IN WHOLE OR PART, WITHOUT THE PRIOR WRITTEN 1/2 DATE: 04-11-17
CONSENT OF AUTOMATED PACKAGING SYSTEMS INC.
3-003573-002 B
THIRD ANGLE
to be RoHS Compliant INCH [MM] PROJECTION LG-AB500
ITEM QTY PART NO. DESCRIPTION
ITEM 1 1 595026A1 STRAP, TENSION
22 28 1 4 28 22 2 1 3-005382-002 DECAL, THREADING BAG-N-BOX AB500/AB600 -LH
2 2 1 1 2 2 QTY D 3 1 3-005382-001 DECAL, THREADING BAG-N-BOX AB500/AB600 -RH
BALLOON
4 1 3-003645-003 WEIGHT, BELT TENSION
DESIGNATION
5 1 3-003646 GUIDE, ADJUSTABLE, BAG-IN-BOX
10 6 1 3-003644 EXTRUSION, GUIDE, BAG-IN-BOX, AB500
1 7 1 3-003643 BRACKET, CORNER, EXTRUSION MOUNT
12 11 8 1 3-003642 BAR, TENSION STRAP, AB500
2 2 9 1 3-003639 PLATE, MOUNTING, TOWER, BAG-IN-BOX
10 1 3-003635 WELDMENT, TOWER, BAG-IN-BOX, AB500
8
11 2 3-002452 COLLAR, FILM GUIDE
1
12 2 25325A1 SPRING, EXTENSION
13 2 2-002170-M6 T-NUT, 3030 SERIES, M6x1.0
15
1 14 1 2-002485 HANDLE, ADJUSTABLE 40mm LG M6X1.0 X 15mm STUD YELLOW
15 1 2-001312 KNOB, M6 X 16MM LG STUD, SS
16 1 1-31171F NUT, HEX, M16X2.0, SS
9 25 18 21 17 2 1-31163F NUT, HEX, M8X1.25, SS
1 4 4 4
18 6 1-22163F WASHER, SPLIT LOCK, M8, SS
19 1 1-22161F WASHER, SPLIT LOCK, M6, SS
20 1 1-21361D WASHER, FLAT, HARDENED, M6, DIN 6340
D 21 6 1-21163F WASHER, FLAT, M8, SS
13 2
1 22 4 1-21157F WASHER, FLAT, M4, SS
1
23 2 1-11463F-035M SCREW, BUTTON HEAD, SOCKET, M8X1.25 X 35MM LG, SS
7 24 1 1-11463F-025M SCREW, BUTTON HEAD, SOCKET, M8X1.25 X 25MM LG, SS
14
1
1 25 4 1-11463F-020M SCREW, BUTTON HEAD, SOCKET, M8X1.25 X 20MM LG, SS
26 1 1-11463F-016M SCREW, BUTTON HEAD, SOCKET, M8X1.25 X 16MM LG, SS
20
27 2 1-11461F-008M SCREW, BUTTON HEAD, SOCKET, M6X1.0 X 8MM LG, SS
1
27 28 4 1-11457F-012M SCREW, BUTTON HEAD, SOCKET, M4X0.7 X 12MM LG, SS
1 23 18 21
2 2 2
6
1
13
1 5
1
17
24 2
16 1
1
D 3
1
D
REMOVED LANGUAGE NOTE & 595184A1
D GHM 04-06-17 1022 REPLACED WITH 3-005382-001, 3-005382-002
TOLERANCE INCHES mm
1 PLACE DIMS # .1 # 2,5
Vaulted
2 PLACE DIMS # .02 # 0,51 10175 PHILIPP PARKWAY - STREETSBORO, OH 44241
3 PLACE DIMS # .005 # 0,10
ANGULAR # 1/2 $
DRAWING SIZE SCALE DRAWN BY BOM REFERENCE NUMBER
D
NOTICE: THIS DOCUMENT CONTAINS PROPRIETARY INFORMATION NAME: DMF
AND IT SHALL NOT BE USED OR REPRODUCED OR ITS CONTENT
DISCLOSED, IN WHOLE OR PART, WITHOUT THE PRIOR WRITTEN 0.438 DATE: 10-27-15
CONSENT OF AUTOMATED PACKAGING SYSTEMS INC.
3-003640 D
THIRD ANGLE
to be RoHS Compliant INCH [MM] PROJECTION BAG-IN-BOX, AB500
ITEM QTY PART NO. DESCRIPTION
B 1 4 470395A1 PULLEY, SPRING BELT GRIPPER
B 2 2 29524A1 CUSHION, URETHANE
3 2 3-003718 WEIGHT, STANDARD UNWIND
4 2 2-002344 KNOB, M6 BLIND HOLE, SS INSERT
B 5 4 1-33161F NUT, HEX, NYLON LOCK, M6X1.0, SS
6 2 1-22161F WASHER, SPLIT LOCK, M6, SS
7 2 1-11461F-035M SCREW, BUTTON HEAD, SOCKET, M6X1.0 X 35MM LG, SS
B 8 4 1-11161F-010M SCREW, CAP, SOCKET HEAD, M6X1.0 X 10MM LG, SS
4 3
2 2
5 B
4
B
1
4
2 B GHM 7-26-17 1138
ADDED 470395A1, 29524A1, 1-33161F
2 B 6
& 1-11161F-010M
TOLERANCE INCHES mm
1 PLACE DIMS # .1 # 2,5
Vaulted
C
NOTICE: THIS DOCUMENT CONTAINS PROPRIETARY INFORMATION
---
NAME: LDC
AND IT SHALL NOT BE USED OR REPRODUCED OR ITS CONTENT
DISCLOSED, IN WHOLE OR PART, WITHOUT THE PRIOR WRITTEN 1/2 DATE: 11-11-15
CONSENT OF AUTOMATED PACKAGING SYSTEMS INC.
3-003717 B
THIRD ANGLE
to be RoHS Compliant INCH [MM] PROJECTION POWERED UNWIND
ITEM QTY PART NO. DESCRIPTION
1 1 3-003719-001 WEIGHT, CROSS BAR UNWIND AB500
1
1
TOLERANCE INCHES mm
1 PLACE DIMS # .1 # 2,5
Vaulted
C
NOTICE: THIS DOCUMENT CONTAINS PROPRIETARY INFORMATION
---
NAME: LDC
AND IT SHALL NOT BE USED OR REPRODUCED OR ITS CONTENT
DISCLOSED, IN WHOLE OR PART, WITHOUT THE PRIOR WRITTEN 5/8 DATE: 11-13-15
CONSENT OF AUTOMATED PACKAGING SYSTEMS INC.
3-003734-001 C
THIRD ANGLE
to be RoHS Compliant INCH [MM] PROJECTION BAR ADDITIONAL AB500
ITEM QTY PART NO. DESCRIPTION
1 1 3-005141 SUPPORT, HMI Z-RISER
SCALE 3/8
10.00
SCALE 3/8
1
1
C
NOTICE: THIS DOCUMENT CONTAINS PROPRIETARY INFORMATION
OPTION
NAME: LDC
AND IT SHALL NOT BE USED OR REPRODUCED OR ITS CONTENT
1/2
IN MACHINE SHIP KIT.
DISCLOSED, IN WHOLE OR PART, WITHOUT THE PRIOR WRITTEN DATE: 01-13-17
CONSENT OF AUTOMATED PACKAGING SYSTEMS INC.
3-005142 A
THIRD ANGLE
to be RoHS Compliant INCH [MM] PROJECTION ARM Z-RISER
ITEM QTY PART NO. DESCRIPTION
1 1 200175A1 SWITCH, SAFETY MAGNETICALLY CODED
2 1 3-004911 BLOCK, MOUNTING FRONT GUARD SAFETY INTERLOCK SWITCH
3 2 2-002170-M6 T-NUT, 3030 SERIES, M6x1.0
4 2 1-33157F NUT, HEX, NYLON LOCK, M4X0.7, SS
5 2 1-22157F WASHER, SPLIT LOCK, M4, SS
6 4 1-21157F WASHER, FLAT, M4, SS
7 2 1-11661F-012M SCREW, FLAT HEAD, SOCKET, M6X1.0 X 12MM LG, SS
8 2 1-11157F-025M SCREW, CAP, SOCKET HEAD, M4X0.7 X 25MM LG, SS
9 2 1-11157F-020M SCREW, CAP, SOCKET HEAD, M4X0.7 X 20MM LG, SS
3
2
7
2
6
2
8 2
2 1
1
1
6
2
5
2 9
2
M5 X 0.8 42.4
TOLERANCE INCHES mm
1 PLACE DIMS # .1 # 2,5
Vaulted
C
NOTICE: THIS DOCUMENT CONTAINS PROPRIETARY INFORMATION NAME: D ROMO
M8 X 1.25 175.0 AND IT SHALL NOT BE USED OR REPRODUCED OR ITS CONTENT
DISCLOSED, IN WHOLE OR PART, WITHOUT THE PRIOR WRITTEN 1/2 DATE: 1-5-17
CONSENT OF AUTOMATED PACKAGING SYSTEMS INC.
3-005118 A
THIRD ANGLE
to be RoHS Compliant M12 X 1.75 604.1
INCH [MM] PROJECTION GUARD SAFETY SWITCH
ITEM QTY PART NO. DESCRIPTION
1 1 200398A2 VALVE, SOLENOID 4 WAY
2 2 3-004342 HOUSING, BEARING PIVOT SEAL FLATTENERS
3 2 3-004331 ASSY, PIVOT LINK W/ SLEEVE BEARING
4 1 3-003330-002 FINGER, SHORT BAGGER, LH
5 1 3-003330-001 FINGER, SHORT BAGGER, RH
6 1 3-003327-002 COVER, SEAL FLATTENER, LH
7 1 3-003327-001 COVER, SEAL FLATTENER, RH
8 1 3-003217-002 FINGER, LONG BAGGER, LH
9 1 3-003217-001 FINGER, LONG BAGGER, RH
10 2 3-003216 ROD, SEAL FLATTENER
11 2 3-003214 LINK, SEAL FLATTENER, DRIVEN
12 1 3-003213-002 BRACKET, SEAL FLATTENER MOUNT, LH
13 1 3-003213-001 BRACKET, SEAL FLATTENER MOUNT, RH
14 2 3-002424 NUT, 'T' FASTENER, M6X1 THREAD
15 4 2-002493 WASHER, FLAT .198 ID X .373 OD X .09 THICK ALUM
14 16 2 2-002280 FITTING, REDUCER STR PLUG-IN 1/4 STEM X 6mm TUBE
12 15 23
2 4 17 2 2-002202 CYLINDER, ROTARY, 10mm SIZE x 180° SWIVEL ANGLE
1 4
18 2 2-002007 FITTING, WYE UNION, REDUCING, 6-4mm
THREAD NUT FULLY ONTO STUD
UNTIL TIGHTENED AGAINST WASHER. 19 4 2-001853-121 BEARING, BALL, SHIELDED, 6mm ID x 13mm OD x 5mm, SS
DO NOT LEAVE LOOSE. 20 4 2-001357 FITTING, ELBOW M3 MALE TO 4mm TUBE
29 E 21 2 1-61508F RING, RETAINING, E-CLIP, 5MM DIA. NOM, DIN 6799, SS
USE .040-.045 SHIM TO SUPPORT
2 22 2 1-41105F-014M PIN, DOWEL, 5MM DIA X 14MM LG, SS
CLEVIS WHEN PRESSING IN PIN.
25 11 23 4 1-33159F NUT, HEX, NYLON LOCK, M5X0.8, SS
2 2 PRESS CLEVIS ONTO CYLINDER 24 2 1-21157F WASHER, FLAT, M4, SS
SHAFT UNTIL OUTSIDE SURFACE
IS FLUSH WITH SHAFT END. 25 2 1-14157F-004M SCREW, SET, CUP POINT, SOCKET HEAD, M4X0.7 X 4MM, SS
22 26 4 1-11657F-012M SCREW, FLAT HEAD, SOCKET, M4X0.7 X 12MM LG, SS
10
2 2 27 6 1-11653F-010M SCREW, FLAT HEAD, SOCKET, M2.5X0.45 X 10MM LG, SS
28 4 1-11457F-006M SCREW, BUTTON HEAD, SOCKET, M4X0.7 X 6MM LG, SS
29 2 1-11161F-012M SCREW, CAP, SOCKET HEAD, M6X1.0 X 12MM LG, SS
3
2 30 2 1-11157F-008M SCREW, CAP, SOCKET HEAD, M4X0.7 X 8MM LG, SS
20 26
4 4
ITEMS NOT SHOWN
8 FINGER FOR QTY PART NO. DESCRIPTION
1 LONG BAGGER 1 3-004882 KIT, TUBE ROUTING, SEAL FLATTENERS
6
1
27 FINGER FOR 4
6 SHORT BAGGER 1
24
2
FINGER FOR 5 1 NOTES:
SHORT BAGGER 1 30 1
2 13 18
1 2 PLACE VALVE IN 7TH STATION.
TOLERANCE INCHES mm
1 PLACE DIMS # .1 # 2,5
Vaulted
2 PLACE DIMS # .02 # 0,51 10175 PHILIPP PARKWAY - STREETSBORO, OH 44241
3 PLACE DIMS # .005 # 0,10
ANGULAR # 1/2 $
DRAWING SIZE SCALE DRAWN BY BOM REFERENCE NUMBER
D
NOTICE: THIS DOCUMENT CONTAINS PROPRIETARY INFORMATION
---
NAME: JAS
AND IT SHALL NOT BE USED OR REPRODUCED OR ITS CONTENT
DISCLOSED, IN WHOLE OR PART, WITHOUT THE PRIOR WRITTEN 1/1 DATE: 10-5-15
CONSENT OF AUTOMATED PACKAGING SYSTEMS INC.
ASSY, ROTARY
DRAWING NO. SHEET 1 OF 1 REV
3-003219 E
THIRD ANGLE
to be RoHS Compliant INCH [MM] PROJECTION SEAL FLATTENER
ITEM QTY PART NO. DESCRIPTION
1 1 595341A2 GUARD, SEAL FLATTENER R.H.
2 1 595341A1 GUARD, SEAL FLATTENER L.H.
3 2 36598A1 ASSY, CLEVIS
4 2 36568A1 LINK, CYLINDER
5 1 36554A2 FINGER, SEAL FLATTENER - L.H.
6 1 36554A1 FINGER, SEAL FLATTENER - R.H.
7 1 36553A2 MOUNT,LH
8 1 36553A1 MOUNT,RH
9 2 25416A1 CYLINDER, AIR FLAT
10 2 23668A1 RING, RETAINER "E"
11 4 21252AS1 RING, RETAINING 'E' 1/4 SHAFT, SS
12 4 200108A2 FITTING, ELBOW 1/4" TUBE X 10-32 UNF
2 1
13 4 10041AS1 WASHER, SPLIT LOCK NO.4 (SS) 1 1
14 2 10016JS1 NUT, HEX JAM 1/4-28 (SS)
15 4 10005RS3 SCREW, SOC HD CAP #4-40 X 3/8 LG SS
16 4 10005RS2 SCREW, SOC HD CAP #4-40 X 1/4 LG SS
17 2 3-003474 NUT, "T", FASTENER, LEGACY SEAL FLATTENERS, M6X1
18 4 2-002243 FITTING, REDUCER, 1/4 TUBE TO 5/32 TUBE
9 7 13 16 14 10 3 8 21 19 20 17
19 2 1-22161F WASHER, SPLIT LOCK, M6, SS
2 1 4 4 2 2 2 1 2 2 2 2
20 2 1-21161F WASHER, FLAT, M6, SS
21 2 1-11161F-016M SCREW, CAP, SOCKET HEAD, M6X1.0 X 16MM LG, SS
15
4
ITEM QTY PART NO. DESCRIPTION
1 1 200398A2 VALVE, SOLENOID 4 WAY
2 2 2-002007 FITTING, WYE UNION, REDUCING, 6-4mm
3 2 2-001021 REGULATOR, W/ GAUGE, 6MM INLINE
4 2 1-11155F-040M SCREW, CAP, SOCKET HEAD, M3X0.5 X 40MM LG, SS
12 18
4 4
NOTES: 1
1 4 11 5 6
PORT "4A" USED 2 4 1 1
FOR SEAL FLATTENERS
IN UP POSITION
3
SCALE 3/8 2
B JAS 11-16-16 832 TUBING REPLACED WITH TUBING KIT
Vaulted
2 PLACE DIMS # .02 # 0,51 10175 PHILIPP PARKWAY - STREETSBORO, OH 44241
2 3 PLACE DIMS # .005 # 0,10
2
DRAWING SIZE SCALE DRAWN BY BOM REFERENCE NUMBER
IN PLACE OF BLANK D
NOTICE: THIS DOCUMENT CONTAINS PROPRIETARY INFORMATION
---
NAME: JAS
AND IT SHALL NOT BE USED OR REPRODUCED OR ITS CONTENT
DISCLOSED, IN WHOLE OR PART, WITHOUT THE PRIOR WRITTEN 1/1 DATE: 9-28-15
CONSENT OF AUTOMATED PACKAGING SYSTEMS INC.
3-003466 B
THIRD ANGLE
to be RoHS Compliant INCH [MM] PROJECTION FINGER STYLE
ITEM QTY PART NO. DESCRIPTION
1 1 595580A2 SEAL, FINGER FLATTENER - LH
2 1 595580A1 SEAL, FINGER FLATTENER - R.H.
3 1 595341A2 GUARD, SEAL FLATTENER R.H.
4 1 595341A1 GUARD, SEAL FLATTENER L.H.
5 2 36598A1 ASSY, CLEVIS
6 2 36568A1 LINK, CYLINDER
7 1 36553A2 MOUNT,LH
8 1 36553A1 MOUNT,RH
9 2 25416A1 CYLINDER, AIR FLAT
10 2 23668A1 RING, RETAINER "E"
11 4 21252AS1 RING, RETAINING 'E' 1/4 SHAFT, SS
12 4 200108A2 FITTING, ELBOW 1/4" TUBE X 10-32 UNF
4 3
13 4 10041AS1 WASHER, SPLIT LOCK NO.4 (SS) 1 1
14 2 10016JS1 NUT, HEX JAM 1/4-28 (SS)
15 4 10005RS3 SCREW, SOC HD CAP #4-40 X 3/8 LG SS
16 4 10005RS2 SCREW, SOC HD CAP #4-40 X 1/4 LG SS
17 2 3-003474 NUT, "T", FASTENER, LEGACY SEAL FLATTENERS, M6X1
18 4 2-002243 FITTING, REDUCER, 1/4 TUBE TO 5/32 TUBE
9 7 13 16 14 10 5 8 21 19 20 17
19 2 1-22161F WASHER, SPLIT LOCK, M6, SS
2 1 4 4 2 2 2 1 2 2 2 2
20 2 1-21161F WASHER, FLAT, M6, SS
21 2 1-11161F-016M SCREW, CAP, SOCKET HEAD, M6X1.0 X 16MM LG, SS
15
4
ITEM QTY PART NO. DESCRIPTION
1 1 200398A2 VALVE, SOLENOID 4 WAY
2 2 2-002007 FITTING, WYE UNION, REDUCING, 6-4mm
3 2 2-001021 REGULATOR, W/ GAUGE, 6MM INLINE
4 2 1-11155F-040M SCREW, CAP, SOCKET HEAD, M3X0.5 X 40MM LG, SS
12 18
4 4
NOTES:
1
1 6 11 1 2
PORT "4A" USED 2 4 1 1
FOR SEAL FLATTENERS
IN UP POSITION
3
2
B JAS 11-16-16 832 TUBING REPLACED WITH TUBING KIT
Vaulted
2 PLACE DIMS # .02 # 0,51 10175 PHILIPP PARKWAY - STREETSBORO, OH 44241
2 3 PLACE DIMS # .005 # 0,10
2
DRAWING SIZE SCALE DRAWN BY BOM REFERENCE NUMBER
IN PLACE OF BLANK 4 D
NOTICE: THIS DOCUMENT CONTAINS PROPRIETARY INFORMATION
---
NAME: JAS
AND IT SHALL NOT BE USED OR REPRODUCED OR ITS CONTENT
DISCLOSED, IN WHOLE OR PART, WITHOUT THE PRIOR WRITTEN 1/1 DATE: 9-28-15
2 CONSENT OF AUTOMATED PACKAGING SYSTEMS INC.
3-003611 B
THIRD ANGLE
to be RoHS Compliant INCH [MM] PROJECTION PADDLE STYLE
3-005297-075
ITEM QTY PART NO. DESCRIPTION
1 1 595844A1 SWITCH, 4MM ROUND PNP W/QUICK DIS
2 1 36584A1 BUMPER, RUBBER 1.00"
3 2 27496B1 DECAL, DO NOT OPERATOR WITH GUARD REMOVED ICON
4 1 11005HFS100 SCREW, HEX HD CAP M8X100MM LG FULL THD, SS
10 5 1 3-005352-075 GUARD, FUNNEL ACCUMULATING SQUARE LOWER .75"
1
6 1 3-005351 ASSY, FUNNEL AIR CYLINDER W/ FITTINGS AND ROD PIVOT
7 2 3-005341 BLOCK, MOUNTING FUNNEL GUARD
8 1 3-005312-075 GUARD, FUNNEL ACCUMULATING SQUARE UPPER .75"
6 9 1 3-005292 BUMPER, STOP FUNNEL DOOR M6
1
11 10 1 3-005283-075 ASSY, FUNNEL SQUARE ACCUMULATING CE METRIC - BARE .75"
1 C
C 11 2 2-002489-002 DECAL, HAND CRUSH/FORCE FROM RIGHT
12 1 1-33157F NUT, HEX, NYLON LOCK, M4X0.7, SS
13 1 1-31163F NUT, HEX, M8X1.25, SS
14 1 1-22163F WASHER, SPLIT LOCK, M8, SS
15 2 1-22161F WASHER, SPLIT LOCK, M6, SS
16 2 1-21161F WASHER, FLAT, M6, SS
17 1 1-15105F-016M SCREW, SHOULDER, 5MM DIA X 16MM LG, SS, ISO 7379
18 6 1-11457F-006M SCREW, BUTTON HEAD, SOCKET, M4X0.7 X 6MM LG, SS
3
2 19 2 1-11161F-014M SCREW, CAP, SOCKET HEAD, M6X1.0 X 14MM LG, SS
20 2 1-11159F-006M SCREW, CAP, SOCKET HEAD, M5X0.8 X 6MM LG, SS
21 4 1-11157F-005M SCREW, CAP, SOCKET HEAD, M4X0.7 X 5MM LG, SS
19
2
12 16
1 15 2
FASTENER TORQUE REQUIREMENTS
LEAVE .03-.06 2 TIGHTEN ALL FASTENERS PER TABLE UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED.
GAP BETWEEN MINIMUM TORQUE SHALL BE 85% OF LISTED MAXIMUM TORQUE.
18
6
13 9
1 1
8 C KJD 01-11-19 1784 2-002489-002 WAS 2-002425
14
R
MACHINE SURFACES TO BE NO GREATER THAN 125 [3,2]
UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED
TOLERANCE INCHES mm
1 PLACE DIMS # .1 # 2,5
Vaulted
3-005297 C
THIRD ANGLE
to be RoHS Compliant INCH [MM] PROJECTION CE METRIC - .75"
3-005297-100
ITEM QTY PART NO. DESCRIPTION
1 1 595844A1 SWITCH, 4MM ROUND PNP W/QUICK DIS
2 1 36584A2 BUMPER STRIP
3 2 27496B1 DECAL, DO NOT OPERATOR WITH GUARD REMOVED ICON
10 4 1 11005HFS100 SCREW, HEX HD CAP M8X100MM LG FULL THD, SS
1 5 1 3-005352-100 GUARD, FUNNEL ACCUMULATING SQUARE LOWER 1.00"
6 1 3-005351 ASSY, FUNNEL AIR CYLINDER W/ FITTINGS AND ROD PIVOT
7 2 3-005341 BLOCK, MOUNTING FUNNEL GUARD
8 1 3-005312-100 GUARD, FUNNEL ACCUMULATING SQUARE UPPER 1.00"
6 9 1 3-005292 BUMPER, STOP FUNNEL DOOR M6
1 10 1 3-005283-100 ASSY, FUNNEL SQUARE ACCUMULATING CE METRIC - BARE 1.00"
11
2 C C 11 2 2-002489-002 DECAL, HAND CRUSH/FORCE FROM RIGHT
12 1 1-33157F NUT, HEX, NYLON LOCK, M4X0.7, SS
13 1 1-31163F NUT, HEX, M8X1.25, SS
14 1 1-22163F WASHER, SPLIT LOCK, M8, SS
15 2 1-22161F WASHER, SPLIT LOCK, M6, SS
16 2 1-21161F WASHER, FLAT, M6, SS
17 1 1-15105F-016M SCREW, SHOULDER, 5MM DIA X 16MM LG, SS, ISO 7379
18 6 1-11457F-006M SCREW, BUTTON HEAD, SOCKET, M4X0.7 X 6MM LG, SS
3
2 19 2 1-11161F-014M SCREW, CAP, SOCKET HEAD, M6X1.0 X 14MM LG, SS
20 2 1-11159F-006M SCREW, CAP, SOCKET HEAD, M5X0.8 X 6MM LG, SS
21 4 1-11157F-005M SCREW, CAP, SOCKET HEAD, M4X0.7 X 5MM LG, SS
19
2
12 16
1 2
FASTENER TORQUE REQUIREMENTS
15
LEAVE .03-.06 2
TIGHTEN ALL FASTENERS PER TABLE UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED.
MINIMUM TORQUE SHALL BE 85% OF LISTED MAXIMUM TORQUE.
GAP BETWEEN
NUT AND DOOR SIZE MAX TORQUE (IN-LBF)
2 ATTACH WITH 3M
M2 X 0.4 2.5
1 SCOTCHWELD
1 ADHESIVE # CA-40H M2.5 X 0.45 5.1
1 M3 X 0.5 9.0
17 7 M4 X 0.7 21.0
1 2 M5 X 0.8 42.4
5 21 M6 X 1.0 72.1
21
1 2 M8 X 1.25 175.0
2
20 M10 X 1.5 346.4
2 M12 X 1.75 604.1
LOW STRENGTH 18
LOCTITE 6
13 9
1 1 C KJD 01-11-19 1784 2-002489-002 WAS 2-002425
11005HFS100 WAS 1-11163F-100,
B CAS 9-12-17 1221
8 INVERT 595844A1
14
MACHINE SURFACES TO BE NO GREATER THAN 125 [3,2]
UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED
PART MUST BE FREE OF BURRS AND SHARP EDGES
1 TOLERANCE INCHES mm
1 PLACE DIMS # .1 # 2,5
Vaulted
4 2 PLACE DIMS
3 PLACE DIMS
# .02
# .005
# 0,51
# 0,10
10175 PHILIPP PARKWAY - STREETSBORO, OH 44241
1
ANGULAR # 1/2 $
DRAWING SIZE SCALE DRAWN BY BOM REFERENCE NUMBER
C
NOTICE: THIS DOCUMENT CONTAINS PROPRIETARY INFORMATION NAME: D ROMO
AND IT SHALL NOT BE USED OR REPRODUCED OR ITS CONTENT
DISCLOSED, IN WHOLE OR PART, WITHOUT THE PRIOR WRITTEN 29/32 DATE: 3-8-17
CONSENT OF AUTOMATED PACKAGING SYSTEMS INC.
3-005297 C
THIRD ANGLE
to be RoHS Compliant INCH [MM] PROJECTION CE METRIC - 1.00"
3-005297-150
ITEM QTY PART NO. DESCRIPTION
1 1 595844A1 SWITCH, 4MM ROUND PNP W/QUICK DIS
2 1 36584A3 BUMPER, RUBBER 1.75"
3 2 27496B1 DECAL, DO NOT OPERATOR WITH GUARD REMOVED ICON
4 1 11005HFS100 SCREW, HEX HD CAP M8X100MM LG FULL THD, SS
10
1 5 1 3-005352-150 GUARD, FUNNEL ACCUMULATING SQUARE LOWER 1.50"
6 1 3-005351 ASSY, FUNNEL AIR CYLINDER W/ FITTINGS AND ROD PIVOT
7 2 3-005341 BLOCK, MOUNTING FUNNEL GUARD
8 1 3-005312-150 GUARD, FUNNEL ACCUMULATING SQUARE UPPER 1.50"
6
1 9 1 3-005292 BUMPER, STOP FUNNEL DOOR M6
11 10 1 3-005283-150 ASSY, FUNNEL SQUARE ACCUMULATING CE METRIC - BARE 1.50"
C 11 2 2-002489-002 DECAL, HAND CRUSH/FORCE FROM RIGHT
2 C
12 1 1-33157F NUT, HEX, NYLON LOCK, M4X0.7, SS
13 1 1-31163F NUT, HEX, M8X1.25, SS
14 1 1-22163F WASHER, SPLIT LOCK, M8, SS
15 2 1-22161F WASHER, SPLIT LOCK, M6, SS
16 2 1-21161F WASHER, FLAT, M6, SS
17 1 1-15105F-016M SCREW, SHOULDER, 5MM DIA X 16MM LG, SS, ISO 7379
18
6
13 9
1 1 C KJD 01-11-19 1784 2-002489-002 WAS 2-002425
11005HFS100 WAS 1-11163F-100,
B CAS 9-12-17 1221
8 INVERT 595844A1
1 TOLERANCE INCHES mm
4
1 PLACE DIMS # .1 # 2,5
Vaulted
1 ANGULAR # 1/2 $
DRAWING SIZE SCALE DRAWN BY BOM REFERENCE NUMBER
C
NOTICE: THIS DOCUMENT CONTAINS PROPRIETARY INFORMATION NAME: D ROMO
AND IT SHALL NOT BE USED OR REPRODUCED OR ITS CONTENT
DISCLOSED, IN WHOLE OR PART, WITHOUT THE PRIOR WRITTEN 29/32 DATE: 3-8-17
CONSENT OF AUTOMATED PACKAGING SYSTEMS INC.
3-005297 C
THIRD ANGLE
to be RoHS Compliant INCH [MM] PROJECTION CE METRIC - 1.50"
3-005297-200
ITEM QTY PART NO. DESCRIPTION
1 1 595844A1 SWITCH, 4MM ROUND PNP W/QUICK DIS
2 1 36584A4 BUMPER STRIP 2-1/4
3 2 27496B1 DECAL, DO NOT OPERATOR WITH GUARD REMOVED ICON
4 1 11005HFS100 SCREW, HEX HD CAP M8X100MM LG FULL THD, SS
10
1 5 1 3-005352-200 GUARD, FUNNEL ACCUMULATING SQUARE LOWER 2.00"
6 1 3-005351 ASSY, FUNNEL AIR CYLINDER W/ FITTINGS AND ROD PIVOT
7 2 3-005341 BLOCK, MOUNTING FUNNEL GUARD
8 1 3-005312-200 GUARD, FUNNEL ACCUMULATING SQUARE UPPER 2.00"
6
9 1 3-005292 BUMPER, STOP FUNNEL DOOR M6
1
C 10 1 3-005283-200 ASSY, FUNNEL SQUARE ACCUMULATING CE METRIC - BARE 2.00"
11
2 C 11 2 2-002489-002 DECAL, HAND CRUSH/FORCE FROM RIGHT
12 1 1-33157F NUT, HEX, NYLON LOCK, M4X0.7, SS
13 1 1-31163F NUT, HEX, M8X1.25, SS
14 1 1-22163F WASHER, SPLIT LOCK, M8, SS
15 2 1-22161F WASHER, SPLIT LOCK, M6, SS
16 2 1-21161F WASHER, FLAT, M6, SS
17 1 1-15105F-016M SCREW, SHOULDER, 5MM DIA X 16MM LG, SS, ISO 7379
18 6 1-11457F-006M SCREW, BUTTON HEAD, SOCKET, M4X0.7 X 6MM LG, SS
3 19 2 1-11161F-014M SCREW, CAP, SOCKET HEAD, M6X1.0 X 14MM LG, SS
2
20 2 1-11159F-006M SCREW, CAP, SOCKET HEAD, M5X0.8 X 6MM LG, SS
15 21 4 1-11157F-005M SCREW, CAP, SOCKET HEAD, M4X0.7 X 5MM LG, SS
19 2
2
12 16
1 2
FASTENER TORQUE REQUIREMENTS
LEAVE .03-.06 TIGHTEN ALL FASTENERS PER TABLE UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED.
GAP BETWEEN MINIMUM TORQUE SHALL BE 85% OF LISTED MAXIMUM TORQUE.
9
1
C KJD 01-11-19 1784 2-002489-002 WAS 2-002425
13 1
PART MUST BE FREE OF BURRS AND SHARP EDGES
TOLERANCE INCHES mm
1 1 PLACE DIMS # .1 # 2,5
Vaulted
1
C
NOTICE: THIS DOCUMENT CONTAINS PROPRIETARY INFORMATION NAME: D ROMO
AND IT SHALL NOT BE USED OR REPRODUCED OR ITS CONTENT
DISCLOSED, IN WHOLE OR PART, WITHOUT THE PRIOR WRITTEN 29/32 DATE: 3-8-17
CONSENT OF AUTOMATED PACKAGING SYSTEMS INC.
3-005297 C
THIRD ANGLE
to be RoHS Compliant INCH [MM] PROJECTION CE METRIC - 2.00"
3-005297-250
ITEM QTY PART NO. DESCRIPTION
1 1 595844A1 SWITCH, 4MM ROUND PNP W/QUICK DIS
2 1 36584A5 BUMPER, RUBBER 2.75"
3 2 27496B1 DECAL, DO NOT OPERATOR WITH GUARD REMOVED ICON
4 1 11005HFS100 SCREW, HEX HD CAP M8X100MM LG FULL THD, SS
10
1 5 1 3-005352-250 GUARD, FUNNEL ACCUMULATING SQUARE LOWER 2.50"
6 1 3-005351 ASSY, FUNNEL AIR CYLINDER W/ FITTINGS AND ROD PIVOT
7 2 3-005341 BLOCK, MOUNTING FUNNEL GUARD
8 1 3-005312-250 GUARD, FUNNEL ACCUMULATING SQUARE UPPER 2.50"
6
9 1 3-005292 BUMPER, STOP FUNNEL DOOR M6
1
11 10 1 3-005283-250 ASSY, FUNNEL SQUARE ACCUMULATING CE METRIC - BARE 2.50"
C
2 C 11 2 2-002489-002 DECAL, HAND CRUSH/FORCE FROM RIGHT
12 1 1-33157F NUT, HEX, NYLON LOCK, M4X0.7, SS
13 1 1-31163F NUT, HEX, M8X1.25, SS
14 1 1-22163F WASHER, SPLIT LOCK, M8, SS
15 2 1-22161F WASHER, SPLIT LOCK, M6, SS
16 2 1-21161F WASHER, FLAT, M6, SS
17 1 1-15105F-016M SCREW, SHOULDER, 5MM DIA X 16MM LG, SS, ISO 7379
18 6 1-11457F-006M SCREW, BUTTON HEAD, SOCKET, M4X0.7 X 6MM LG, SS
3 19 2 1-11161F-014M SCREW, CAP, SOCKET HEAD, M6X1.0 X 14MM LG, SS
2
20 2 1-11159F-006M SCREW, CAP, SOCKET HEAD, M5X0.8 X 6MM LG, SS
21 4 1-11157F-005M SCREW, CAP, SOCKET HEAD, M4X0.7 X 5MM LG, SS
19
2
12
1
16 FASTENER TORQUE REQUIREMENTS
LEAVE .03-.06 15 2 TIGHTEN ALL FASTENERS PER TABLE UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED.
GAP BETWEEN 2 MINIMUM TORQUE SHALL BE 85% OF LISTED MAXIMUM TORQUE.
9
1
C KJD 01-11-19 1784 2-002489-002 WAS 2-002425
8 B CAS 9-12-17 1221
11005HFS100 WAS 1-11163F-100,
INVERT 595844A1
1 A DAR 3-8-17 949 NEW DRAWING
3-005297 C
THIRD ANGLE
to be RoHS Compliant INCH [MM] PROJECTION CE METRIC - 2.50"
3-005297-300
ITEM QTY PART NO. DESCRIPTION
1 1 595844A1 SWITCH, 4MM ROUND PNP W/QUICK DIS
2 1 36584A6 BUMPER, RUBBER 3.25"
3 2 27496B1 DECAL, DO NOT OPERATOR WITH GUARD REMOVED ICON
4 1 11005HFS100 SCREW, HEX HD CAP M8X100MM LG FULL THD, SS
10
1 5 1 3-005352-300 GUARD, FUNNEL ACCUMULATING SQUARE LOWER 3.00"
6 1 3-005351 ASSY, FUNNEL AIR CYLINDER W/ FITTINGS AND ROD PIVOT
7 2 3-005341 BLOCK, MOUNTING FUNNEL GUARD
8 1 3-005312-300 GUARD, FUNNEL ACCUMULATING SQUARE UPPER 3.00"
6 9 1 3-005292 BUMPER, STOP FUNNEL DOOR M6
1 10 1 3-005283-300 ASSY, FUNNEL SQUARE ACCUMULATING CE METRIC - BARE 3.00"
11
C
2 C 11 2 2-002489-002 DECAL, HAND CRUSH/FORCE FROM RIGHT
12 1 1-33157F NUT, HEX, NYLON LOCK, M4X0.7, SS
13 1 1-31163F NUT, HEX, M8X1.25, SS
14 1 1-22163F WASHER, SPLIT LOCK, M8, SS
15 2 1-22161F WASHER, SPLIT LOCK, M6, SS
16 2 1-21161F WASHER, FLAT, M6, SS
17 1 1-15105F-016M SCREW, SHOULDER, 5MM DIA X 16MM LG, SS, ISO 7379
18 6 1-11457F-006M SCREW, BUTTON HEAD, SOCKET, M4X0.7 X 6MM LG, SS
19 2 1-11161F-014M SCREW, CAP, SOCKET HEAD, M6X1.0 X 14MM LG, SS
3 20 2 1-11159F-006M SCREW, CAP, SOCKET HEAD, M5X0.8 X 6MM LG, SS
2
21 4 1-11157F-005M SCREW, CAP, SOCKET HEAD, M4X0.7 X 5MM LG, SS
19
2
12
1
16 FASTENER TORQUE REQUIREMENTS
LEAVE .03-.06
2 TIGHTEN ALL FASTENERS PER TABLE UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED.
GAP BETWEEN 15 MINIMUM TORQUE SHALL BE 85% OF LISTED MAXIMUM TORQUE.
NUT AND DOOR 2 SIZE MAX TORQUE (IN-LBF)
1 M2 X 0.4 2.5
ATTACH WITH 3M
1 2 M2.5 X 0.45 5.1
SCOTCHWELD
1
ADHESIVE # CA-40H M3 X 0.5 9.0
17
1 M4 X 0.7 21.0
7 21 M5 X 0.8 42.4
2 2 M6 X 1.0 72.1
M8 X 1.25 175.0
21 M10 X 1.5 346.4
2
M12 X 1.75 604.1
5 20 18
1 2 6
LOW STRENGTH
LOCTITE
9
1
C KJD 01-11-19 1784 2-002489-002 WAS 2-002425
11005HFS100 WAS 1-11163F-100,
8 B CAS 9-12-17 1221 INVERT 595844A1
13
PART MUST BE FREE OF BURRS AND SHARP EDGES
TOLERANCE INCHES mm
1 1 PLACE DIMS # .1 # 2,5
Vaulted
4 2 PLACE DIMS
3 PLACE DIMS
ANGULAR
# .02
# .005
# 1/2 $
# 0,51
# 0,10
10175 PHILIPP PARKWAY - STREETSBORO, OH 44241
C
NOTICE: THIS DOCUMENT CONTAINS PROPRIETARY INFORMATION NAME: D ROMO
AND IT SHALL NOT BE USED OR REPRODUCED OR ITS CONTENT
DISCLOSED, IN WHOLE OR PART, WITHOUT THE PRIOR WRITTEN 29/32 DATE: 3-8-17
CONSENT OF AUTOMATED PACKAGING SYSTEMS INC.
3-005297 C
THIRD ANGLE
to be RoHS Compliant INCH [MM] PROJECTION CE METRIC - 3.00"
3-005297-350
ITEM QTY PART NO. DESCRIPTION
1 1 595844A1 SWITCH, 4MM ROUND PNP W/QUICK DIS
2 1 36584A7 BUMPER STRIP 3-3/4
3 2 27496B1 DECAL, DO NOT OPERATOR WITH GUARD REMOVED ICON
4 1 11005HFS100 SCREW, HEX HD CAP M8X100MM LG FULL THD, SS
10 5 1 3-005352-350 GUARD, FUNNEL ACCUMULATING SQUARE LOWER 3.50"
1
6 1 3-005351 ASSY, FUNNEL AIR CYLINDER W/ FITTINGS AND ROD PIVOT
7 2 3-005341 BLOCK, MOUNTING FUNNEL GUARD
8 1 3-005312-350 GUARD, FUNNEL ACCUMULATING SQUARE UPPER 3.50"
6 9 1 3-005292 BUMPER, STOP FUNNEL DOOR M6
1 11 10 1 3-005283-350 ASSY, FUNNEL SQUARE ACCUMULATING CE METRIC - BARE 3.50"
2 C
C 11 2 2-002489-002 DECAL, HAND CRUSH/FORCE FROM RIGHT
12 1 1-33157F NUT, HEX, NYLON LOCK, M4X0.7, SS
13 1 1-31163F NUT, HEX, M8X1.25, SS
14 1 1-22163F WASHER, SPLIT LOCK, M8, SS
15 2 1-22161F WASHER, SPLIT LOCK, M6, SS
16 2 1-21161F WASHER, FLAT, M6, SS
17 1 1-15105F-016M SCREW, SHOULDER, 5MM DIA X 16MM LG, SS, ISO 7379
18 6 1-11457F-006M SCREW, BUTTON HEAD, SOCKET, M4X0.7 X 6MM LG, SS
3 19 2 1-11161F-014M SCREW, CAP, SOCKET HEAD, M6X1.0 X 14MM LG, SS
2 20 2 1-11159F-006M SCREW, CAP, SOCKET HEAD, M5X0.8 X 6MM LG, SS
15 21 4 1-11157F-005M SCREW, CAP, SOCKET HEAD, M4X0.7 X 5MM LG, SS
19 2
12 2
1
16 FASTENER TORQUE REQUIREMENTS
LEAVE .03-.06
2
GAP BETWEEN TIGHTEN ALL FASTENERS PER TABLE UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED.
MINIMUM TORQUE SHALL BE 85% OF LISTED MAXIMUM TORQUE.
NUT AND DOOR
ATTACH WITH 3M SIZE MAX TORQUE (IN-LBF)
2
1 SCOTCHWELD M2 X 0.4 2.5
1
ADHESIVE # CA-40H
1 M2.5 X 0.45 5.1
M3 X 0.5 9.0
17
1 M4 X 0.7 21.0
7 21 M5 X 0.8 42.4
2 2 M6 X 1.0 72.1
M8 X 1.25 175.0
21 M10 X 1.5 346.4
2
20 M12 X 1.75 604.1
5
1 2 18
LOW STRENGTH 6
LOCTITE
9
1
C KJD 01-11-19 1784 2-002489-002 WAS 2-002425
11005HFS100 WAS 1-11163F-100,
B CAS 9-12-17 1221
8 INVERT 595844A1
1
TOLERANCE INCHES mm
1 PLACE DIMS # .1 # 2,5
Vaulted
1
DRAWING SIZE SCALE DRAWN BY BOM REFERENCE NUMBER
C
NOTICE: THIS DOCUMENT CONTAINS PROPRIETARY INFORMATION NAME: D ROMO
AND IT SHALL NOT BE USED OR REPRODUCED OR ITS CONTENT
DISCLOSED, IN WHOLE OR PART, WITHOUT THE PRIOR WRITTEN 29/32 DATE: 3-8-17
CONSENT OF AUTOMATED PACKAGING SYSTEMS INC.
3-005297 C
THIRD ANGLE
to be RoHS Compliant INCH [MM] PROJECTION CE METRIC - 3.50"
3-005297-400
ITEM QTY PART NO. DESCRIPTION
1 1 595844A1 SWITCH, 4MM ROUND PNP W/QUICK DIS
2 1 36584A8 BUMPER, RUBBER 4.25"
3 2 27496B1 DECAL, DO NOT OPERATOR WITH GUARD REMOVED ICON
9
1
C KJD 01-11-19 1784 2-002489-002 WAS 2-002425
11005HFS100 WAS 1-11163F-100,
8 B CAS 9-12-17 1221 INVERT 595844A1
13
PART MUST BE FREE OF BURRS AND SHARP EDGES
TOLERANCE INCHES mm
1 1 PLACE DIMS # .1 # 2,5
Vaulted
C
NOTICE: THIS DOCUMENT CONTAINS PROPRIETARY INFORMATION NAME: D ROMO
AND IT SHALL NOT BE USED OR REPRODUCED OR ITS CONTENT
DISCLOSED, IN WHOLE OR PART, WITHOUT THE PRIOR WRITTEN 29/32 DATE: 3-8-17
CONSENT OF AUTOMATED PACKAGING SYSTEMS INC.
3-005297 C
THIRD ANGLE
to be RoHS Compliant INCH [MM] PROJECTION CE METRIC - 4.00"
ITEM QTY PART NO. DESCRIPTION
1 1 595946A30 GUARD, FUNNEL ROUND 3 INCH
B 2 1 595945A30 PIVOT, FUNNEL DOOR 3" ROUND
3 1 595944A30 DOOR, FUNNEL 3" ROUND
4 1 595943A30 FUNNEL, WELDMENT ROUND BODY 3 IN.
4
1
-A-
1/16
TYP. 1
16
1/16 1/4-1/2
BUSHINGS TO BE PRESSED
FIT INTO HOLES.
McMASTER-CARR
P/N 6391K122 .87
1/4 OD X 3/16 ID X 1/4 THK -A-
BRONZE BUSHING (4) REQ'D
REAM TO DIA. .187/.190
2
1 B
NOTES: UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED PART MUST BE FREE OF BURRS AND SHARP EDGES
TOLERANCE INCHES mm
1 PLACE DIMS # .1 # 2,5
Vaulted
595942A30 B
THIRD ANGLE
to be RoHS Compliant INCH [MM] PROJECTION ROUND 3" BASIC
ITEM QTY PART NO. DESCRIPTION
C 1 1 595942A30 ASS'Y, FUNNEL ROUND BASIC 3'
2 1 595939A1 CLEVIS, CYLINDER MODIFIED
3 1 595844A1 SWITCH, 4MM ROUND PNP W/QUICK DIS
4 1 36051A1 BUMPER, STOP
5 2 27741A1 CONTROL, FLOW
6 1 26526A1 SCREW, SHOULDER
1 C 7 1 25436A1 SCREW, DOOR STOP
1
8 1 200599A1 PIN, ROD CLEVIS W/ SNAP RINGS
9 1 200598A1 CYLINDER, AIR COMPACT 3/4 BORE X 3/4 STK
10 1 10361A1 SCREW, SHOULDER 3/16 DIA X 1 LG
11 1 10015N1 NUT, FULL HEX 1/4-20
12 1 10014N1 NUT, HEX MACH #10-32
13 2 10011K1 NUT, HEX ELASTIC LOCK #8-32
13
9 2
1
10
1
3 5
1 2
12
1 6
1
2
1 8
1
1 TOLERANCE
1 PLACE DIMS
INCHES
# .1
mm
# 2,5
Vaulted
C
NOTICE: THIS DOCUMENT CONTAINS PROPRIETARY INFORMATION
-
NAME: GHM3
AND IT SHALL NOT BE USED OR REPRODUCED OR ITS CONTENT
DISCLOSED, IN WHOLE OR PART, WITHOUT THE PRIOR WRITTEN 5/4 DATE: 06-04-12
CONSENT OF AUTOMATED PACKAGING SYSTEMS INC.
595941B30 C
THIRD ANGLE
to be RoHS Compliant INCH [MM] PROJECTION ROUND 3" CE
ITEM QTY PART NO. DESCRIPTION
1 1 595844A1 SWITCH, 4MM ROUND PNP W/QUICK DIS
2 1 36885A35 ASSEMBLY, ROUND FUNNEL PURCHASED 3.5 IN.
2 3 1 36051A1 BUMPER, STOP
1 4 2 28134A1 DECAL, PINCH POINT, CAUTION
5 2 27741A1 CONTROL, FLOW
6 1 26526A1 SCREW, SHOULDER
7 1 25436A1 SCREW, DOOR STOP
8 1 21107A1 CLEVIS
9 1 200598A1 CYLINDER, AIR COMPACT 3/4 BORE X 3/4 STK
10 1 10361A1 SCREW, SHOULDER 3/16 DIA X 1 LG
B 11 1 10015N1 NUT, FULL HEX 1/4-20
12 2 10011K1 NUT, HEX ELASTIC LOCK #8-32
4
2
12
1
9
1
12
1
10
1
1 5
1 2
8
1 6
1
1 TOLERANCE
1 PLACE DIMS
INCHES
# .1
mm
# 2,5
Vaulted
C
NOTICE: THIS DOCUMENT CONTAINS PROPRIETARY INFORMATION
-
NAME: D ROMO
AND IT SHALL NOT BE USED OR REPRODUCED OR ITS CONTENT
DISCLOSED, IN WHOLE OR PART, WITHOUT THE PRIOR WRITTEN 5/4 DATE: 9/22/15
CONSENT OF AUTOMATED PACKAGING SYSTEMS INC.
595941B35 B
THIRD ANGLE
to be RoHS Compliant INCH [MM] PROJECTION ROUND 3.5" CE
ITEM PART NO. QTY. DESCRIPTION
1 29279A8 1 CONNECTOR, MICRO‐FIT 3.0 CRIMP HOUSING 8 POSITION
2 28617A5 8 CONTACT,MICR.3.0,20‐24GA.FEM.
3 25817A8 10' CABLE, 8 CONDUCTOR, 22 AWG
ITEMS NOT SHOWN ITEM QTY PART NO. DESCRIPTION
QTY PART NO. DESCRIPTION ITEM 1 1 28028A1 ULTRASONIC SENSOR - EMITTER
1 3-003804 ASSY, CABLE, SUREFILL SENSOR, EMITTER/RECEIVER B 2 2 3-006575 BLOCK, SPACER SUREFILL
QTY
B 3 2 3-006573 BRACKET, MOUNTING, SENSOR SUREFILL
BALLOON
4 2 3-003741 T-NUT, MOUNTING, SURE-FILL
DESIGNATION
5 1 2-001970 SENSOR, RECEIVER, ULTRASONIC, PNP
6 2 2-001312 KNOB, M6 X 16MM LG STUD, SS
5
1 7 4 1-22159F WASHER, SPLIT LOCK, M5, SS
8 2 1-21261F WASHER, FLAT, FENDER, M6, SS
B 9 4 1-11159F-022M SCREW, CAP, SOCKET HEAD, M5X0.8 X 22MM LG, SS
1
4 1
1
2
1 B
3
1 B 4
1
2 B
6 1
1
8 8
1 1
6
1
7
2
9
B 2 3
B 1
7
2
9
2
B
TOLERANCE INCHES mm
1 PLACE DIMS # .1 # 2,5
Vaulted
C
NOTICE: THIS DOCUMENT CONTAINS PROPRIETARY INFORMATION NAME: DMF
AND IT SHALL NOT BE USED OR REPRODUCED OR ITS CONTENT
DISCLOSED, IN WHOLE OR PART, WITHOUT THE PRIOR WRITTEN 3/4 DATE: 11-16-15
CONSENT OF AUTOMATED PACKAGING SYSTEMS INC.
3-003742 B
THIRD ANGLE
to be RoHS Compliant INCH [MM] PROJECTION SURE-FILL
SCHEMATICS
Subject Page
Page 9-1
BLANK PAGE
Page 9-2
WARNING: SOLENOID
PRINTER
MAY BE HOT! SEAL BAR HOME
VALVE MANIFOLD (OPTIONAL)
PRESSURE
SET MAIN AIR REGULATOR TO P1 = 80 PSI (0.55 MPa) SOLENOID DUMP COVER LABEL SENSOR 0V10 SEAL BAR
10V3
SET GREEN WINDOW IN GAUGE TO 75-85 PSI (0.52 - 0.59 MPa) VALVE NEAR FITTING:
0S9
VALVE
P1 0Z8-1 10Z1 1V1-2B
0Z6 0V7 5EA EXTEND
3V1/2 - STATION 3
4V1/2 - STATION 4
8V1/2 - STATION 8
PIPE LABEL P1 TUBE LABEL:
1V1 - STATION 1
2V1 - STATION 2
5V1 - STATION 5
6V1 - STATION 6
7V1 - STATION 7
9V1 - STATION 9
0Z4 NEAR FITTING: RESERVOIR 10A4 2 P1 11V1-1
TUBE LABEL:
0Z5
P1 0V7-2
0Z8 P 1 P1 11V1-2 1
PNEUMATIC 0V3 RESERVOIR
3EB
PRESSURE SUPPLY 5EA 4A 11V1
3E 2 1
SOURCE 0Z8-3 1P 2
P1 SEAL BAR
1P 2 1 2 1 2 2 1 3 2 3
P0 P1 2B CYLINDER
P0 P1 1P 3EB RETRACT
0Z1 4
FITTING
TUBE LABEL: 1
3E PRIMARY 1V4-1
P1 10V3-1P
REGULATED TUBE LABEL:
PRESSURE PRINTER VALVE 10V3-1P 0.6mm
P1 0V7-2 11V2
(OPTIONAL) IRIS
(NORMALLY PLUGGED)
TUBE LABEL: 10Z2
TUBE LABEL: 2
P1 0Z8-1 SEAL BAR INTERCEPT
0Z2 P1 0Z8-3
VALVE PILOT 1V2-82 4V2-2B HOME VALVE
FLOWLINES: n 4 X 0.7 P1
FLOWLINES (EXCEPT WHERE MARKED): 1/4 NPT SCH 40 BRASS (EXCEPT WHERE NOTED) TUBE LABEL:
HEAT BAR INTERCEPT
ALL TUBES IN THIS SECTION SHALL BE BLACK VALVE PILOT 2V2-82 P1 11V2-2
0V10
P1 3EB 5EA RESERVOIR 0V10
0V10 TUBE LABEL:
SUPPLY P1 P1 3EB 5EA STATION 7 TUBE LABEL:
P1 3EB 5EA P1 7A2-1
0Z8-3 (OPTIONAL) P1 7V1-4A
TUBE LABEL:
1Z3 1V2 7V1
TUBE LABEL: P1 1V2-2 SEAL FLATTENERS
TUBE LABEL:
TUBE LABEL: P1 1V2-1P 82 EXTEND (OPTIONAL)
P1 1A5-1
P1 1V1-4A EXTEND 7A2
STATION 4 1
3E
BLACK 2
STATION 1 2
EXTEND (CLAMP)
5EA 4A
4V1 TUBE LABEL:
1V1 1P 1P BLUE P1 7A2-2
BLACK 1A5 4V3
4Z5 2B RETRACT (UP)
1 3EB TUBE LABEL:
BLACK 5EA 4A BLACK BLACK BLUE P1 7A3-1
SEAL BAR SEAL BAR AIR GUIDE
SEAL BAR 1.6mm IRIS 1 2 1
BLUE
TUBE LABEL: 1
5EA 4A HOME CIRCUIT HOME CIRCUIT (1.0mm OPTION) 2
P1 7V1-2B
BLUE 2
1P 11V1-2 11V1-1 1P
2B 1 2
3EB BLUE 7A3
TUBE LABEL: RETRACT EXTEND
TUBE LABEL: 1V4 2B SEAL BAR HOME CIRCUIT 11V2-2
P1 1V1-2B P1 1A5-2
TUBE LABEL:
P 3EB P1 7A3-2
TUBE LABEL: BLUE
STATION 8
1S6 P1 4V2-2B
PRESSURE
4V2 8V1
SENSOR
4Z4
3V4 BLUE
UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED
6V3 TUBE LABEL: 6V5
Under Review
PART MUST BE FREE OF BURRS AND SHARP EDGES
D
NOTICE: THIS DOCUMENT CONTAINS PROPRIETARY INFORMATION NAME: MDS
P3 = P4 = 0.31 MPa (45 PSI) AND IT SHALL NOT BE USED OR REPRODUCED OR ITS CONTENT
DISCLOSED, IN WHOLE OR PART, WITHOUT THE PRIOR WRITTEN N/A DATE: 10-23-15
CONSENT OF AUTOMATED PACKAGING SYSTEMS INC.
SCHEMATIC, PNEUMATIC
DRAWING NO. SHEET 1 OF 1 REV
G
THIRD ANGLE
to be RoHS Compliant INCH [MM] PROJECTION AB 500 AB2-500-PNE
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
3-007857
\CBL34282 _ ETHERNET CABLE
MAIN CONTROL BOARD (MCB) .----'\O"",==--~-► TO OPERATOR INTERFACE
MCB ETHERNET CONNECTION ORIENTATION
B1 TOUCH SCREEN, TABLET (REF SHT 34)
THE MCB IS LOCATED IN THE MAINE-BOX. THE MCB IS WHERE ALLTHE
I
PROCESSING OF THE SYSTEM SOFTWARE THAT CONTROLS AND MONITORS
2
3
ALL MACHINE FUNCTIONS TAKES PLACE. THE MOTOR CONTROL/DRIVE AND
VALVE MANIFOLD OUTPUTS ARE ALSO LOCATED ON THE MCB.
ETHERNET CABLE 3-004867
TO HEAT PC BOARD ◄:1---,>.r\~..,B..,L3.,.32'"'9:=.2 --,
(REF SHTS 5 & 33) D1
r~ PJ221
[hl][ti]
lBU®l
[ID]
LBlr®
Cl
5 ENET II II
J:_ II II
1J, 0.f.
ro ro
R,0
6
J1 01 p J2
t Ja
01 -,
00
t
00
7 l_______J; gg 3-003479
I I oo CBL21021 _
8 J6 88P+--------~-
oo
TO EBCB-J6
00 (REF SHT 21)
DJ4 00
9 00
■o
,c_,
10 VYBRID
RS232 11------+----------------~
I 'a'6--
oo
JS 00
00 3-003480
11 LITHIUM ION 11----+-----, J10 00 CBL21022 _
12
BATTERY I 0 •·~
,Ii] J9
MCB
MAIN CONTROL BOARD J11
J■0
gg
J13 J12 88P+----------► TO EBCB-J12
00
00
- (REF SHT 21)
3-003391
TO DATAMAX PRINTER _ CBL37241 MCB - 4-001007.x.x.x
s~ -~c:.
00
ggo------,1
00
00
■ o. 3-003481
13 CONNECTION DIAGRAM ◄_t------,------------, ,-
00
,c_,
CBL21023 _
TO EBCB-J13
C TO HEAT PCB (REF SHT 6 & 37) J16 :. ■ O•
_, - (REF SHT 21) C
1-
14 3-003387
(REF SHTS 05 & 30) EBCB-J5
CBL14041 IITT
L . _ - - - - ~ J15 '----------1,gg ■0
•06"
00
15 (REF SHT 14) 00 J18 00 3-003483
a J11 ~I " 0 00
00 CBL22021 _
~ -
16 , .• J20 88P+---------► TO EBCB-J20
D55 ■0 00 (REF SHT 22)
ESTOP RELAY
- ~
00 00
00 00
17
+24VDC LOGIC 00 00 3-003482
POWER SUPPLY 0 0 0
~gggg J21
00
D56 ,a" CBL21024 _
TO EBCB-J18
18 REFLEX TRIM (REF SHT 10) 0 0 0 J19 •00,, - (REF SHT 21)
00
15VDC HEAT 00000
J22 3-003485
POWER SUPPLY - 3-005449 [EHL] DS7 ■ 0000 00
00
CBL22023 _
,~L-__
19 J23
J24 ggpt----------► TO EBCB-J24
600W
(REF SHT 10)
MCB ESTOP RELAY
TO EBCB-J36
_ CBL22141 ;;]
◄~1-----+<1'.~: J36
AUTOMATED PACKAGING SYSTEMS
FAB MAIN CONTROL
3-001815
- (REF SHT 22)
20 (REF SHT 22) 3-003484
CBL22022 ._
---------1~
21
PRINTER e-------,"
c_H---1.
- TO EBCB-J23
(REF SHT 22)
POWER SUPPLY - 48VDC MOTOR CROWBAR
0 ■
J26 J27 J28
22
(REF SHT 10) POWER SUPPLY
600W 2 MOTORS
BOARD
00
-~gg rgggg□ggg~, I ~000°0000 iI
6
.ggggggg~l
~ '
. J~9 . '~a
jggggggg~, J30 -~ggoigo~
23 (REF SHT 14) 00 0000000 ■
30
(REF SHT 10)
3-003542
CBL20071
SERVO
<L □ IJERED>
3-008031
(RAISED>
L <LDIJERED>
3-005032
<RAISED>
31 3-003407 3-003540 3-008029 3-003539 3-008030 3-003537 3-003486 3-003409 3-003538
CBL16071 CBL17071 CBL15071 CBL15221 CBL15072 CBL15222 CBL22024 CBL18071 CBL19071
~-~--~ UNWIND NIP ~-S-E-A~L_B_A_R~ , J
32 MAIN NIP DANCER MAIN NIP DANCER UNWIND SEAL BAR MTR
MOTOR POSITION MOTOR MOTOR MOTOR MOTOR MOTOR FEEDBACK
FEEDBACK FEEDBACK (OPTION) (OPTION) TO EBCB-J35 FEEDBACK (OPTION)
33 (REF SHT 16) (REF SHT 17 & 20) (REF SHT 15) (REF SHT 15) (REF SHT 15) (REF SHT 15) (REF SHT 22) (REF SHT 18) (REF SHT 19)
~~
A FUSE NO.
FHl
AMPS
SA
LED NO.
DSS
LED FUNCTION
FHl IS OK
FUSE FUNCTION
24VDC TO MAIN CONTROL BOARD
APS PART NUMBER
200507AS
A
36
FH2 2A DS6 FH2 IS BLOWN OR ESTOP VALVE PACK AND FOOT SWITCH OR PALM SWITCH 200507A2 TITLE: CONNECTION DIAGRAM
37 FH3
FH4
2A
2A
DS7
DS8
FH3 IS BLOWN
FH4IS BLOWN
24VDC TO ESTOP CIRCUIT POWER 200507A2
PWMOUTPUTS-CURTAIN FANS AND PRINT HD SOL 200507A2
MOTOR 1 POWER - MAIN NIP
RI Automated
lliil\\tliil PACKAGING SYSTEMS
MAIN CONTROL BOARD
MCB
FHS lSA DS9 FHS IS BLOWN OR ESTOP 200507A15 DRAWN BY: DATE:
38 LIFECYCLE STATE: PREV SHT: SHEET: NEXT SHT:
FH6 lOA DSlO FH6 IS BLOWN OR ESTOP MOTOR 2 POWER - DANCER 200507A10 10175 PHILIPP P/\RKIJAY - STREETSB□R□, DH 44241 J.BIRD 18 2017 2 J
Vaulted
FH7 lOA DSll FH7 IS BLOWN OR ESTOP MOTOR 3 POWER- UNWIND 200507A10
39
FH8 lOA DS12 FH8 IS BLOWN OR ESTOP MOTOR 4 POWER - SEAL BAR 200507A10
AB500/600-SCH-CE C
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
4
D D
5
DATAMAX EMERGENCY
MAIN CONTROL CONNECT PLATE PRINTER STOP RELAY
6 3-003515 3-003490 PRINT HEAD
GPIO SAFETY RELAY
F □□T
Sw'. CBL37033 SOLENOIO
FOOT SWITCH 3-002820 (SEE NOTE 1 ) (REF SHT 37) (REF SHT 13)
7
OR PALM SWITCf CBL26361 3-003489 3-003902 (REF SHT 37)
#1 CBL26B121 CBL37031 CBL13211
8 (REF SHT 26B) PALM Sw', J26B031
3-004242 3-003389 SPARE
9 CBL26B031 SEE BOARD
PALM SWITCH CBL26B311 ➔) SCH. FOR
#2 DETAILS
10
(REF SHT 26B) 3-004243
I ,, I
0
PALM Sw',
11 J2~~311
3-003389
CBL26B321 JB Jll
- -
3-003480 SENSORS AND
12 VALVE STATION 3-003523
1-12 CBL26022
J7EB 3-005231
I ...... I CBL26021
,,
I r J14 0
"°7 ,__ -
(\J
7
CBL21022 INPUT SIGNALS
MCB-J18
(REF SHT 21)
13 J7EB P26021
I
14
(REF SHT 26A)
UFCB 3-003411
I I
3-003500
I
"
7
3-002003
~
-
0
7
- ~
CBL21021
MISCELLANEOUS
3-003479 INPUT SIGNALS
MCB-J6
C 15 INPUT SIGNALS CBL23042 I J1EB
...... I
,, CBL23041 - -
- - (REF SHT 21) C
- -"° -
UFCB-J1 3-003482 VALVE STATION
I I ~ 1-5
-
(REF SHT 23) CBL21024
16
- 7 CD FOOT/PALM SW.
~ n
7 0 7 MCB-J18
- (\J
17 UFCB 3-003533
+12V & +24VDC CBL24044 I J4EB
,, I
......
3-003497
CBL24043 +24VDC
MCB-J15 3-003387
~
7 3-003483 MISCELLANEOUS
CBL22021 OUTPUT SIGNAU
(REF SHT 21)
18 UFCB-J4
(REF SHT 24) I I CBL14041 If)
7 ..... 0 -
MCB-J20
(REF SHT 22) 3-003481 HIGH VOLTAGE
-
(REF SHT 14) - C") CBL21023 SENSOR
19
BJ
~
MCB-J13
20
TD UFCB 3-003501
PUTPUT SIGNAL~ CBL23043
UFCB-J2
I J~~B
,,
I -
er,
7
'<t
(\J -
7
~
(REF SHT 21)
~
UFCB I/0 & 3-003413 3-003502
~
(\J CBL22022 6-12
22 J3EB C")
MCB-J23
E-STOP STRING CBL24042 ......
,, CBL24041 7
7
UFCB-J3 - If)
(REF SHT 22)
23 (REF SHT 24) C")
~
29 3-003488
3-003390 3-003394
30 ~01 - - - CBL30061 - - - - ----
CBL20262
J
AUX CONNECT PLATE ~EB J21EB J19EB
3-003517
31 (SEE NOTE 1) ~ ~ - - - ~~--- - - - ~ L
32 2-002140 3-005034 NOT ES1
<BY CUSTOMER) CBL20261 1. BULKHEAD CONNECTORS THROUGH
33 CONVEYOR SIGNALING DANCER ELECTRICAL BOX SIDE \,/ALL.
INTERFACE INTERFACE POSITION 2, ADDITIONAL FUSES NOT SHO\,/N
34 FEEDBACK ON REAR SIDE OF PCB.
(REF SHT 11) (REF SHT 30) (REF SHT 20)
35
A A
36
TITLE: CONNECTION DIAGRAM
37
FUSE NO. AMPS LED NO. LED FUNCTION FUSE FUNCTION APS PART NUMBER RI Automated
lliil\\tliil PACKAGING SYSTEMS
ELECTRICAL BOX CONNECTOR BOARD
EBCB
38 FHl 2A FUSE FHl IS BLOWN OR MISSING 24VDCTO EBCB AND UFCB BOARD 200507A2 DRAWN BY: DATE: LIFECYCLE STATE: PREV SHT: SHEET: NEXT SHT:
10175 PHILIPP P/\RKIJAY - STREETSB□R□, DH 44241 J.BIRD 18 2017 Vaulted 2 3 4
39 NOTICE: THIS DOCUMENT CONTAINS PROPRIETARY INFORMATION AND IT SHALL NOT BE 1--'-P'-"RO"'-DU'-"C-'-T-'-GR-'-'0-'-'UP-'-:----------1--"'-DR=AW=I=NG'--'N=U=MB=ER=:---t---=RE"-V'--:--1
¥/;~p~~c~~sOFco~iJiis::=N: :S?~N~~· WITHOUT AB500/ AB600 AB500/600-SCH-CE C
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
2
UPPER FRAME CONNECTOR BOARD (UFCB) 3-003198
NOTE• UFCB IS THE UPPER FRAME CONNECTOR BOARD,
3 THE UFCB IS LOCATED ON THE UNDERSIDE OF THE BAGGERJ ALL DEVICES FROM THE TOP OF THE MACHINE CONNECT TD THE UFCB,
THE UFCB THEN DISTRIBUTES THE I/D AND PD\./ER TD THE EBCB AND TD THE MAIN CONTROL BOARD <MCB),
4
D D
5 CYCLE EYE
SENSOR 3-003844
6 (REF SHT 27) CBL27332 ~ CBL27361
OR
7 FUNNEL OPEN BAG DETECT ANTI-JAM SEAL BAR OUT SUREFILL SEAL BAR OUT
& SENSOR REAR SENSOR & ANTI-JAM SENSORS PRESS.SENSOR
8 .,LOSED SENSORE NO. 1 SENSORS
(REF SHT 28) (REF SHT 28) (REF SHT 28) (REF SHT 28) (REF SHT 28) (REF SHT 27)
9 3-003894 3-003529 3-003672 3-003541 3-003804 3-003531
3-0052241
CBL28033 CBL28181 CBL28101 CBL28291 CBL28121 CBL28121 CBL27231
10 CBL28063 CBL28131 CBL28321 CBL28061
CBL28091 CBL28351
11 CLAMP SENSORS BAG DETECT COUNT PHOTO SEAL BAR OUT JOG FWD & REV 3-003534 LIGHT POLE
PHEUMATIC 3-003532 SENSORS SENSOR FRONT EYE & ANTI-JAM ROCKER CBL27031
12 PRESSURE CBL27031 NO. 2 SENSORS BUTTONS
(REF SHT 28) (REF SHT 28) (REF SHT 27) (REF SHT 28) (REF SHT 28) (REF SHT 27)
TRANSDUCER
13 (REF SHT 27) 3-003403 3-003530 3-003806 3-003405
CBL28171 CBL28251 3-00~ CBL28211
CBL27132 CBL28032
CBL28201 CBL28062 CBL28241 3-003535 CURTAIN
14 HEAT BAR CBL27291 FANS
SENSORS
C 15 I I I
CBL27311
CBL27331 (REF SHT 27) C
~~o
,L,
(REF SHT 28) CBL27351
16 0 IJ30 I J29 I J28 J27 ( DJ~6 I ~ J24 MAIN CONTROL CONNECT PLATE
3-003515
-
3-003411 □
LIGHT CURTAIN 3-003913-T HIGH VOLTAGE 3-003404
I
~
17 BOARD CBL27101
TRANSMITTER CBL29081 .--t
3-003500 UPPER FRAME
(Y)
~
I/0 TO EBOX
~q
CBL23042 ...... CBL23041
18 (REF SHT 29) (REF SHT 27)
I -
7
3-003198 revD
0/ Jl I
I ,,, I CONNECTOR BD.
(REF SHT 23)
19 PNEUMATIC 3-003398 1
DUMP VALVE CBL27261
~~ J19 I J1s I J17 J16 I J15 I 3-003412 I I 3-003501 UPPER FRAME
20
21
(REF SHT 27)
I
-
0 0/ J2 ~q CBL23044 J~~B
,,
CBL23043 I/0 TO EBOX
CONNECTOR BD.
(REF SHT 23)
22
3-003547
MUTING LED CBL27231 I ~ I J12 II Jll JlO J9 11 J8 I I
~q
3-0034131
i
.::!;
7 L J _J 0/ J3 CBL24042 I J~~B I
I ,, I
3-003502
CBL24041
UPPER FRAME
I/0 TO EBOX
CONNECTOR BD.
(REF SHT 24)
-
24
pl
(REF SHT 29)
QJ:] I I
B 25 QI J7 I J32 I 80 J5 \qo 3-0035331
CBL24044 J~~B
3-003497 UPPER FRAME
CBL24043 POWER TO EBOX
CONNECTOR BD. B
26
27 3-003546
\ LJ (REF SHT 24)
ESTOP GUARD
CBL12131
BULKHEAD FITTINGS THRU
SWITCHES ELECTRICAL BOX
CBL12132 3-004623
28 CBL12133 3-005230 3-005230 3-005496 SIDE \./ALL
(REF SHT 12) CBL27021 CBL27061 CBL13321 CBL34241
29 VALVE ANT -JAM VALVE ANT-JAM HEAT BOARD HMI CONNECTOR
SAFETY, (SEAL SAFETY, (HEAT INTERFACE BOARD, HMI PUSH
FRONT SAFETY 3-004912 BUTTONS
30 GUARD SWITCH CBL12134
(REF SHT 27) (REF SHT 13 & 33) (REF SHT 12 & 34)
(REF SHT 27)
3-001858
31 (REF SHT 12) JUMPER PLUG
32 {OPTIONAL} 3-005588
EXTERNAL CBL12271
33 E-STOP CABLE 3-001858
(REF SHT 12) 3-004624 HMI CONNECTOR
JUMPER PLUG CBL34301 BOARD, HMICB
34 POWER
(REF SHT 34)
35 RIGHT REAR 3-003527
DANCER THREAD
A E-STOP BUTTON~
CBL12331
3-001858
A
36 (REF SHT 12 & 27) JUMPER PLUG TITLE: CONNECTION DIAGRAM
UPPER FRAME CONNECTOR BOARD
37
LEFT REAR 3-003528 ~Autonmted
PACKAGING SYSTEMS
UFCB
38 DANCER THREAD CBL12333 DRAWN BY: I DATE: I LIFECYCLE STATE: IPREV SHT:I SHEET: NEXT SHT:
E-STOP BUTTONS 3-001858 10175 PHILIPP PARKIJAY - STREETSB□R□, DH 44241 J.BIRD I7/18/2017 I Vaulted I 3 I 4 5
(REF SHT 12 & 27) JUMPER PLUG
39 N011CE: THIS DOCUMENT CONTAINS PROPRIETARY INFORMATION AND IT SHALL NEITHER PRODUCT GROUP: I DRAWING NUMBER: REV:
ABS00/600-SCH-CE C
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
2
3
4 HMI CONNECTOR BOARD (HMICB) 3-004312 CROWBAR BOARD 3-001999 HEAT WIRE CONTROL BOARD 3-005590
D NOTE• HMICB IS THE HUMAN MACHINE INTERFACE CONNECTOR BOARD,
THE HMICB IS THE CONNECTION POINT FDR ALL I/D AND PDIJER DISTRIBUTION THE CRDIJBAR BOARD IS LOCATED IJITHIN THE MAIN E-B □ X, THE HEAT IJIRE CONTROL BOARD IS LOCATED ON THE
D
5
BETIJEEN THE HM! AND THE UPPER FRAME CONNECTOR BOARD (UFCB), IJHILE IT CONTROLS THE +48V MOTOR VOLTAGE, IJHEN THE UNDERSIDE OF THE BAGGER, IT CONTROLS THE TEMERATURE
ALSO PROVIDING ETHERNET CONNECTION BETIJEEN THE TABLET AND THE MAIN 3-PHASE DC BRUSHLESS ABRUPTLY HALT, AN UNIJANTED OF THE HEA TIJIRE LDCA TED ON THE SEALBAR, THE HIJCB
6 E-BDX, THIS MAKES THE HM! MORE MODULAR AND GREATLY SIMPLIFIES 'BACK-EMF' VOLTAGE IS FED BACK TD THE MOTOR PDIJER RECEIVES ETHERNET COMMANDS FROM THE MCB, MAIN
INST ALLA TIDN, SUPPLY, IJHEN THAT VOLTAGE EXCEEDS +48VDC PLUS 5V, CONTROL BOARD, TD SET THE HEATIJIRE TEMPERATURE, THE
7 THE 'CB' ENABLES A CAPACITIVE AND RESISTIVE LOAD, HIJCB PULSES CURRENT THROUGH DNBDARD TRANSISTORS TD
PULSING THE LOAD EVERY l00MSEC REDUCING THE MOTOR THE HEA TIJIRE,
8 VOLTAGE LEVEL TD THE NOMINAL +48V,
9
ETHERNET
10 TO MAIN
LAN CONNECTIONS TO
(BOT) TABLET SERVO MOTOR POWER SUPPLY CONTROL BOARD J1 E-STOP INTERFACE & 3-005494 13.5-24VDC
11 ITO E-STOP HM! PUSH BUTTONI (REF SHT 2 & 33) LOGIC POWER INPUT
(REF SHEET 12-28,34-19) (REF SHEET 34-07,17) +48VDC CBL33O31 POWER INPUT FROM
(REF SHEET 10-10 & 14-26) 3-005596 FROM MCB/UFCB POWER SUPPLY
12 3-004614 (REF SHTS 13 & 33)
BOT 3-004621 CBL33291 (REF SHTS 10 & 33)
CBL12251 CBL34141
13
14 TO GND CONNECTION
TO RESET PUSH BUTTON I
IUSB CONNECTION TOI
TABLET
(REF SHEET 34-07)
3-003694
CBL14251
t I 3-005496
CBL13321 D
•
ON HMI FACEPLATE 3-006787
C 15 (REF SHEET 34-18) (REF SHEET 34-19) C
CBL34O61 J503
3-0046221 3-004615
16 CBL34191 ~ -
I I
17
• IMVT~11 r , r7 4 •rlJ J612 J608
Lo
u oJ I . ·•I~•
:::J ....
CROWBAR BOARD I FH1 I
18 J606
3
:.·1
1
1· :. ·1
' I
s
~
I. I • • -, 3-001999
....
4
19 J602 HM! CONNECTOR BOARD 0 ••••
20
J607
I I,
()
••••
•••• (HMICB) 1
()
•••• C
0 3-004312 HEAT WIRE CONTROL BOARD
1
0 •••• •··. I
~
•••• 0
- -
21 (HWCB)
·, • ••• C 8
••••••••
J605 1
..
J603
.
• •07 3-005590
.• 5
22 J609
23
• ,o 1} ••••••• II
'tt'
, ,
II J611
HMI-BUTTONS
J■1
....
L_J
HMI r
■l
-~604~ •
24 I I
I I
j I 3-004616
25 CBL34112
B 13-004623
TO CYCLE START/STOP
B
USB CONNECTION TO CBL34241
26 PUSH BUTTON HMI IJs10I
EXTERIOR OF HMI IE-STOP I/0 TO UFCB-J5 I FRONT PANEL J506
(REF SHEET 12-33, 34-24)
•
ENCLOSURE J504 J505
•~nki
27 (REF SHEET 34-19) 3-004617
BOT 3-004866 CBL34211
28 3-004624
CBL34281 CBL343O1 POWER CONNECTIONS TO
29 ANDROID TABLET
LAN CONNECTIONS TO
MAIN EBOX, MCB-J1
I +24V HMI FROM UFCB-J61 (REF SHEET 34-15) 3-003393 3-005497
3-005495
D
3-005495
(REF SHEET 34-29) CBL14261 CBL33241
30 (REF SHEET 2, 34-23) CBL33O32 CBL33O32
SERVO MOTORS POWER THERMOCOUPLE
31 CONNECTION +48VDC "AMBIENT" HEAT WIRE POWER OUTPUT TO
(REF SHEET 14-25) (REF SHT 33) VOLTAGE FEEDBACK HEAT WIRE
32 (REF SHT 33) (REF SHT 33)
33
34
35
A A
36
TITLE: CONNECTION DIAGRAM
37 HMICB, CROWBAR BOARD
& HEAT CONTROL BOARD
38 DRAWN BY: DATE: LIFECYCLE STATE: PREV SHT: SHEET: NEXT SHT:
10175 PHILIPP PARKIJAY - STREETSB□R□, □H 44241 J.BIRD 18 201 Vaulted 4 5 6A
39
AB5OO/6OO-SCH-CE C
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
3 TO PRINT HEAD
RIBBON SENSOR
4 (REF SHT 36)
D 3-003887
TO THERMAL
PRINTHEAD J2
D
5 CBL36291
0 0 0 (REF SHT 36)
6 3-007561
0 0
<t:
0 CBL36022
0
~
0
3-003489
7 PRINTER GP I/0 . ....I
rn
0
8
TO EBCB J14
(REF SHT 37)
CBL37031
--
0
1-1
c..
UJ
....I
....I
<t:
J 12 0 3-007318
(!)
a:
<t:
0 c..
9 0
DJ11 J5
J2
10 ---------++---------! J1
[Il 0 RIBBON CABLE TO 3 -003888 □ J10 3-004290
PRINTER DISPLAY 1--C_B_L_3_6_3 7_ l--+----+t 0 0 0 CBL36021
11
12
--
0
1-1
c..
(REF SHT 36) J4 0
(!)
0
ul ~ 3-003883
PRINT HEAD DRIVER BOARD,
(PRIMARY SIDE VIEW,
m~
13 TO PRINTER POWER CBL35321 INTERNAL TO PRINTER EBOX)
14 iul
(.)
SUPPLY BD - J3
(REF SHT 35)
JS
C 15
0 0 TO PRINTER POWER 3-003884 C
3-003391 ....I SUPPLY BD - J5 CBL35231 J7
16 PRINTER GP I/0 (.)
<t:
TO MAIN PCB J 16 CBL37241 :;;; 1-1 (REF SHT 35) 0
0 a:
(REF SHT 37) (.) UJ
17 Cl)
0 0
0 0
18
23
24
25
B B
26
0 0
>=c5
27 J5 3-003884
CBL35231 TO PRINTER
BACKPLANE PCB J7 3-008025
28 (REF SHT 35) 0 0
38 DRAWN BY: DATE: LIFECYCLE STATE: PREV SHT: SHEET: NEXT SHT:
10175 PHILIPP P/\RKIJAY - STREETSB□R□, □H 44241 J.BIRD 18 2017 Vaulted s 6A se
39
AB500/600-SCH-CE C
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
3 TO PRINT HEAD
RIBBON SENSOR
4 (REF SHT 36)
D 3-003887 TO THERMAL
PRINTHEAD J2
D
5 CBL36291
0 0 0 (REF SHT 36)
6 3-007561
0 0
<t:
0
0 CBL36022
~
0
3-003489
7 PRINTER GP I/0 . ....I
rn
0
8
TO EBCB J14
(REF SHT 37)
CBL37031
--
0
1-1
c..
UJ
....I
....I
<t:
J 12 0 3-007318
a:
9
(!)
0
<t:
c.. NOTE:OPTIONAL CABLE ASSY AND HOUSING
FOR REMOTE PRINTER DISPLAY
DJ11 J5 0
J2
10 ,------------7 ttt----+------++---------1J1
[Il 0 I
I
TO REMOTE
PRINTER DISPLAY
3-006270
CBL 36 B371
I DJ 10 0 0 0
3-004290
CBL36021
11
12
--
0
1-1
m~
13 TO PRINTER POWER (PRIMARY SIDE VIEW,
CBL35321
14 iul
(.)
SUPPLY BD - J3
(REF SHT 35)
JS INTERNAL TO PRINTER EBOX)
C 15
0 0 TO PRINTER POWER 3-003884 C
3-003391 ....I SUPPLY BD - J5 CBL35231
PRINTER GP I/0 (.)
<t:
J7
16 CBL37241 (REF SHT 35) 0
TO MAIN PCB J 16 :;;; 1-1
a:
(REF SHT 37) 0 UJ
(.)
17 Cl)
0 0
0 0
18
23
24
25
B B
26
0 0
>=c5
27 J5 3-003884
CBL35231 TO PRINTER
BACKPLANE PCB J7 3-008025
28 (REF SHT 35) 0 0
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
'' -+
-00'.J
11
1;:
11 I - 1- F= - F
1-
I~ ,II T 111,--
f-' f
r
J- __le =,I -+---- U III I =np
;:1
f-•=" _f- b,f' tt::' _f- JL JI'
◄
JI,·, -
1111
FF
- c,[ I- I I I
F- _Jl 11 □-□ F =J U :UFL 3:'[C-J[ I.' 1'11 - I[ ,D T ,I I= - . 1 j,
=nl -~L GF □ l_ ID
E! Automated
- PACKAGING SYSTEMS DRAWN BY:
f-'-',_,[f(_
DATE:
H 11 I
LIFECYCLE STATE:
f-(_I
-+ L
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
01
3-003503-001 ~ 3-003503-002 PCB10021
A.C. MOY BOARD 3-003503-015
LINE CORD
PSRC10021 LF10021 MAINS FUSE LF10022 3 003503 014 BRN l2A\IG 8
L < EL ti
CBL10021
I BLK(BRN)
~--=...;..;;..~-~. FU10021 ___ ..;;;;;.."'-'-'=---~ -BRN_12AIIG 3 - 001215 LOUT 1 ;>------10023
TB1
p~ t:~~~~~~
02
p 10021~~~~~\IG O O L-IN LOUT 2 ~•NC
03 I o PE
. 21014AI4121014A10 10032~
BLU_12A\IG N LINE
~100364 N-1N
L.0AD N'
N ouT 1 HolfgiG 6
~ 3-004183-010 TB 1
N< I WHT BLU 3-004183-001 N OUT 2 1/■NC
04 •NC~
N I N PE L.:©:.__ _..l,lLlllll[:.i,__ __ _ . EARTH
D 3-003505-001 EMI LINE FILTER 6 D
05 I 3-003505-002 27355A1 GRN-YEL_l2A\IG T8 1 N
3 003505 015 f.I\
06 EARTH < E
I GRN GRN GRN-YEL_12A\IG
EGND_LB>-U-SBA-R~=~~-uE""G_N_D__B_U_S_BAR
- - ~N-YEL 12A\IG I
_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _---c~JE-G_N_D_-B_U_S_BA_R_ ____,,u----+----+---~3=-0~0=35~0=5-=00=3----.I------+~ V INTERNALLY F'USED AT 16A L AND N. v- 10015
TB 1
1 ~to 33-05
\/HT_IOA\IG
HEAT POWER OVDC
LINE PLUG
07 CUSTOMER'S PJ10021
I \IHT_IOAIIG
PD'v/ER I
08 RECEPTACLE WARNING• POIJER IS ALIJAYS LIVE TD • NOTE• PLACE 22140A1 ON
I
LINE FILTER, CONTACTORS, AND POIJER NC TERMINALS OF ASSY 3-007215 I
SERVO MOTOR FUSE ~ L UID
09 SIJITCH, UNPLUG AND USE CAUTION 8 BRN_l2A\IG I BRN_l2A\IG FU10101 -
A\IG
17
DIN RAIL ASSEMBLY
(SH □ ~N FDR REFERENCE ONLY)
SS10161
POWER SWITCH, 20A
1y;--
I
- -~ 5
SWITCHED POIJER BELOW THIS RUNG,
3-003503-009
24
24VDC POWER SUPPLY 3-004184-001
25 7 FU 10251 BRNJ2A\IG
JUMPERS (2-002474)
B TBl-1 TD TBl-2
l>----10172-----r::::1----10251
TB 1 BRNJ2A\IG 5A SLOW 3-003503-013
L B
26 TBl-2 TD TBl-3 3-003503-012 27014A8 V+
BAGGER POWER SUPPLY
27 5 24~o6r' 3-004185-001
N PS10251
TB1 IIHT_18A\IG
28
l>-EG_N_D___
BU_S_BA_R-------------------.,,......,.,..,..,,.,.,,.....,..,...,..-
.__ ________________
@ v- __. I-{
3
>-----'-to
TB1
10051
OVDC
14-06
29
3-003505-007
GRN-YEL..12A\IG
30
31
32
33
34
35
A A
36
TITLE:
ELECTRICAL SCHEMATIC
37 115VAC POWER AND EARTHING
38 DRAWN BY: DATE: LIFECYCLE STATE: PREV SHT: SHEET: NEXT SHT:
10175 PHILIPP PARK\IAY - STREETSB□R□, □H 44241 J.BIRD 7/18/2017 Vaulted 9 10 11
39
ABSOO/6OO-SCH-CE C
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
01
BLU_14AWG
50GLE60 HZ. 11-35
06 SIN PHASE EARTH<+--PG...,RN""'-"......,=U-<€-E_ _ _ _ _ _ ____:E=---<tE--------, 11061 CBL1104)tBLK ) TO CONVEYOR MOTOR POWER
PE
07 11071 CBL11042tGRNC!'.EL ) TO CONVEYOR MomR POWER
7
EGND_BUSBAR EGND_BUSBAR EGND_BUSBAR
08
GRN-YEL 14AWG
09
d 1
~1092
ORIENTAL MOTOR
SIGNAL CABlf
11093CBL1109YYEL ) TO CONVEYOR MOTOR FEEDBACK
10
11
L_
---7 CONVEYOR BOX WALL
1~I'" sccw
X2
SSTOP MODE
11101CBL1109YBRN
11111 CBL1109}1RED
)
)
TO CONVEYOR MOTOR FEEDBACK
13
CONVEYOR DRIVE PROGRAMMING:
I SNC
X4
11131CBL1109YGRN
)
BAGGER E-STOP
200698A1
LF11221
LINE ALTER
29510A1
(SEE CONVEYOR DRIVE PROGRAMMING INSTRUCTIONS)
7
19
CR11201 2949 97Al6Alafi,
LINE LOAD
CONVEYOR MOTOR
POWER CABlf
PJ11223 I
20
I I BRN l4AWG rg--11221~11222~E+-P--------~p•-e~)----· 11224 CBL1122YRED
) TO CONVEYOR MomR POWER
21
22 I I
- CR11201
BLU_14AWG 11 _r 11231 BLU_14AWG ~ N N' ~
11233 CBL1122YWHT
11241CBL1122ysLK
)
)
TO CONVEYOR MOroR POWER
24
25
IL __ GRN-YEL 14AWG
CR11161
□ ~11273
ORIENTAL MOTOR
SIGNAL CABlf
11271CBL1127}1YEL ) TO CONVEYOR MomR FEEDBACK
I
I
B
26 L, 7 1--~fruN sccw
X2
11281 CBL1127YBRN ) TO CONVEYOR MomR FEEDBACK
B
27
I N
..... SSTOP MODE
X3
11291CBL1127YRED > TO CONVEYOR MomR FEEDBACK I
AUX CONNECT PLATE N
28 (MAIN E-BOX)
3-003517 ~NC
11301 CBL1 myoRG ) TO CONVEYOR MOroR FEEDBACK I
29
I ~ALM RESET 11311 CBL1127YGRN ) TO CONVEYOR MOTOR FEEDBACK
EBCB-J17 EBCB-P17
30
+24VDC MANAGED
1>
~R_E....cD_2=---2A_W_G_ _~IN-COMO 11321 CBL1 my DRAIN ) TO CONVEYOR MOroR FEEDBACK I
{EBCB F41) I Cl G
31 CONVEYOR RUN
32
CONVEYOR START/STOP 2 >
GND 3 >
29313A1
~g11-09 L _ _ _ _ _J
33 4) >4 ~~~?R RUN I
34 ~g11-27 _J
CONV
35 BAGGER E-STOP
~--<--+---+----<E-----<Q)T_B=--_ _
BLU_22AWG
A (
1 1 -5 13202:----..---,-1+-; 200698A1 NOTE: EXIT CONVEYORS ARE OPTIONAL EQUIPMENT. YOUR MACHINE MAY NOT BE EQUIPPED WITH CONVEYORS. A
36 CONVEYOR 24VDC CONTROL ~g11-04,11-05 TITLE: ELECTRICAL SCHEMATIC
CBL11121
I
37 3-004159
CABlf, ABBOO E-BOX TO CONVEYOR E-BOX BAGGER [-STOP I hlAutomated EXIT CONVEYOR DRIVES
ONE OR lWO EXIT CONVEYOR(S) OPTION
200698A1 lliiilt/iil FW:KAGING SYSTEMS
38 I N011-22,11-23
NC
I 10175 PHI UPP PNI.KWAY - STREETSBORO, OH 44241
DRAWN BY:
J.BIRD
DATE:
18 201
LIFECYCLE STATE:
Vaulted
PREV SHT:
10
SHEET:
11
NEXT SHT:
12
39 -- --
OPTIONAL SECOND CONVEYOR
I AB500/600-SCH-CE A
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
-+
. E
I' I' I I
;-,11
.JJl
fl L· 1, L.
1''111
11r -, rnllT +
II 0 11 I '.rh,- r Iii,
C
11
I c- l''.
L ~ ," I _ I _ I ' 11 I _ I...: , ~ _ ~JI 11 U~ I 1J I I c0
':'II' '',I'-' II II , 11 l:!L_: L
I I I r)I' ' I )\I, l, I I, nl I
UL _ 11- T] ==
nIL= == c:• Jr-,-=== I i::uc: -JI i=-( =
Iii
cl :
1:1,
1 _,
~I
( INSIDE) (OUTSIDE) ◄
D815 CONNECTION
THRU EBOX SIDEWALL
PIN EBCB
NUMBER SIGNAL NAME SIGNAL TYPE FUSE
3 PRINTER BUSY F22
5 SIGNALING SPARE INPUT 1 F33
8 SIGNALING SPARE INPUT 2 INPUT F20
9 FEEDER OK/CYCLE BAGGER F21
14 INHIBIT CYCLE F23
2 2 BAGGER OK/READY TO LOAD Q90/Q91, 21mA CURRENT LIMIT
4 PRINTER OK TO PRINT Q16/Ql7, 21mA CURRENT LIMIT
6 SIGNALING SPARE OUTPUT 1 Q92/Q93, 21mA CURRENT LIMIT
7 +24VDC
OUTPUT Q23, 0.26A CURRENT LIMIT
13 +24VDC
10 BAGGER STOP/ERROR Q68/Q69, 21mA CURRENT LIMIT
11 BAGGER HOLD Q70/Q71, 21mA CURRENT LIMIT
12 AUTO MODE STATE Q6/Q7, 21mA CURRENT LIMIT
1 GND GND
15 GND GND
TITLE: F-T:.1, - .-ff I T'
E! Automated
=-1
NOTE: SINK OR SOURCE MAX 21MA OUTPUTS ONLY* J, 'I -1 I 11 I/
11 IE~T 1~
*24VDC CURRENT LIMIT= 260MA MAX. - PACKAGING SYSTEMS DRAWN BY: DATE: LIFECYCLE STATE: PREV SHT: SHEET: NEXT SHT:
11'1 1'11 'I' I II IE!: [ - I:: ~' - I 11-' ;, J 30
THI'.:, EW C'.:- T'II< l'Fc-::01:y::-, =-~:;,l.l'Tlul PRODUCT GROUP: DRAWING NUMBER: REV:
~=- F=T'F~-11 =-r; ~::-, 1-: ,~,~
IL H' I 1u,, ,_,1_,U AB500/600-SCH-CE C
-+
GLOSARIO
A
A (Altura): Distancia perpendicular entre líneas horizontales o
planos que pasan a través de la parte superior e inferior de un objeto
A: Ancho
Ajuste Adaptar o modificar para que un valor resulte exacto.
Amp. : Amperios
Aplanadores de sellado: Mantienen las bolsas niveladas para el
sellado
AUTOMÁTICO: Modo automático
Aux.: Auxiliar
B
Banda del motor de transmisión: Banda mediante la cual la
máquina es accionada por un motor
Banda: Elemento que transmite energía por contacto por fricción
entre los dientes
Bar: Unidad métrica de presión
Baudio: Unidad que mide la velocidad de la comunicación
Bolsa: Receptáculo para contener el producto
BPM: Bolsas por minuto
C
C: Centígrado
Ciclo de energía: Desconexión de la energía y reconexión posterior
para reiniciar la máquina
Ciclo: Revolución que dura un determinado periodo de tiempo y que
ocurre nuevamente siguiendo el mismo orden
cm: Centímetros
cmm: Centímetros cúbicos por minuto
Conexión a tierra: Dispositivo de protección que conecta la unidad
a un potencial nulo
Glosario1
D
dB: Decibeles
DE: Diámetro externo
Debobinado motorizado: Dispositivo usado para mantener las
bolsas bajo una presión constante
Desinflador de bolsas: Elimina el aire de la bolsa antes de esta se
selle.
Diagrama de enhebrado: Diagrama que indica cómo la película de
bolsas debe enhebrarse en la unidad y conectarse a un equipo
auxiliar
E
E/S: Entrada y salida
EBCB (E-BOX Connector Board): Placa de conectores de la caja
eléctrica
E–Box: Caja eléctrica
Embudo de acumulación: Accesorio opcional de la empaquetadora
en bolsas que sostiene el producto durante el ciclo de la
empaquetadora y abre la bolsa.
Escala de calor: Temperatura de la barra selladora para sellar las
bolsas
ESD (Electrostatic Discharge): Descarga electroestática
ESDS (Electrostatic Discharge Sensitive): Sensible a la descarga
electroestática
Estante VL: Sostiene temporalmente bolsas muy cargadas.
F
F (Fahrenheit) : Temperatura en grados La suma de 32 más 9/5 es
la temperatura en grados Celsius.
FAB. (Flagship Auto Bagger): Empaquetadora automática en
bolsas emblema
Fusible: Dispositivo expandible para abrir un circuito eléctrico
cuando la corriende en el interior de este se vuelve excesiva
H
HMI: Interfaz entre el usuario y la máquina
HWCB: (Heat Wire Control Board): Placa de control de los cables de
calor
Hz: Hertz
Glosario2
I
Impresor: Unidad de impresión que imprime desde una cinta de
impresión sobre una bolsa
IMPULSO DE AIRE: Indica la cantidad de tiempo (en segundos) que
se activa el impulso de aire para abrir cada bolsa y llenarla.
Impulso: Disparo simple de aire
in pulgadas
Interruptor: Enciente/apaga el sistema.
K
kg: kilogramo
L
L: Largo o litros
lb: Libra
LED: Diodo emisor de luz Emite luz cuando se aplica una corriente
eléctrica.
LOTO (Log out/Tag out): Dispositivos de bloqueo y etiquetado
LRF: Lubricador del regulador del filtro
M
MAC (Media Access Control): Control de acceso a los medios
MCB (Main Control Board): Panel de control principal
MCS: Metros cúbicos por segundo
Micrón: Una millonésima parte de un metro
Mil: una unidad de medida que equivale a una milésima de pulgada.
mm: Milímetro
N
N/P: Número de pieza
N–m. : metro Newton
O
Ohmios: Unidad de resistencia eléctrica
OPCIÓN AUXILIAR: Equipo opcional instalado en la unidad
Glosario3
P
Pantalla de control: AutoTouch Interfaz principal entre el usuario y
la unidad del embolsador
Pantalla: Pantalla digital que muestra las funciones de operación y
configuración
PCB (Printed Circuit Board): Placa de circuito impreso
PCM: Pies cúbicos por minuto
Película: Películas de bolsas
Perno: Elemento utilizado para ajustar o asegurar un conjunto
PID (Proportional Integral Derivative Loop): Circuito derivativo
integral proporcional conocido también como bucle de
retroalimentación
Polietileno: Resina de etileno polimerizado que se usa para producir
bolsas
Presión de aire Presión de aire atmosférico o de aire comprimido
psi (Pounds per square inch): Libras por pulgada cuadrada
Puerto de serie: Tipo de comunicación usado para conectar la
computadora a la máquina
PUNTO DE SELLADO: Se usa para establecer la distancia entre la
abertura de la bolsa y el sellado de la bolsa.
R
RECORDAR: Se usa para almacenar y recuperar información.
REINICIO: Se usa para mostrar el tipo de estado de Espera o
REINICIO.
Rodillo accionador de goma: Rodillos usados para hacer mover las
bolsas
Rodillo de presión: Rodillo usado para sostener las bolsas en su
lugar
Rodillo oscilante: Dispositivo usado para mantener las bolsas bajo
una presión constante
Rueda pivotante: Rueda que gira libremente en un eje
S
SEG: Segundos
Sellado de borde: Extrae el recorte de la bolsa para alinear el sello
con la parte superior de la bolsa.
Sensor: Dispositivo que detecta un valor o un cambio
Sentido antihorario: Hacia la izquierda, en sentido contrario a las
agujas del reloj
Sentido horario: Hacia la derecha, en el sentido de las agujas del
reloj
Suministro de energía: Conecta la fuente principal de energía al
sistema.
Glosario4
T
Teflon®: Marca comercial de politetrafluoretileno (PTFE), que se
utiliza como revestimiento para evitar que el material se pegue
TIEMPO DE SELLADO: Se usa para establecer la cantidad de
tiempo en que la barra de presión presiona sobre la barra selladora
para sellar la bolsa.
U
UFCB (Upper Frame Control Board): Placa de control de la
carcasa superior
V
V.: Voltios
VCA: Voltios de corriente alterna
VCC: Voltios de corriente continua
VELOCIDAD: Se usa para configurar la cantidad de bolsas que se
sellan por minuto.
Glosario5
PÁGINA EN BLANCO
Glosario6